BE20 Cockpit Reference PDF

King Air 200
Cockpit Reference Handbook
August 2010
Notice: This King Air 200 Cockpit Reference Handbook is to be used
for aircraft familiarization and training purposes only. It is not to be
used as, nor considered a substitute for the manufacturer’s Pilot or
Maintenance Manuals.
SimuFlite
Copyright © 2010, CAE, Inc.

All rights reserved.
Raytheon aircraft materials used in this publication

have been reproduced with permission of
the Raytheon Aircraft Corporation.
Printed in the United States of America.

Introduction
Welcome to CAE SimuFlite!
Our goal is a basic one: to enhance your safety, proficiency

and professionalism within the aviation community. All of us
at CAE SimuFlite know that the success of our company
depends upon our commitment to your needs. We strive for
excellence by focusing on our service to you.
We urge you to participate actively in all training activities.

Through your involvement, interaction, and practice, the full
value of your training will be transferred to the operational
environment. As you apply the techniques presented
through CAE SimuFlite training, they will become “second
nature” to you.
Thank you for choosing CAE SimuFlite. We recognize that

you have a choice of training sources. We trust you will find
us committed to providing responsive, service-oriented
training of the highest quality.
Our best wishes are with you for a most successful and
rewarding training experience.
The Staff of CAE SimuFlite
King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 1-1

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
1-2 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

September 2002
Introduction
Introduction
CAE SimuFlite created this reference handbook for cockpit use.
It is an abbreviated version of the CAE SimuFlite Technical
Manual and includes international flight planning information.
Please refer to the front of each chapter for a table of contents.
The Procedures chapter contains four elements: Preflight

Inspection, Expanded Normal Procedures, a sample Standard
Operating Procedure (SOP), and Maneuvers.
The Limitations chapter contains general, operational, and air-

craft systems limitations.
The alphabetically arranged Systems chapter includes text for

particular systems and relevant color schematics.
The Flight Planning chapter includes maximum allowable

takeoff and landing weight flow charts and a sample loading
schedule. International flight planning information includes a
checklist, a glossary of frequently used international flight oper-
ation terms, and sample flight plan forms (ICAO and FAA) with
completion instructions.
The Servicing chapter contains servicing specifications and

checklists for fueling, defueling, and other servicing procedures.
The Emergency Information chapter provides basic first aid

instructions.
Information in the Conversion Tables chapter may facilitate

your flight planning and servicing computations.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

September 2002
Operating Procedures
This chapter contains four sections: Preflight Inspection,
Expanded Normal Procedures, a sample Standard Operating
Procedure (SOP), and Maneuvers. Although these procedures
are addressed individually, their smooth integration is critical to
ensuring safe, efficient operations.
Preflight Inspection contains an abbreviated checklist for the
exterior inspection as well as preflight cockpit and cabin
checks.
Expanded Normal Procedures presents checklists for normal
phases of flight. Each item, when appropriate, is expanded to
include cautions, warnings, and light indications.
Standard Operating Procedures details Pilot Flying/Pilot Not
Flying callouts and verbal or physical responses.
Maneuvers contains pictorial representations of specific
maneuvers.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998
Preflight Inspection
Table of Contents
Cockpit Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-3
Noisy Ramp Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7
External Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-8
Left Wing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-8
Left Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-10
Nose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-12
Right Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-13
Right Wing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-15
Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-17
Cabin Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-19
King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 2A-1

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
2A-2 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

October 1996
Cockpit Inspection
Control Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVED/STOWED
Trim Tabs (Elevator/Aileron/Rudder) . . . . . . . . . 0 UNITS
CAUTION: The elevator trim system must not be manually,

electrically, or by action of the autopilot forced past the
limits indicated on the elevator trim indicator scale.
Fuel Control Panel CBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN

Right Side Panel CBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN
Landing Gear Switch Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOWN
Landing Gear Control CB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN
Electrical Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF/AUTO
Oxygen System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Passenger Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . PUSH OFF
Oxygen System Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL ON
Crew Diluter Demand Masks . . . DON MASK/CHECK/STOW
Don oxygen mask. Check fit and operation. After perform-
ing oxygen mask check, stow the mask so that it is available
for immediate use.
WARNING: Beards and mustaches should be carefully

trimmed so that they will not interfere with proper
oxygen mask sealing. The fit of the oxygen mask should
be checked on the ground for proper sealing. Hats and
“earmuff” type headsets must be removed prior to don-
ning masks. Headsets and eyeglasses worn by crew
members may interfere with quick-donning capabilities.

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Oxygen Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DETERMINE
NOTE: A bottle of 1,850 PSIG at 15°C is fully charged

(100% capacity). Read % of capacity directly from the table.
Read the oxygen pressure from the gage. Read IOAT (with
battery ON). Determine the percent of usable capacity from
the following graph (e.g., 1,100 PSI at 0°C equals 57%).
Compute the oxygen duration in minutes from the table by
multiplying the full bottle duration by the percent of usable
capacity (e.g., pilot and copilot with masks set at 100% plus
6 passengers equals 10 people using oxygen).
Fig. 2A-1; Oxygen Duration Chart

June 2000
Stated ‡ Number of People Using

Cylinder Size 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16‡ 17‡
(cu ft) Duration in Minutes
22 151 75 50 37 30 25 21 18 16 15 13 12 11 10 10 * *
49 or 50 334 167 111 83 66 55 47 41 37 33 30 27 25 23 22 20 19
66 445 222 148 111 89 74 63 55 49 44 40 37 34 31 29 27 26
76 or 77 514 257 171 128 102 85 73 64 57 51 46 42 39 36 34 32 30
115 772 386 257 193 157 128 110 96 85 77 70 64 59 55 51 48 45
Table 2A-1; King Air 200 Oxygen Duration with Full Bottle (100% Capacity)
Stated ‡ Number of People Using

Cylinder Size 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16‡ 17‡
(cu ft) Duration in Minutes
22 144 72 48 36 28 24 20 18 16 14 13 12 11 10 * * *
50 317 158 105 79 63 52 45 39 35 31 28 26 24 22 21 19 18
70 488 244 162 122 97 81 69 61 54 48 44 40 37 34 32 30 28
115 732 366 244 183 146 122 104 91 81 73 66 61 56 52 48 45 43
Table 2A-2; King Air B200 Oxygen Duration with Full Bottle (100% Capacity)
* Will not meet oxygen requirements
‡ For oxygen duration computations, count each diluter-demand crew mask in use
as 2 (e.g., with 4 passengers and a crew of 2, enter the table at 8 people using).

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Hot Battery Bus Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERFORMED

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN
Firewall Fuel Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSE
Listen for operation. If valve movements are inaudible
because of outside noise, use Noisy Ramp Procedures,
following page.
Standby Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Listen for operation.
NOTE: On BB-1096, 1098 and subsequent and BL-58

and subsequent, standby pumps are not on the Hot
Battery bus.
Battery Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
FUEL PRESS annunciators illuminate.
Firewall Fuel Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN
FUEL PRESS annunciators extinguish.
Standby Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Crossfeed Switch . . . . . ALTERNATELY LEFT AND RIGHT
FUEL CROSSFEED annunciator illuminates and extinguish-
es and both FUEL PRESS annunciators extinguish.
Voltmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS TO TEST
Both voltmeters should read normal battery voltage of 24V. No
voltage on one side indicates current limiter is out; 23V mini-
mum for battery start; 20V minimum for external power start.
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . SELECTED UP/INDICATING UP
Fuel Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Battery Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET
Cockpit Fire Extinguisher . . . CHECK PRESSURE/SECURE

September 2002
Noisy Ramp Procedure

Standby Pump CBs (see note, previous page) . . . . . PULL
Firewall Fuel Valves CBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL
Firewall Fuel Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSE
Standby Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Firewall Fuel Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN
Standby Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Standby Pumps CBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN
Firewall Fuel Valves CBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN
Crossfeed Switch . . . . . ALTERNATELY LEFT AND RIGHT
FUEL CROSSFEED annunciator illuminates and extinguish-
es and both FUEL PRESS annunciators extinguish.
Voltmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS TO TEST
Both voltmeters should read normal battery voltage of 24V. No
voltage on one side indicates current limiter is out; 23V mini-
mum for battery start; 20V minimum for external power start.
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . SELECTED UP/INDICATING UP
Fuel Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Battery Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Preflight Inspection Walkaround Path External Inspection

Unfold the preflight inspection diagram for ease of reference.
Each segment of the following preflight inspection checklist is
identified by letters A through F to correspond to the diagram.
A Left Wing
C
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . FULLY RETRACTED/UNDAMAGED
B D
E Fuel Sump (aft of wheel well) . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAINED
Aileron . . . . NEUTRAL/UNDAMAGED/FREE MOVEMENT
Bonding Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE
A
F Hinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO EXCESS PLAY
Trim Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALIGNED WITH AILERON
The inboard end of each aileron may be up to 1/2 inch
above or below the outboard flap at the trailing edge when
the flaps are properly rigged.
Flush Outboard Wing Tank Sump . . . . . . . . . . DRAINED
Fuel System Air Inlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR
Static Wicks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED
NOTE: All wicks must be installed and in good condition

when VLF/Omega equipment is used.
Wingtip Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED

Main Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO LEAKAGE
Fuel Cap/Locking Tab . . . . . . . . SECURE/FACING AFT
Stall Warning Vane . . . . . . . . . CONDITION CHECKED/
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .FREE MOVEMENT

September 2002
Tie-Down and Chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVED

Outboard Deice Boot/Stall Strip . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED
Recessed Fuel Vent/
Heated Ram Air Vent . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED
Wing Fuel Sump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAINED
Landing Gear/Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Tires/Wheel Assembly . . . . . . . . CHECK CONDITION
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK CONDITION
Strut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROPER INFLATION
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE
Brake Lines/Brake Wear/Brake Deice Lines . . CHECKED
Inverter Cooling Louvers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR
Fire Extinguisher Cylinder Pressure (if installed) . CHECKED
See Pressure versus Temperature chart in Servicing
chapter.
Fuel Sump Strainer Drain (forward of wheel well) . . . DRAIN
Standby Pump Drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAIN
Firewall Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAIN
Ice Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
B Left Engine
Engine Oil . . . CHECK QUANTITY (no more than 4 quarts low)
Caplock Flange . . . CLOCKWISE TO STOP POSITION AFT
NOTE: To avoid overservicing the tank and high oil con-

sumption, an oil level check is recommended within 30
min. after engine shutdown. Ideal interval is 15-20 min. If
more than 30 min. has passed and the dipstick indicates
that oil is needed, start the engine and run at ground idle
for 5 min. then recheck the oil level.
NOTE: Service the oil system in accordance with Consum-

able Materials in the Handling, Service, & Maintenance
section (8) of the AFM and P&WC SB 3001. DO NOT MIX
different brands of oil (except as provided in Consumable
Materials). Normal operating range is FULL to 4 quarts
low. Maximum oil consumption is 1 quart in 10 hours of
operation.
Left Cowling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSPECTED

Cowling Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN
Linkage/Hoses/Accessories . . . . . CHECK CONDITION
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK CONDITION
Bleed Valve Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR
Cowling Bolt Alignment Arrows . . . . . . LOCK POSITION
Top Cowling Locks (inboard and outboard) . . . . SECURE
Left Exhaust Stack . . . . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED
Covers/Prop Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVE
Inlet Lip Heat Scupper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE
Propeller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONDITION CHECKED
Deice Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED
Prop Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO LEAKAGE

September 2002
Engine Air Intake Throat . . . . . . . . CLEAR/UNDAMAGED

Ice Vane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RETRACTED
Bypass Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RETRACTED/
. . . . . . . . . . . . .FLUSH WITH COWLING SURFACE
Right Exhaust Stack . . . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED
Right Cowling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSPECTED
Cowling Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSE/SECURE
Top Cowling Locks (inboard/outboard) . . . . . . SECURE
Generator Ram Air Scoop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR
Nacelle Cooling Ram Air Inlets . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR
Auxiliary Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO LEAKAGE
Fuel Cap/Locking Tab . . . . . . . . SECURE/FACING AFT
Inboard Deice Boot/Stall Strip . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED
Heat Exchanger Inlet/Outlet . . . . . . CLEAR/UNDAMAGED
Auxiliary Fuel Tank Sump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAINED
Hydraulic Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Hydraulic Landing Gear Service Door . . . . . . . . SECURE
Hydraulic Landing Gear Vent Lines . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR
Lower Antennas and Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
C Nose
Air Temperature Probe . . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED
Pilot’s Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAN/UNDAMAGED
Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE/PARKED
Left Avionics Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURED
Air Conditioner Outlet Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR
Pilot’s Pitot Tube . . . . . . . . . . REMOVE COVER/CLEAR
Nose Gear/Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSPECTED
Door Hinges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GOOD CONDITION
Turn Limits . . . . . . . . . . VERIFY NOT EXCEEDED
Turn Stop Plate . . . . . STRAIGHT/HOLES CIRCULAR
Linkages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK CONDITION
Landing/Taxi Lights . . . . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED
Radome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSPECTED
Copilot’s Pitot Tube . . . . . . . . REMOVE COVER/CLEAR
Air Conditioning Ram Air Scoop Inlet . . . . . . . . . CLEAR
Right Avionics Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE
Copilot’s Windshield . . . . . . . . . . CLEAN/UNDAMAGED
Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE/PARKED

October 1996
D Right Engine
Auxiliary Fuel Tank Sump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAINED
Battery Box Drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR
Battery Air Inlet Valve . . . . . . . . SECURE/NOT BINDING
Proper Valve Position . . . . FULLY OPEN AT 80°F (27°C)/
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .FULLY CLOSED AT 30°F (-1°C)
Inboard Deice Boot/Stall Strip . . . . UNDAMAGED/SECURE
Heat Exchanger Inlet/Outlet . . . . . . CLEAR/UNDAMAGED
Battery Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR
Auxiliary Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO LEAKAGE
Fuel Cap/Locking Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE/AFT
Engine Oil . . . CHECK QUANTITY (no more than 4 quarts low)
Caplock Flange . . . CLOCKWISE TO STOP POSITION AFT
NOTE: To avoid overservicing the tank and high oil con-

sumption, an oil level check is recommended within 30
min. after engine shutdown. Ideal interval is 15-20 min. If
more than 30 min. has passed and the dipstick indicates
that oil is needed, start the engine and run at ground idle
for 5 min. then recheck the oil level.
NOTE: Service the oil system in accordance with Consum-

able Materials in the Handling, Service, & Maintenance
section (8) of the AFM and P&WC SB 3001. DO NOT MIX
different brands of oil (except as provided in Consumable
Materials). Normal operating range is FULL to 4 quarts
low. Maximum oil consumption is 1 quart in 10 hours of
operation.
Left Cowling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSPECTED


September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

Air Conditioner Compressor/
Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK CONDITION
Cowling Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSE
Top Cowling Locks (outboard/inboard) . . . . . . SECURE
Nacelle Cooling Ram Air Inlets . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR
Left Exhaust Stack . . . . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED
Covers/Prop Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVE
Propeller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK CONDITION
Deice Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED
Prop Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO LEAKAGE
Engine Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR/UNDAMAGED
Ice Vane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RETRACTED
Bypass Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RETRACTED/
. . . . . . . . . . . . .FLUSH WITH COWLING SURFACE
Right Exhaust Stack . . . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED
Right Cowling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSPECTED
Linkage/Hoses/Accessories . . . . CONDITION CHECKED
Top Cowling Locks (inboard/outboard) . . . . . . SECURE
Cowling Bolt Alignment Arrows . . . . . . . LOCK POSITION
Generator Ram Air Scoop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR

September 2002
E Right Wing
Ice Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED
Firewall Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAINED
Fuel Sump Strainer Drain
(forward of wheel well) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAINED
Standby Pump Drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAINED
Landing Gear/Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Tires/Wheel Assembly . . . . . . . . CHECK CONDITION
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK CONDITION
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE
Brake Lines/Brake Wear/Brake Deice Lines . . . . CHECK
Fire Extinguisher Cylinder Pressure . . . . . . . . CHECKED
See Pressure vs. Temperature chart in Servicing chapter.
Recessed Fuel Vent/
Heated Ram Air Vent . . . . . . . . CLEAR/UNDAMAGED
Wing Fuel Sump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAINED
Ground Power Unit Access Door . . . . . CLOSED/SECURE
Tie-Down and Chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVED
Outboard Deice Boot/Stall Strip . . . UNDAMAGED/SECURE
Main Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO LEAKAGE
Fuel Cap/Locking Tab . . . . . . . . . SECURE/FACING AFT
Wingtip Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED
Fuel System Air Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Static Wicks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED

Aileron . . . . NEUTRAL/UNDAMAGED/FREE MOVEMENT

Bonding Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE
Hinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO EXCESS PLAY
Bendable Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
Flush Outboard Wing Tank Sump . . . . . . . . . . DRAINED
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . FULLY RETRACTED/UNDAMAGED
Fuel Sump (aft of wheel well) . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAINED
Oil Breather Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR

September 2002
F Tail
Cabin Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK CONDITION
Emergency Escape Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE
Oxygen Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE
Right Static Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR
Emergency Locator
Transmitter (ELT) Switch . . . . . . . . . . ARM POSITION
ELT Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED
Cabin Air Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR
Ventral Fin Water Drains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR
Tie-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVED
Lower Antennas/Beacon . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED
Empennage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSPECTED
Right Horizontal Stabilizer Deice Boot . . . . . . SECURE/
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .UNDAMAGED
Static Wicks . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED

Stinger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
Control Surfaces, Elevator,
and Rudder . . . . . . . . . . . CONDITION CHECKED
Rudder Trim Tab . . . . . . . . . ALIGNED WITH RUDDER
Elevator Trim Tabs . . . . . . . . . . VERIFY 0/NEUTRAL
Navigation/Strobe Lights . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Tail Flood Lights . . . . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED

Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED
Left Stabilizer Deice Boot . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED
Drains (lavatory, oxygen, discharge, relief tube) . . . CLEAR
Left Static Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR
Cabin Door/Seal . . . . . . . . . . . CONDITION CHECKED
Cabin Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . CONDITION CHECKED

September 2002
Cabin Inspection
Cabin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCKED/SECURE
On King Air 200C/B200C aircraft, prior to first flight of day,
check cabin/cargo door annunciator circuitry in accordance
with Cabin/Cargo Annunciator Check in the Pilot’s Operating
Manual/AFM.
WARNING: Only a crew member should close and lock

the door.
Toilet Knife Valve (Monogram electric toilet) . . . . . . OPEN

Load and Baggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE
Weight and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Cabin Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . CHARGED/SECURE
Cabin Seats and Belts . . . . . SECURE/GOOD CONDITION
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAN/GOOD CONDITION
Passenger Oxygen Mask Compartments . . . . . CHECKED
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . VERIFY CLOSED/LATCHED
Emergency Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE
Interior lock must be in the unlocked position to permit
access from outside the aircraft in an emergency.
Passenger Briefing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONDUCT

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite

October 1996
Expanded Normal Procedures

Table of Contents
Checklist Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-3
Normal Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-5
Before Starting Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-5
Starting Engines – Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-12
Starting Engines – External Power . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-17
Engine Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-21
Before Taxi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-22
Before Takeoff (Runup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-24
Before Takeoff (Final Items) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-32
Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-32
Climb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-33
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-33
Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-34
Before Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-35
Normal Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-35
Maximum Reverse Thrust Landing . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-36
Balked Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-36
After Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-37
Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-37
Traffic Pattern Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-40
King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 2B-1

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-42
Aircraft Turning Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-43
Mooring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-44
Miscellaneous Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-45
Sample Passenger Briefing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-48
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-49
Preflight Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-49
Taxi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-51
Takeoff and Flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-51
Icing – AD 96-09-13 & AD 98-20-38 . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-52
Icing Flight – King Air 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-55
Icing Flight – King Air B200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-61
In Flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-65
Before Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-67
2B-2 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

September 2002
Checklist Usage
Tasks are executed in one of two ways:
■ as a sequence that uses the layout of the cockpit controls
and indicators as cues (i.e., “flow pattern”)
■ as a sequence of tasks organized by event rather than panel
location (e.g., After Takeoff, Gear – UP, Flaps – UP).
Placing items in a flow pattern or series provides organization
and serves as a memory aid.
A challenge-response review of the checklist follows execution
of the tasks; the pilot not flying (PNF) calls the item, and the
appropriate pilot responds by verifying its condition (e.g.,
“Propeller Anti-Ice” [challenge] – “ON” [response]).
Two elements are inherent in the execution of normal
procedures:
■ use of either the cockpit layout or event cues to prompt the
correct switch and/or control positions followed by the normal
checklist as a done list
■ use of normal checklists as “done” lists.

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Cockpit Flow Pattern Cockpit Flow Pattern
Left Seat
Right Seat

October 1996
Normal Procedures
Before Starting Engines
Passenger Briefing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETED
The passenger briefing should include the following items:
■ Smoking
■ Use of Safety Belts

■ Seat Positions
■ Normal and Emergency Exit Operation
■ Fire Extinguishers
■ Oxygen Use (if required)
■ Survival Equipment (if required)
■ Overwater Equipment (if required)
NOTE: This briefing is required to be given by the Pilot in

Command, crewmember, or other person designated by
the Certificate Holder before takeoff. It may be delivered
by means of an approved playback device but must be
supplemented by printed cards appropriate to the aircraft.
Cabin Door/Cargo Door Circuitry Check . . . COMPLETED

Refer to page 2B-45.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Cabin Door/Cargo Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCKED

Electric Toilet (if installed) . . . . . . KNIFE VALVE OPEN
Load and Baggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURED
Weight and Center of Gravity . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POSITIONED
Control Locks (Figure 3B-1) . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVED
Seats/Rudder Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADJUSTED
Position seat backs upright. Ensure lateral tracking seats are
in the outboard position.
Seatbelts/Shoulder Harnesses . . . . . . . . . FASTENED
Oxygen System Preflight . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETED
Passenger Manual Drop Out . . . . . . . . . . PUSH OFF
Crew Diluter Masks . . . . . . . . . . . . DON/CHECK FIT/
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .OPERATION/STOW
Oxygen Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DETERMINE
A bottle of 1850 PSIG at 15°C is fully charged (100% capac-
ity). Read duration directly from Table 2B-1; Oxygen
Duration table.
Indicated Outside Air Temperature (battery ON) . . . CHECK
Usable Oxygen Capacity . . . DETERMINE FROM GRAPH
• Compute oxygen duration in minutes from Table 2B-2;
Oxygen Available with Partially Full Bottle by multiply-
ing the full bottle duration by the percent of usable
capacity.
• Pilot and copilot are each counted as two people with
diluter demand masks set at 100% or NORMAL mode.

September 2002
Number of People Using Oxygen1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 161 171
Duration in Minutes
22 144 72 48 36 28 24 20 18 16 14 13 12 11 10 * * *
49 or 50 317 158 105 79 63 52 45 39 35 31 28 26 24 22 21 19 18
66 422 211 140 105 84 70 60 52 47 42 38 35 32 30 28 26 24
76 or 77 488 244 162 122 97 81 69 61 54 48 44 40 37 34 32 30 28
115 732 366 244 183 146 122 104 91 81 73 66 61 56 52 48 45 43
Table 2B-1; Oxygen Duration

*Will not meet oxygen requirements.
1 For oxygen duration computations, count each diluter-demand crew mask
in use as two
(e.g., with four passengers and two crew members, enter the table at eight
people using oxygen.)
Table 2B-2; Oxygen Available with Partially Full Bottle

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Fuel Panel Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN

Pilot’s Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Compass Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLAVED
TYPE I Prop Sync Switch (if installed) . . . . . . . . . OFF
TYPE II Prop Sync Switch (if installed) . . . . . . . . . ON
Pilot’s Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORMAL
Mic Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORMAL
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIRM SET
While applying brakes, push parking brake knob com-
pletely in, depress button on end of parking brake knob,
and pull completely out.
Engine Ice Vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTENDED
NOTE: The engine ice vanes should be extended for all

ground operations to minimize ingestion of ground debris.
Turn engine anti-ice OFF, when required, to maintain oil
temperature within limits (B200 only).
Pilot Air Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED

Defrost Air Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Landing Gear Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DN
Landing Gear Relay Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . IN
All Other Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Avionics Panel Switches . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF OR STANDBY
Power Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Power Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE/FRICTION SET
Propeller Levers . . . . FULL FORWARD/FRICTION SET
Condition Levers . . . . . FUEL CUT OFF/FRICTION SET
September 2002
Elevator/Aileron/Rudder Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET

Landing Gear Alternate Extension . . . . . . . . STOWED
Pedestal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
Cabin Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS
Rudder Boost Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Elevator Trim Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Pressurization Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET
Copilot’s Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Compass Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLAVED
Copilot’s Clock (control wheel) . . . . . . . . . CHECK/SET
Copilot’s Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Cabin Sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO SMOKE/FSB
Vent Blower Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO
During operation in AUTO, MANUAL HEAT, or MANUAL
COLD, the ventilation blower operates in the LOW posi-
tion. For maximum cooling, select the ventilation blower to
HIGH and the aft blower to ON. With the air conditioner on,
maintain at least 60% (200) or 62% (B200) N1 speed on
the right engine. If below N1 maximum speed, the AIR
CND N1 LOW annunciator illuminates and the air condi-
tioner compressor clutch disengages.
NOTE: With the cabin temperature mode switch in AUTO,

MAN HEAT, or MAN COOL, the ventilation blower operates
at low speed. Placing the vent blower switch in HIGH
increases air circulation. To obtain maximum cooling, place
the ventilation blower in HIGH and the aft blower (if installed)
ON. With air conditioning on, maintain the right engine at
60% N1 or higher. If below minimum N1 speed, the AIR
COND N1 LOW annunciator illuminates and the air condition-
ing clutch disengages. For maximum heating, the ventilation
blowers should be in HIGH and the aft blower selected OFF.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Bleed Air Valve Switches . . . . . . OPEN OR ENVIR OFF

ENVIR OFF for more efficient cooling on the ground.
Cabin Temp Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Use the radiant heat system only in conjunction with manual
temperature control mode.
Cabin/Cockpit Air Control . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
If needed, divert cabin airflow to cockpit.
Copilot Air Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Mic Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORMAL
Oxygen Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIRM
All Other Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Copilot’s CB Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Pilot’s Static Air Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORMAL
Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Fuel System Check (Quiet Ramp Procedure) . . CHECKED
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
L/R FUEL PRESS and L/R ICE VANE EXT annunciators
illuminate.
Firewall Shutoff Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSE
Standby Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Listen for operation. L/R FUEL PRESS annunciators illu-
minate.
Firewall Shutoff Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN
L/R FUEL PRESS annunciators extinguish.
Standby Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
L/R FUEL PRESS annunciators illuminate.

September 2002
Crossfeed . . . . . . . . . . . ALTERNATELY LEFT/RIGHT

FUEL CROSSFEED Annunciators . . . . . . ILLUMINATE
L/R FUEL PRESSURE Annunciators . . . . EXTINGUISH
Crossfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Auxiliary Tank Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO
No Transfer Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS TO TEST
Fuel System Check (Noisy Ramp Procedure) . . CHECKED
Standby Pump CBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL
Firewall Fuel Valve CBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL
Firewall Shutoff Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSE
Standby Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Battery Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Firewall Fuel Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSE
Standby Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Crossfeed Switch . . . . . . . ALTERNATELY LEFT/RIGHT
FUEL CROSSFEED annunciator illuminates and extin-
guishes and both FUEL PRESS annunciators extinguish.
Fuel Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK MAIN/AUXILIARY
Hydraulic Fluid Sensor (if installed) . . . . . . . . TESTED
HYD FLUID LOW Annunciator . . . . . . . . ILLUMINATED
Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
DC Volts/Loadmeters . . . . VOLTAGE CHECKED/23V MIN

Check that voltage is a minimum of 23V for battery start and
20V for external power start. No voltage indicates that a cur-
rent limiter is out.
Landing Gear Handle Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . TESTED
Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TESTED
Stall Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TESTED
Fire Detectors/Fire Extinguishers . . . . . . . . . TESTED
Before Starting Engine Checklist . . . . . . COMPLETED
Starting Engines – Battery

See Limitations chapter for starter/generator limitations.
During engine start, crew duties should be defined and orga-
nized. The pilot monitors ITT, N1, and 10 second time limit for
light off; the copilot is responsible for starter time limits and all
other indications or abnormalities. He provides verbal confir-
mation of oil pressure, ignition, and fuel pressure. This allows
the pilot to concentrate on the two most important starting para-
meters; ITT and N1. In addition, it prevents both pilots from
looking at the same gage at the same time and leaving other
indicators unmonitored.
CAUTION: If no ITT rise occurs within 10 seconds after

moving the condition lever to LOW IDLE, move the
condition lever to FUEL CUT-OFF. Allow 60 seconds for fuel
to drain and starter to cool. Refer to Engine Clearing pro-
cedure (2B-21).

September 2002
Right Ignition and Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON

Check the following:
• N1 Rotation
• IGNITION ON annunciator illuminates
• FUEL PRESS annunciator extinguishes
• Propeller begins rotation
• N1 Stabilized
• Oil pressure rises
Right Condition Lever . . . . . . LOW IDLE (12% N1 MIN)
Move condition lever to LOW IDLE when N1 indicates 12% or
above. Ensure fuel flow is between 135 and 150 pph.
ITT and N1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MONITOR/1,000°C MAX
CAUTION: If ITT appears likely to exceed 1,000°C,

move condition lever to FUEL CUT-OFF. Leave ignition
and Engine Start switches in ON position. Continue
motoring the engine to reduce ITT. Refer to Engine
Clearing procedure (2B-21).
NOTE: After aborting start attempt, allow 60 seconds delay

for fuel draining, motor the engine for a minimum of 15 sec-
onds, and allow the engine to stop completely before
attempting another start.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Right Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED

At low idle, engine oil pressure should indicate a minimum of
60 PSI.
Right Condition Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIGH IDLE
Ensure ITT is stabilized. To avoid excessive ITT, adjust the con-
dition levers to a higher N1 speed (approximately 60% N1) dur-
ing ground operation in high ambient temperatures, at high ele-
vations, and during periods of high generator load.
If an abnormally high ITT occurs, particularly if accompanied by
an N1 decrease, turn off the generator and air conditioner com-
pressor before attempting to accelerate the right engine.
Right Ignition and Engine Start . . . . .OFF (N1 50% MIN)
Right Generator . . . . . . . . ON/CHARGE BATTERY/OFF
Generator OFF when loadmeter reads approximately 0.50.
CAUTION: Ensure the right generator is off for start.

Energizing the left starter with the right generator oper-
ating causes damage or failure of the right 325A current
limiter. The same is true for the right starter with the left
generator operating.
NOTE: On S/Ns BB-1439, 1444 and subsequent except

1463; BL-139 and subsequent, the generator can be left
on for the second engine start.

September 2002
Left Ignition and Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON

• N1 Rotation
• N1 Stabilized
Right Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON (L N1 12% MIN)
Switch generator to ON position as left N1 accelerates
through 12%.
Left Condition Lever . . . . . . .LOW IDLE (L N1 12% MIN)
Move condition lever to LOW IDLE when N1 indicates 12%
or above. Ensure fuel flow is between 135 and 150 pph.
BATTERY CHG annunciator illuminates.
ITT and N1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MONITOR/1,000°C MAX

Left Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED

60 PSI.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Left Ignition and Engine Start . . . . . . OFF (N1 50% MIN)

Ensure all engine gages indicate normal.
DC Volts/Loadmeters . . . . . . . CHECKED (27.5 TO 29V)
Push for volts to check DC voltage.
Left Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESET/THEN ON
On S/N BB-037 and subsequent; BL-001 and subse-
quent, if the battery charge annunciator does not extinguish
within five minutes, check battery condition as follows:
Either Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . ENSURE 28V INDICATION
Battery Switch . . . . . . . . . . . OFF MOMENTARILY/
. . . . . . . . . . . . .NOTE LOADMETER DECREASE
If decrease exceeds 2.5%:
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONTINUE CHARGING/
. . . . . . .REPEAT ABOVE STEPS EVERY 90 SECS
Battery Charge Annunciator . . . EXTINGUISHED WHEN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .LOADMETER DECREASE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BELOW 2.5%
Right Condition Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOW IDLE

September 2002
Starting Engines – External Power

See Limitations chapter for starter/generator limitations.
During engine start, crew duties should be defined and orga-
nized. The pilot monitors ITT, N1, and 10 second time limit for
light off; the copilot is responsible for starter time limits and all
other indications or abnormalities. He provides verbal confir-
mation of oil pressure, ignition, and fuel pressure. This allows
the pilot to concentrate on the two most important starting para-
meters; ITT and N1. In addition, it prevents both pilots from
looking at the same gage at the same time and leaving other
indicators unmonitored.
CAUTION: If no ITT rise occurs within 10 seconds after

moving the condition lever to LOW IDLE, move the
condition lever to FUEL CUT-OFF. Allow 60 seconds for fuel
to drain and starter to cool. Refer to Engine Clearing pro-
cedure (2B-21).
Avionics Master Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

Left/Right Generator Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Ensure both generator switches are in the OFF position.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
The battery absorbs transient power surges.
CAUTION: Do not connect an external power source to the

aircraft unless battery voltage indicates a charge of at least
20V. If the voltage is less than 20V, recharge or replace the
battery before reconnecting a ground power unit.
NOTE: If the battery is partially discharged, the BATTERY

CHARGE annunciator illuminates approximately 6 seconds
after external power is on line. If the annunciator fails to
extinguish within 5 minutes, perform the Ni-Cad Battery
check (2B-47).
External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF/CONNECTED

The ground power unit (GPU) should be off before connect-
ing it to the aircraft.
CAUTION: Use only an external power source fitted with

an AN-type plug.
External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 TO 28.4V
Verify GPU output voltage is set at 28.0 to 28.4 volts (B200)
or 28.0 to 28.5 volts (200).
Propeller Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATHER
Verify area near right propeller is clear before continuing start
procedure.
R FUEL PRESS Annunciator . . . . . . . . EXTINGUISHED

September 2002
Right Ignition and Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON

• N1 Rotation
• N1 Stabilized
Right Condition Lever . . . . . . LOW IDLE (12% N1 MIN)
Move condition lever to LOW IDLE when N1 indicates 12% or
above. Ensure fuel flow is between 135 and 150 pph. BAT-
TERY CHG annunciator illuminates.
ITT and N1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MONITOR/1,000°C MAX

NOTE: After aborting start attempt, allow 60 seconds delay

for fuel draining, motor the engine for a minimum of 15 sec-
onds, and allow the engine to stop completely before
attempting another start.
Right Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED

60 PSI.
Right Ignition and Engine Start . . . . .OFF (N1 50% MIN)
Right Generator . . . . . . . . ON/CHARGE BATTERY/OFF

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Left Ignition and Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON

• N1 Rotation
• N1 Stabilized
L FUEL PRESS Annunciator . . . . . . . . EXTINGUISHED
Left Condition Lever . . . . . . . .LOW IDLE (N1 12% MIN)
Move condition lever to LOW IDLE when N1 indicates 12%
or above. Ensure fuel flow is between 135 and 150 pph. BAT-
TERY CHG annunciator illuminates.
ITT and N1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MONITOR/1,000°C MAX
Left Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
60 PSI.
Left Ignition and Engine Start . . . . . . OFF (N1 50% MIN)
External Power . . . . . . . OFF/DISCONNECT/SECURED
After the second engine has been started, disconnect the
ground power unit and secure the access door.
Left and Right Generators . . . . . . . . RESET/THEN ON
Propeller Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FULL FORWARD

September 2002
Engine Clearing
Condition Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FUEL CUT OFF
Ignition/Engine Start . . . . STARTER ONLY/40 SEC MAX
CAUTION: Do not exceed starter limits..
Starter Use . . . . . . . . . . . . DO NOT EXCEED LIMITS

Starter Limitation – 40 secs ON/60 secs OFF/40 secs ON/60
secs OFF/40 secs ON/30 mins OFF.
Ignition/Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Before Taxi
Propeller Beta Range may be used during taxi with minimum
blade erosion up to the point where N1 increases. Exercise care
when taxiing on unimproved surfaces.
NOTE: If excessive engine ITT occurs during any one of

the following conditions, adjust the condition levers for a
higher N1 speed:
• When high generator loads are required.
• During operations at high ambient temperatures.
• During operations at high field elevations.
NOTE: If excessive ITTs are encountered, particularly if

accompanied by a decreasing N1, the associated genera-
tor should be turned off before attempting to accelerate the
engine. If the right ITT is high, also turn off the air condi-
tioner by selecting the CABIN TEMP MODE switch to OFF.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Inverters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Inverter No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Verify INVERTER annunciator extinguishes. Check that
inverter voltage and frequency is within tolerance.
Inverter No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Verify INVERTER annunciator extinguishes. Check that
inverter voltage and frequency is within tolerance.
26V AC may be checked with torque meters.
PC-17A Inverters: 115V AC +5/-7% – 400 Hz ±1%
PC-250 Inverters: 115V AC ±3% – 400 Hz ±1%
Inverters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SELECT No. 1 OR No. 2
Loadmeters . . . . . . . . . . . PARALLELED WITHIN 10%
Avionics Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
External Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Cabin Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Bleed Air Valves . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN OR ENVIR OFF
ENVIR OFF for more efficient cooling on the ground.
Cabin Temp Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO
Cabin Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Brake Deice (if installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
CAUTION: Do not leave brake deice on longer than

required to check function of annunciators at ambient tem-
peratures above 15°C.

September 2002
Bleed Air Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN

Condition Levers (if brake deice required) . . . HIGH IDLE
You may see a BLEED AIR FAIL light at low idle.
Pneumatic Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
Brake Deice (annunciator illuminated) . . . . . . . . . . ON
Pneumatic Gage . . . . . . . . . . OBSERVE DECREASE
Brake Deice (annunciator extinguished) . . . . . . . . OFF
Pneumatic Gage RECOVERED
Condition Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOW IDLE
NOTE: Brake deice control valves may become inoperative

if valves are not cycled periodically. One cycle of the valves
is required daily regardless of the weather conditions.
Flight Controls . . . . . . . . CHECKED/FREE MOVEMENT

Check for proper direction of movement and freedom of trav-
el.
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED/SET
Flap Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FULL DOWN
Check gage indication for flaps FULL.
Flap Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPROACH/UP
Check gage indication. Visually confirm flaps up.
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RELEASED/CHECKED
Both pilot and copilot apply brakes to test for normal effec-
tiveness.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Before Takeoff (Runup)

If possible, conduct engine runup on a hard surface free of
sand and gravel, to avoid pitting of propeller blades and aircraft
surfaces.
Avionics and Radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Call out the navaid, frequency, and course information for
primary and secondary navigation radios. Ensure DME is
properly set, set radar to standby or off, and initialize VLF.
Pressurization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED/SET
Bleed Air Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN
Cabin Altitude Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET
Adjust so that CABIN ALT dial indicates an altitude of
1,000 ft below field pressure altitude.
Rate Control Selector Knob . . . SET INDEX AT 12 O’CLOCK
Cabin Pressurization Switch . . . . . . . . HOLD IN TEST
Cabin Climb Indicator . . . . . . . CHECK FOR DESCENT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .INDICATION
Cabin Pressurization Switch . . . . . . . RELEASE WHEN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PRESSURIZATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CONFIRMED
Cabin Altitude Selector Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . ADJUST
Adjust selector knob so that inner scale (ACFT ALT) indi-
cates planned cruise altitude plus 1,000 ft. If this setting
does not result in an outer scale (CABIN ALT) indication of
at least 500 ft above takeoff field pressure altitude, adjust
as required.

September 2002
Autopilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Control Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL TO MID-TRAVEL
Autopilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENGAGE
Control Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . PUSH FORWARD/HOLD
With the control wheel pushed forward, the trim wheel
should move toward nose-up.
Control Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL AFT/HOLD
With the control wheel pushed forward, the trim wheel
should move toward nose-down.
Pitch Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOVE UP/DN
The control wheel should follow pitch wheel movement.
Turn Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEFT/RIGHT
The control wheel should follow turn knob movement.
HSI Heading Marker . . . . . SET UNDER LUBBER LINE
Flight Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . SELECT HDG MODE
Heading Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOVE
The control wheel should follow heading marker move-
ment.
Control Wheel Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . PRESS
Autopilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISENGAGES
If AP DISC light begins flashing, press AP-YD/TRIM switch
to extinguish light.
Autopilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENGAGE
Pitch Trim Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TOUCH
Autopilot should disconnect but yaw damper remains
engaged.
Primary Controls . . . CHECK FREEDOM OF MOVEMENT

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Elevator Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
WARNING: Electric trim system operation should occur

with movement of pairs of switches. Any elevator trim
wheel movement while depressing only one switch indi-
cates system malfunction. The elevator trim control switch
must then be turned off and flight conducted using only
manual trim wheel.
Elevator Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Pilot’ and Copilot’s Switches . . . . . CHECK OPERATION
Trim Quick Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
ELECT TRIM OFF Annunciator . . . . . . . ILLUMINATED
Elevator Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF/THEN ON
ELEC TRIM OFF Annunciator . . . . . . . EXTINGUISHED
Trim Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIRM SET
Two to three units of up trim are normally required for approxi-
mately neutral control pressure at single engine climb speeds.
Primary Governors, Overspeed Governors,
and Rudder Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TESTED
Rudder Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Prop Governor Test Switch . . . HOLD IN PROP GOV TEST
ITT/Torque Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OBSERVE
Left Power Lever . . . . . . . . INCREASE UNTIL STABLE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AT 1870 ±40 RPM
Left Propeller Lever . . . . . . . . . RETARD TO DETENT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .THEN FULL FORWARD
Verify the RPM, with the propeller control positioned at the
top of the red hatched area on the throttle quadrant, cor-
responds with the bottom of the green arc (1,600 RPM).
September 2002
Left Power Lever . . . INCREASE UNTIL RUDDER MOVES

Left Power Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
Right Power Lever . . . . . . . INCREASE UNTIL STABLE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AT 1870 ±40 RPM
Right Propelled Lever . . . . . . . . RETARD TO DETENT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .THEN FULL FORWARD
Verify the RPM, with the propeller control positioned at the
top of the red hatched area on the throttle quadrant, cor-
responds with the bottom of the green arc (1,600 RPM).
Right Power Lever . . . INCREASE UNTIL RUDDER MOVES
Right Power Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
Prop Governor Test Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . RELEASE
Autofeather (if installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
NOTE: As propeller feathers, torque increases over 220

ft-lbs. This causes the propeller to cycle out of and then
back into feather with associated on/off indications of the
AUTOFEATHER annunciator.
Power Levers . . . . . . . APPROX 500 FT-LBS TORQUE

Autofeather Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOLD TO TEST
L/R AUTOFEATHER Annunciators . . . . . ILLUMINATED
Left Power Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RETARD
At approximately 410 ft-lbs, R AUTOFEATHER annuncia-
tor extinguishes
At approximately 260 ft-lbs, both AUTOFEATHER annun-
ciators extinguishes
Left Power Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESET
Replace left power lever to position which illuminates both
AUTOFEATHER annunciators.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Right Power Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RETARD

At approximately 410 ft-lbs, R AUTOFEATHER annuncia-
tor extinguishes
At approximately 260 ft-lbs, both AUTOFEATHER annun-
ciators extinguishes
Power Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RETARD BOTH
Autofeather (if installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARMED
Propeller feathering (manual) . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Check for positive and even response from both propellers.
Vacuum and Pneumatic Pressure . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Left Bleed Air Valve . . . . . . . . . . INSTR & ENVIR OFF
LBL AIR OFF Annunciator . . . . . . . . . ILLUMINATED
Gyro Suction Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . IN GREEN ARC
Pneumatic Pressure Gage . . . . . . . IN GREEN ARC
Right Bleed Air Valve . . . . . . . . . INSTR & ENVIR OFF
R BL AIR OFF Annunciator . . . . . . . . ILLUMINATED
L/R BLEED FAIL Annunciators . . . . . . ILLUMINATED
Gyro Suction Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZERO
Pneumatic Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZERO
Left Bleed Air Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN
L BL AIR OFF Annunciator . . . . . . . EXTINGUISHED
L/R BLEED FAIL Annunciators . . . . . EXTINGUISHED
Right Bleed Air Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN
R BL AIR OFF Annunciator . . . . . . . EXTINGUISHED
Engine Ice Vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED

September 2002
Systems for Icing Flight . . . . CHECKED AS REQUIRED

The following checks should be completed in addition to the
normal checklist items during cold weather operations.
Please refer to AFM Section 4 for complete procedures to be
accomplished during cold weather operation.
Auto Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
Power Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
Auto Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARM
L/R IGNITION ON annunciators illuminated.
Power Levers . . . ADVANCE ABOVE 360-460 FT-LBS
L/R IGNITION ON annunciators extinguished.
Power Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
L/R IGNITION ON annunciators illuminated.
Auto Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
L/R IGNITION ON annunciators extinguished.
Engine Anti-Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
Engine Ice Vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RETRACT
L/R ICE VANE EXT annunciators extinguished.
Engine Ice Vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTEND
L/R ICE VANE EXT annunciators illuminated.
WARNING: Either the main or standby engine anti-ice

actuator must be operational on each engine before takeoff.
Windshield Anti-Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK

Windshield Anti-Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIGH
Observe increase on left and right loadmeters.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Windshield Anti-Ice . . . . . . . . . OFF/THEN NORMAL

Windshield Anti-Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Electrothermal Propeller Deice . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
CAUTION: Do not operate propeller deice when the pro-

pellers are static.
Automatic Prop Deice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO

Deice Ammeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
Monitor for 90 seconds to ensure automatic timer oper-
ation.
Manual Prop Deice Switch HOLD IN MANUAL POSITION
Small deflection on both loadmeters indicates system
operation. Deice ammeter should indicate zero amps.
Manual Prop Deice Switch . . . . . . . . . . . RELEASE
Deice Ammeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
Automatic Prop Deice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Surface Deice System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
WARNING: Do not cycle the boots during takeoff.
Condition Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIGH IDLE

Pneumatic Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK

September 2002
Surface Deice Switch . . . . . . . . . SINGLE/RELEASE

Pneumatic pressure decreases momentarily. Visually
check for boot inflation then hold down. The wing boots
inflate in six seconds followed by the horizontal stabiliz-
er boots in four seconds.
Surface Deice Switch . . . . . . . . . . MANUAL/HOLD
Pneumatic pressure decreases momentarily. Visually
check for boot inflation.
Surface Deice Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RELEASE
Stall Warning and Pitot Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
CAUTION: Prolonged use of stall warning and pitot heat on

the ground will damage the heating elements.
NOTE: To check stall warning and pitot heat operation,

not loadmeter indications with switch operation. Load fluc-
tuation is easier to observe on single generator.
Fuel Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED

Flight Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Engine Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Before Takeoff (Final Items)

Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET
Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET
Two to three units of up trim is normally required for approxi-
mately neutral control pressure at single engine climb speeds.
Brake Deice (if installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Left/Right Bleed Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN
Aft Blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Annunciators . . . . . . . . EXTINGUISHED/CONSIDERED
Ice Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON IF REQUIRED
Auto Ignition, L/R pitot heat, L/R fuel vent heat, stall warning
heat.
Generator Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Engine Ice Vanes . . . . RETRACTED IF NOT REQUIRED
External Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Transponder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
V1/VR/V2/Minimum T/O Power . . . . . . . . . CONFIRMED
Takeoff
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOLD
NOTE: Takeoff must be initiated from a full stop in order

to meet performance data.
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET
Autofeather Annunciators (if installed) . . . ILLUMINATED
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RELEASED

September 2002
Landing Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . UP AT POSITIVE CLIMB

All gear and handle lights extinguish.
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UP (VYSE MIN)
Retract flaps above VYSE. Flap gage indicates flaps up..
Climb
Yaw Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Climb Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET
ITT/Torque/N1 Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MONITOR
NOTE: Increasing airspeed will cause torque and ITT

increase.
Propeller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,900 RPM

Propeller Synchrophaser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Autofeather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Engine Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MONITOR
Cabin Sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Cabin Pressurization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Reset controller if necessary. Adjust rate knob if necessary.
Aft Blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Cruise
Cruise Power . . . . . . . . SET/SEE TABLES & GRAPHS
NOTE: Do not lift power levers in flight.
Engine Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MONITOR

Auxiliary Fuel Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MONITOR
Pressurization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MONITOR

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Descent
Pressurization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET
Cabin Altitude Selector Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET
Set to airport pressure altitude plus 500 ft. Approximately
75% N1 is required to maintain pressurization schedule dur-
ing descent. Refer to manufacturer’s Pilot Operating Manual
or the SimuFlite Operating Handbook for controller settings.
Rate Control Selector Knob . . . . . . . . . . AS DESIRED
Altimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET
Cabin Sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Windshield Anti-Ice . . . . . . AS REQUIRED/NORMAL/HI
Set to NORMAL or HI well before descent into warm, moist
air to aid in defogging.
Autofeather (if installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARMED
Fuel Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
CAUTION: Avoid propeller operation in the range of 1,750

to 1,850 RPM because it may cause ILS glideslope inter-
ference.

September 2002
Before Landing
Approach Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIRM
Pressurization (See Chart) . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Cabin Sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO SMOKE/FSB
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPROACH
Landing Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DN
Call out all lights that are turned on.
Prop Sync (Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Surface Deice . . . . . . . . . . . . CYCLED AS REQUIRED
Normal Landing
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOWN
Airspeed . . . . . . . . . . . NORMAL APPROACH SPEED
Yaw Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Power Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
Power Levers . . . BETA/REVERSE AFTER TOUCHDOWN
CAUTION: To ensure constant reversing characteristics,

set propeller control in FULL INCREASE RPM position.
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Maximum Reverse thrust Landing

Refer to AFM Performance section for applicable landing dis-
tance charts.
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOWN
Airspeed . . . . . . . . . . . NORMAL APPROACH SPEED
Yaw Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIGH IDLE
Condition Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIGH IDLE
Propeller Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIGH RPM
Power Levers . . . LIFT/REVERSE AFTER TOUCHDOWN
CAUTION: If possible, move propellers out of reverse at

approximately 40 kts to minimize propeller blade erosion.
Exercise care when reversing on runways with loose sand,
dust, or snow on the surface. Flying gravel damages pro-
peller blades; dust or snow may impair the pilot’s forward
field of vision at low aircraft speeds.
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Condition Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOW IDLE
Balked Landing
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE
Airspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 KTS
When clear of obstacles:
Normal Climb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESTABLISHED
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UP
Landing Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UP

September 2002
After Landing
Auto Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Engine Ice Vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTENDED
Ice Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Transponder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STANDBY
Radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STANDBY OR OFF
Trim Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UP
Shutdown
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET
High brake temperatures may damage brakes if parking
brake remains set.
NOTE: Avoid setting the parking brake when the brakes

are hot from severe usage or when moisture conditions
and freezing temperatures could form ice locks.
CAUTION: The parking brake should be left off and wheel

chocks installed while the aircraft is unattended. Changes in
ambient temperature can cause the brakes to release or
exert excessive pressure.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Standby Boost Pumps/Crossfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
CAUTION: The standby boost pumps and crossfeed are

connected to the Hot Battery bus. Failure to turn these
switches OFF discharges the battery.
Avionics Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Autofeather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Vent Blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO
Cabin Temp Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Aft Blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Radiant Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHARGED
ITT . . . . . STABILIZED AT MIN TEMP FOR ONE MINUTE
CAUTION: Monitor ITT during shutdown. If sustained com-

bustion occurs, perform Engine Clearing procedure check-
list. During shutdown, ensure the compressors decelerate
freely. Do not close the fuel firewall shutoff valves for normal
engine shutdown.
Condition Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FUEL CUTOFF

Monitor ITT. Check for normal spool-down.
Propeller Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATHER
Ensure propeller control operation. Listen for normal spool-
down.

September 2002
DC Volts/Loadmeters . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK VOLTAGE

Voltmeters PRESS FOR VOLTS. No voltage indicates cur-
rent limiter is out.
Overhead Panel Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Oxygen System Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PUSH OFF
Battery/Generator Switches . . . . . OFF BELOW 15% N1
Control Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLED
CAUTION: Towing the aircraft with a tug while control locks

are installed can seriously damage the steering linkage.
CAUTION: Do not tow or taxi aircraft if gear shock struts

are deflated.
Emergency Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCKED

Electric Toilet . . . . . . . . . . SERVICED AS REQUIRED
Tiedowns/Chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
CAUTION: High velocity winds can cause structural dam-

age. When winds above 75 knots are expected, move the
aircraft to a safe area. Hangar if possible.
External Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED

Propeller Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Oil Quantity Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Traffic Pattern Checklist

After Landing/Taxiback
Ice Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET
Before Takeoff
Crew Briefing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETED
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET
Altitude Alerter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET (RH)
Flight Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED (RH)
Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Final Items:
Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
Auto Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARMED
Ice Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Takeoff
Ignition Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF (RH)
Autofeather Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON (RH)
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET (RH)
Engine Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED (RH)
Climb
Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UP (RH)
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UP (RH)

September 2002
Landing/Taxi Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

Yaw Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON (RH)
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET
Approach
Altimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET/CHECKED
Autofeather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARMED
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPROACH (RH)
Before Landing
Landing Gear . . . . . . . . DOWN (RH)/3 GREEN (BOTH)
Landing/Taxi Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Final Items:
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Yaw Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Propellers . . . . . . . FORWARD AT TOUCHDOWN (RH)
After Clearing Runway

Landing/Taxi Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Recognition/Strobe Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Anti-Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESET (RH)
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UP (RH)
Radar/Transponder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STANDBY
After Clearing Runway Checklist . . . . . . . COMPLETED

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Towing
Tow Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTED
The tow bar connects to the upper torque knee fitting of the
nose strut. Refer to Figure 2B-1 for aircraft turning radius.
Control Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVED
Aircraft Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . BY HAND UNLESS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CONNECTED TO TUG
Although the tug controls aircraft steering, someone should
be in the pilot seat to operate the brakes in case of an emer-
gency. Do not use propellers or control surfaces to push or
move the aircraft.
Exceeding the turn limit damages the nose gear and linkage.
Maximum nosewheel turn angle is 48° left and right.
CAUTION: Towing the aircraft with a tug while control

locks are installed can seriously damaged the steering
linkage.
CAUTION: Do not tow or taxi aircraft if gear shock

struts are deflated.
Towing Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETED

September 2002
Aircraft Turning Radius
39' 10"
RADIUS FOR
WING TIP
21' 1"
OUTSIDE 19' 6"
GEAR NOSE
WHEEL
2B-1

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Mooring
Wheel Chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALL
Tie-downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE
Secure tie-downs to three mooring eyes, one under each
wing and one in the ventral fin.
Prop Restraints/Covers/Control Locks . . . . . . SECURE
The propeller may windmill even in light winds; a windmilling
propeller is a safety hazard. Prolonged windmilling at zero oil
pressure can damage bearings.
Secure the propeller with one blade down when mooring to
allow moisture to drain from spinner.
CAUTION: High velocity winds can cause structural

damage. When winds above 75 knots are expected,
move the aircraft to a safe area; hangar it if possible.
NOTE: Do not set parking brakes during low tempera-

tures when an accumulation of moisture may cause the
brakes to freeze. Do not set brakes when they are hot
from severe use.

September 2002
Cabin Door Annunciator

Circuitry Check (B200)
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN/MECHANISM LOCKED
CABIN DOOR annunciator illuminates.
Door . . . . . . . . CLOSED AND LATCHED/NOT LOCKED
CABIN DOOR annunciator remains illuminated.
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSED AND LOCKED
Verify CABIN DOOR annunciator extinguishes.
Battery Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Cabin/Cargo Door Annunciator

Circuitry Check (B200C)
Battery Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Cargo Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSED AND LOCKED
Cabin Door . . . . . . . . . . CLOSED BUT NOT LOCKED
Verify that CABIN DOOR annunciator illuminates.
Cabin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN
Cabin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN
Check that CABIN DOOR annunciator illuminates.
Cabin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSED AND LOCKED

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Heating/Cooling System
Bleed Air Valves . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN OR ENVIR OFF
Use ENVIR OFF for more efficient cooling on the ground.
Cabin Temperature Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO
Vent Blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO
Radiant Heat or Aft Blower . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Radiant heat should only be used with cabin temperature
mode in manual.
Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Cabin Air Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
NOTE: With the cabin temperature mode switch in AUTO,

MAN HEAT, or MAN COOL, the ventilation blower operates
at low speed. Placing the vent blower switch in HIGH
increases air circulation. To obtain maximum cooling, place
the ventilation blower in HIGH and the aft blower (if installed)
ON. With air conditioning on, maintain the right engine at
60% N1 or higher. If below minimum N1 speed, the AIR
COND N1 LOW annunciator illuminates and the air condi-
tioning clutch disengages. For maximum heating, the ventila-
tion blowers should be in HIGH and the aft blower OFF.
Radiant Heat
Overhead radiant heat can be used in conjunction with an
ground power unit to warm the cabin before engine starting.
Radiant heat also provides supplemental in flight heating.

September 2002
Defroster Air
Windshield Defroster Air Control . . . . . . . . . PULL ON
Pilot, Copilot, and Cabin Air Controls . . . . . . . . . OFF
Turn these controls OFF if increased defroster airflow is
required.
Ni-Cad Battery Check

The BATTERY CHARGE annunciators illuminate when there
is an above normal battery charging current. After engine
start, battery charge current is high and the BATTERY
CHARGE annunciators illuminate.
Either Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
DC Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 VOLTS
Battery Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF MOMENTARILY/
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .NOTE LOADMETER DECREASE
If loadmeter decrease exceeds 2.5%:
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONTINUE CHARGING
Battery Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF MOMENTARILY/
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .NOTE LOADMETER DECREASE
Repeat every 90 seconds while noting decrease in loadmeter.
BATTERY CHARGE Annunciator . . . EXTINGUISHES WHEN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .LOADMETER DECREASE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IS LESS THAN 2.5%

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Sample Passenger Briefing

Welcome aboard. Our estimated time of arrival at is
. We will be climbing to . Enroute,
weather is .
Please ensure your seat belts are fastened during takeoff and
landing. Please comply with the No Smoking and Seat Belt
signs. We recommend for your comfort and safety that you
fasten your seat belt anytime you are seated. Your aircraft has
two exits: the main exit to the rear on the left side and a forward
emergency exit on the right side. Operating instructions are on
the exits as well as on the information card in your seat back
pocket.
In the unlikely event we should lose pressurization, an oxygen
mask will automatically be released from the overhead
compartment. Place the mask over your mouth and nose.
Breathe normally. Ensure the line attached to your mask has
pulled the key that allows oxygen to flow to the mask.
Any crew member will be happy to assist you with any ques-
tions about the safety equipment as well as the beverage and
snacks available for this flight.
Thank you for flying with us. Enjoy your flight.

September 2002
Cold Weather Operation

Refer to the respective aircraft’s Maintenance Manual for
deicing and anti-icing solutions and procedures.
Snow and ice on an airplane can seriously affect performance.
Wing contour may be sufficiently altered by snow and ice accu-
mulation where it affects wing lift qualities. Remove snow with a
soft brush or mop. Do not remove snow and ice accumulations
by chipping or mechanical means. Use of glycol-based deicing
fluids is recommended. Deicing/anti-icing fluids conforming to
specification MIL-A-8243 are recommended by the airframe
manufacturer.
NOTE: Deicing/anti-icing fluid type and concentration and

precipitation rate affect the effective treatment time. Refer
to the applicable aircraft Maintenance Manual for recom-
mended solutions and procedures for the removal of ice,
snow, and frost.
In addition to the normal preflight inspection items, the follow-

ing should be inspected during cold weather operations.
All Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR OF SNOW AND ICE
Verify all surfaces are clear of snow and ice. Pay particular
attention to the wings, horizontal stabilizer, and vertical
stabilizer. Snow and ice accumulation can seriously affect
aircraft performance.
Tires and Brakes . . . . . . . . . CHECK FOR FREEZE-UP
If tire freeze-up occurs, anti-ice solutions may be used on
the tires or brakes. Do not use anti-ice solutions that contain
lubricants such as oil. Use of these solutions will decrease
brake effectiveness.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR
Pay particular attention to all vents, exhausts, and other
openings. Remove accumulated snow or ice from these
areas.
Control Surfaces and Hinges . . . . . . CLEAR OF SNOW/
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .FREEDOM OF MOVEMENT
Inspect all control surfaces and hinge areas for accumulated
snow or ice. Control surfaces should move freely with no
signs of binding. A thorough check of all flight controls should
be made for complete freedom of movement.
Propellers and Hubs . . . . . . CLEAN/FREE TO ROTATE
Propeller blades and hubs should be free of ice. If engine
inlet covers were not used during snow and freezing rain
conditions, rotate the propellers by hand in the normal direc-
tion to ensure freedom of movement before engine start.
After engine start exercise the propellers through low and
high pitch, beta range, and into reverse range to flush any
congealed oil through the system.

September 2002
Taxi
Brake Deice System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
If the optional brake deice system is installed, turn it on for
taxiing, landing in snow, slush, or freezing rain.
Taxiing . . . . . . . . . . AVOID DEEP SNOW AND SLUSH
Avoid taxiing the aircraft in deep snow and slush to prevent
forcing snow and slush into the brake assemblies and subse-
quent brake freezing.
Ground Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLOW
Taxi slowly to compensate for possible decreased braking
action. Allow more clearance when maneuvering.
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RETRACT
Taxi with the flaps retracted to prevent snow and slush thrown
up by the wheels entering the flap mechanism. Thrown snow
and slush can also damage the flaps’ lower surfaces.
Before Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK FOR HAZARDS
Ensure the runway is clear of hazards such as snow drifts,
glazed ice, and ruts.
Takeoff and Flight

Takeoff Distance . . . . . ALLOW ADDITIONAL DISTANCE
When using a runway covered with snow or slush, increase
takeoff distance.
Landing Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . CYCLE AT 500 FT AGL
At 500 ft AGL, cycle the landing gear to dislodge moisture on
the landing gear retraction components.
Ice Vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTEND
When flying through visible moisture during takeoff, extend
the inertial ice vanes to prevent engine ice ingestion.
September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Icing – AD 96-09-13 & AD 98-20-38

Severe icing may result from environmental conditions outside
of those for which the airplane is certificated. Flight in freezing
rain, freezing drizzle, or mixed icing conditions (supercooled
liquid water and ice crystals) may result in ice build-up on
protected surfaces exceeding the capability of the ice protec-
tion system, or may result in ice forming aft of the protected
surfaces. This ice may not be shed using the ice protection
systems, and may seriously degrade the performance and con-
trollability of the airplane.
During flight, severe icing conditions that exceed those for which
the airplane is certificated shall be determined by the following
visual cues. If one or more of these visual cues exists, immedi-
ately request priority handling from Air Traffic Control to facilitate
a route or an altitude change to exit the icing conditions.
■ Unusually extensive ice accretated on the airframe in areas
not normally observed to collect ice.
■ Accumulation of ice on the upper surface of the wing aft of the
protected area.
■ Accumulation of ice on the propeller spinner farther aft than
normally observed.
Since the autopilot may mask tactile cues that indicate adverse
changes in handling characteristics, use of the autopilot is pro-
hibited when any of the visual cues specified above exist, or
when unusual lateral trim requirements or autopilot trim warn-
ings are encountered while the airplane is in icing conditions.
All icing detection lights must be operative prior to flight into icing
conditions at night (this supersedes any relief provided by the
Master Minimum Equipment List [MMEL]).

September 2002
The following weather conditions may be conducive to severe

in-flight icing:
■ Visible rain at temperatures below 0°C ambient air tempera-
ture.
■ Droplets that splash or splatter on impact at temperatures
below 0°C ambient air temperature.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Procedures for Exiting the Severe Icing Environment

These procedures are applicable to all flight phases from take-
off to landing. Monitor the ambient air temperature. While
severe icing may form at temperatures as cold as -18°C,
increasing vigilance is warranted at temperatures around freez-
ing with visible moisture present. If the visual cues specified in
the Limitations Section of the AFM for identifying severe icing
conditions are observed, accomplish the following:
■ Immediately request priority handling from Air Traffic Control
to facilitate a route or an altitude change to exit the severe
icing conditions in order to avoid extended exposure to flight
conditions more severe than those for which the airplane is
certificated.
■ Avoid abrupt and excessive maneuvering that may exacer-
bate control difficulties.
■ Do not engage the autopilot.
■ If the autopilot is engaged, hold the control wheel firmly and
disengage the autopilot.
■ If an unusual roll response or uncommanded roll control
movement is observed, reduce the angle-of-attack.
■ Do not extend flaps during extended operation in icing condi-
tions. Operation with flaps extended can result in a reduced
wing angle-of-attack, with the possibility of ice forming on the
upper surface farther aft on the wing than normal, possibly aft
of the protected area.
■ If the flaps are extended, do not retract them until the air-
frame is clear of ice.
■ Report these weather conditions to Air Traffic Control.

September 2002
Icing Flight – King Air 200
CAUTION: Operation of the surface deice system in ambi-

ent temperatures below -40°C can cause permanent dam-
age to the deice boots.
CAUTION: Due to distortion of the wing airfoil, stalling

speeds should be expected to increase as ice accumulates.
For the same reason, stall warning systems are not accu-
rate and should not be relied on. Maintain a comfortable air-
speed margin above normal stall speed when ice is on the
aircraft. Maintain a minimum of 140 kts airspeed during
operation in sustained icing conditions to prevent ice accu-
mulation on unprotected surfaces. If windshield icing
occurs, reduce airspeed to 226 kts or below.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Before Takeoff
Surface Deice System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
DEICE Switch . . . . . . . . . . . SINGLE THEN MANUAL
Deice Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
Deice Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VERIFY INFLATION
Wing deice boot inflation occurs for six seconds followed
by the horizontal stabilizer boot for four seconds.
Brake Deice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Engine Anti-Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
Engine RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,800 RPM
Ice Vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTEND
Torque Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOTE DROP
Ice Vane Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MONITOR
Ice Vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RETRACT
Torque Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOTE INCREASE
Engine RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REDUCE TO IDLE
Automatic Propeller Deice Switch . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO
CAUTION: Do not operate propeller deice when the

propellers are static.
Deice Ammeter . . . . . . 14 TO 18 AMPERES/MONITOR

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .FOR ONE MINUTE
Monitor the deice ammeter for one minute to verify auto-
matic timer operation.

September 2002
On S/Ns BB-2, 6 to 815, 817 to 824; BL-1 to BL-29:

Manual Propeller Deice Switch . . . MOMENTARILY HOLD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IN OUTER POSITION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .FOR 30 SECONDS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .THEN INNER POSITION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .FOR 30 SECONDS
On S/Ns BB-816, 825 and subsequent; BL-30 and sub-
sequent:
Manual Propeller Deice Switch . . . . HOLD IN MANUAL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POSITION FOR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 SECONDS
Automatic Propeller Deice Switch . . . . . . . . . . OFF
NOTE: Use of current for the manual (backup) system is

not registered on the propeller deice ammeter. However,
it will be indicated as part of the airplane’s load on the
loadmeter (small needle deflection) when the system is
switched on.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
In Flight
Surface Deice System . . . . . . . . . . . . . SINGLE WITH
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ICE ACCUMULATION
When 1/2 to 1 inch of ice accumulates, place the surface deice
switch in the SINGLE position. Either engine supplies
sufficient air pressure for deice operation. If SINGLE position
operation fails, use switch MANUAL position.
Engine Anti-Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Ice Vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTEND
Extend ice vanes before visible moisture encountered at
ambient temperatures of +5°C and below or at night when
freedom from visible moisture is not assured and tempera-
ture is +5°C and below.
Yellow ICE VANE Annunciators . . . . NOT ILLUMINATED
If either engine’s ice vane does not reach the selected posi-
tion within 15 seconds, the respective L/R ICE VANE light
will illuminate. Refer to Engine Ice Vane Failure procedure
in the AFM or SimuFlite Operating Handbook.

September 2002
Engine Torque . . . . . . . . . INCREASE IF NECESSARY

If necessary, advance power levers to compensate for
loss of engine torque with ice vane extension. Monitor
engine ITT to prevent exceeding operating limitations.
CAUTION: If in doubt, extend ice vanes. Engine icing

can occur even though no surface icing is present.
If freedom from visible moisture cannot be assured and
ambient temperature is +5°C or below, activate engine
anti-icing systems. Visible moisture is moisture in any
form such as clouds, ice crystals, snow, rain, sleet, hail,
or a combination of these. Ice vanes should be retract-
ed at +15°C and above to ensure adequate engine oil
cooling. Operation of strobe lights will sometimes show
ice crystals not normally visible. Ambient temperatures
can be as much as 10 to 15° colder than indicated out-
side air temperature.
Electrothermal Propeller Deice . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO

Place the automatic propeller deice switch in the AUTO posi-
tion. Continuous operation is permissible and the system will
continue to operate until switch placed in OFF position.
Relieve propeller imbalance by increasing RPM briefly.
Repeat as necessary.
CAUTION: If propeller deice ammeter fails to indicate 14

to 18 amperes (18 to 24 amperes for four-bladed pro-
pellers) or automatic timer fails, refer to AFM Emergency
Procedures.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Fuel Vent Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON

Pitot Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Stall Warning Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Windshield Anti-Ice . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED BEFORE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ICE FORMS
Wing Ice Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Alternate Static Air Source . . . REFER TO EMERGENCY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PROCEDURES IN AFM

September 2002
Icing Flight – King Air B200

The Beechcraft King Super King Air B200 is approved for flight
in icing conditions as defined by FAR 25, Appendix C. These
conditions do not include, nor were tests conducted in, all con-
ditions that may be encountered such as freezing drizzle,
mixed conditions, or conditions defined as severe.
Some icing conditions not defined in FAR 25 have the potential
of producing hazardous ice accumulations that exceed the
capabilities of the aircraft’s ice protection capabilities and/or
create unacceptable aircraft performance. Flight into icing con-
ditions that lie outside the FAR-defined conditions is not pro-
hibited. However, pilots must be prepared to promptly divert the
flight if hazardous ice accumulations occur.
Refer to Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) Section II for icing flight
limitations. Also refer to AFM Section IIIA for abnormal proce-
dures involving ice protection equipment and operations out-
side the FAR 25, Appendix C icing envelope.
WARNING: Due to distortion of the wing airfoil, ice

accumulations on the leading edges can cause a signifi-
cant loss of rate-of-climb and speed performance as well
as increases in stall speed. Even after cycling deicing
boots, the ice accumulation remaining on the boots and
unprotected areas of the airplane can cause large perfor-
mance losses. For the same reason, the aural stall
warning system may not be accurate and should not be
relied on. Maintain a comfortable airspeed margin above
normal stall speed. In order to minimize ice accumulation
on unprotected wing surfaces, maintain a minimum of 140
kts during operation in sustained icing conditions. If wind-
shield icing occurs, reduce airspeed to 226 kts or below.
Before landing approach, cycle the deicing boots to shed
any accumulated ice.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Before Takeoff (Runup)

Auto Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
Power Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
Auto Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARM
L/R IGNITION ON lights illuminate.
Power Levers . . . . . . . ADVANCE TO OBTAIN ABOVE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 TO 460 FT-LBS TORQUE
L/R IGNITION ON lights extinguish.
Power Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
Engine Ice Vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
Engine Ice Vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RETRACT
Engine Ice Vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTEND
Windshield Anti-Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
Windshield Anti-Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HI
Windshield Anti-Ice . . . . . . . . . . OFF THEN NORMAL
Windshield Anti-Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

September 2002
CAUTION: Do not operate propeller deice when the

propellers are static.
Automatic Prop Deice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO

Deice Ammeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 TO 18 AMPS
Monitor ammeter for 90 seconds to ensure automatic
timer operation.
On S/Ns before BB-829:
Manual Propeller Deice Switch . . MOMENTARILY HOLD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN INNER POSITION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .THEN OUTER
On S/Ns 829 and subsequent; BL-37 and subsequent:
Manual Propeller Deice Switch . . MOMENTARILY HOLD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN MANUAL POSITION
Use of current for the manual (backup) system is not
registered on the propeller deice ammeter, however it
will be indicated as part of the airplane’s load on the
loadmeters (small needle deflection) when the system
is switched on.
Automatic Propeller Deice Switch . . . . . . . . . . OFF

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Surface Deice System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK

Condition Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIGH IDLE
Pneumatic Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
Surface Deice Switch . . . . . . SINGLE THEN RELEASE
Pneumatic Pressure . . . . . MOMENTARY DECREASE
Deice Boots . . . . . . VISUALLY CHECK OPERATION
Wing deice boots inflate for 6 seconds followed by
horizontal stabilizer boot inflation for 4 seconds.
Surface Deice Switch . . . . . . . . . . HOLD IN MANUAL
Pneumatic Pressure . . . . . MOMENTARY DECREASE
Deice Boots . . . . . . VISUALLY CHECK OPERATION
Surface Deice Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RELEASE
Visually check that deice boots deflate and remain deflated.
WARNING: Do not cycle boots during takeoff.
Stall Warning and Pitot Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
CAUTION: Prolonged use of stall warning and pitot

heat on the ground will damage the heating elements.

September 2002
In Flight
Engine Ice Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Before visible moisture is encountered or at night when
freedom from visible moisture is not assured and ambient
temperature is +5°C or below. Operation of strobe lights will
sometimes show ice crystals not normally visible.
Engine Ice Vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTEND
L/R ICE VANE EXT lights illuminate.
Engine Ice Protection Operation . . . . . . CHECK/ NOTE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TORQUE DROP
If either engine’s ice vane does not reach the selected posi-
tion within 15 seconds, the respective L/R ICE VANE light
will illuminate. Refer to Engine Ice Vane Failure procedure
in the AFM or SimuFlite Operating Handbook.
WARNING: If in doubt, extend ice vanes. Engine icing

can occur even though no surface icing is present.
If freedom from visible moisture cannot be assured and
ambient temperature is +5°C or below, activate engine
anti-icing systems. Visible moisture is moisture in any
form such as clouds, ice crystals, snow, rain, sleet, hail,
or a combination of these. Operation of strobe lights
will sometimes show ice crystals not normally visible.
Ambient temperatures can be as much as 10 to 15°
colder than indicated outside air temperature.
Auto Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARM

Auto ignition must be ARMED for icing flight, precipitation, and
operation during turbulence. To prevent prolonged operation
of the ignitors with the system ARMED, do not reduce power
levers below 500 ft-lbs torque.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Electrothermal Propeller Deice . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO

The system may be operated continuously in flight and will
function automatically until the switch is turned off.
Increasing engine RPM briefly relieves propeller imbalance
caused by ice accumulation. Repeat as necessary.
CAUTION: If the deice ammeter does not indicate 14 to

18 amps (18 to 24 amperes on four-bladed propellers) or
the automatic timer fails to switch, refer to the AFM
Abnormal Procedures or SimuFlite Operating Handbook.
Surface Deice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SINGLE/MANUAL

When 1/2 to 1 inch of ice accumulates:
If surface deice switch SINGLE position fails:
Surface Deice Switch . . . . . . . HOLD IN MANUAL FOR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SIX SECONDS THEN RELEASE
WARNING: All components of the surface deice system

must be monitored during icing flight to ensure the sys-
tem is functioning normally.
CAUTION: Operation of the surface deice system in

ambient temperatures below -40°C can cause permanent
damage to the deice boots.

September 2002
Windshield Anti-Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORMAL/HI

Maximum airspeed for effective windshield anti-icing is
226 kts.
Left/Right Fuel Vent Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Left/Right Pitot Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Stall Warning Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Ice Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Alternate Static Air Source . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Before Landing
Before landing approach cycle the wing deice boots to shed
as much residual ice as possible regardless of the amount of
ice remaining on the boots. Stall speeds can be expected to
increase if ice is not shed from the deice boots.
Approach Speeds . . . . . . . . INCREASES IF RESIDUAL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ICE REMAINS
Landing Distance . . . . . . . INCREASES IF APPROACH
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SPEED INCREASES

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Landing/Taxi Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

Yaw Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON (RH)
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET
Approach
Altimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET/CHECKED
Autofeather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARMED
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPROACH (RH)
Before Landing
Landing Gear . . . . . . . . DOWN (RH)/3 GREEN (BOTH)
Landing/Taxi Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Final Items:
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Yaw Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Propellers . . . . . . . FORWARD AT TOUCHDOWN (RH)
After Clearing Runway

Landing/Taxi Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS REQUIRED
Recognition/Strobe Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Anti-Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESET (RH)
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UP (RH)
Radar/Transponder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STANDBY
After Clearing Runway Checklist . . . . . . . COMPLETED

September 2002
Standard Operating Procedures
Table of Contents
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-3
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-3
Flow Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-3
Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-4
Omission of Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-4
Challenge/No Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-5
Abnormal/Emergency Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-5
Time Critical Situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-6
Aborted Takeoffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-6
Critical Malfunctions in Flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-7
Non-Critical Malfunctions in Flight . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-7
Radio Tuning and Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-8
Altitude Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-8
Pre-Departure Briefings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-8
Advising of Aircraft Configuration Change . . . . . . . . 2C-9
Transitioning from Instrument to Visual Conditions . . . 2C-9
Phase of Flight SOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-11
Holding Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-11
Takeoff Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-13
Climb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-14
King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 2C-1

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-16
Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-17
Precision Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-19
Precision Missed Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-24
Precision Approach Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-26
Non-Precision Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-27
Non-Precision Missed Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-32
Non-Precision Approach Deviations . . . . . . . . . . 2C-34
Visual Traffic Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-35
Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-37
2C-2 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

October 1996
General Information
SimuFlite strongly supports the premise that the disciplined use
of well-developed Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) is
central to safe, professional aircraft operations, especially in
multi-crew, complex, or high performance aircraft.
If your flight department has an SOP, we encourage you to use
it during your training. If your flight department does not already
have one, we welcome your use of the SimuFlite SOP.
Corporate pilots carefully developed this SOP. A product of their
experience, it is the way SimuFlite conducts its flight operations.
The procedures described herein are specific to the King Air
200 and apply to specified phases of flight. The flight crew
member designated for each step accomplishes it as indicated.
Definitions
LH/RH – Pilot Station. Designation of seat position for accom-
plishing a given task because of proximity to the respective con-
trol/indicator. Regardless of PF or PNF role, the pilot in that seat
performs tasks and responds to checklist challenges accordingly.
PF – Pilot Flying. The pilot responsible for controlling the flight
of the aircraft.
PIC – Pilot-in-Command. The pilot responsible for the operation
and safety of an aircraft during flight time.
PNF – Pilot Not Flying. The pilot who is not controlling the flight
of the aircraft.
Flow Patterns
Flow patterns are an integral part of the SOP. Accomplish the
cockpit setup for each phase of flight with a flow pattern, then
refer to the checklist to verify the setup. Use normal checklists
as “done lists” instead of “do lists.”
Flow patterns are disciplined procedures; they require pilots to
understand the aircraft systems/controls and to methodically
accomplish the flow pattern.
September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Checklists
Use a challenge-response method to execute any checklist.
After the PF initiates the checklist, the PNF challenges by read-
ing the checklist item aloud. The PF is responsible for verifying
that the items designated as PF or his seat position (i.e., LH or
RH) are accomplished and for responding orally to the chal-
lenge. Items designated on the checklist as PNF or by his seat
position are the PNF’s responsibility. The PNF confirms the
accomplishment of the item, then responds orally to his own
challenge. In all cases, the response by either pilot is confirmed
by the other and any disagreement is resolved prior to continu-
ing the checklist.
After the completion of any checklist, the PNF states
“___ checklist is complete.” This allows the PF to maintain sit-
uational awareness during checklist phases and prompts the
PF to continue to the next checklist, if required.
Effective checklists are pertinent and concise. Use them the
way they are written: verbatim, smartly, and professionally.
Omission of Checklists
While the PF is responsible for initiating checklists, the PNF
should ask the PF whether a checklist should be started if, in
his opinion, a checklist is overlooked. As an expression of good
crew resource management, such prompting is appropriate for
any flight situation: training, operations, or checkrides.
Challenge/No Response
If the PNF observes and challenges a flight deviation or critical
situation, the PF should respond immediately. If the PF does
not respond by oral communication or action, the PNF must
issue a second challenge that is loud and clear. If the PF does
not respond after the second challenge, the PNF must ensure
the safety of the aircraft. The PNF must announce that he is
assuming control and then take the necessary actions to return
the aircraft to a safe operating envelope.

September 2002
Abnormal/Emergency Procedures
When any crewmember recognizes an abnormal or emergency
condition, the PIC designates who controls the aircraft, who
performs the tasks, and any items to be monitored. Following
these designations, the PIC calls for the appropriate checklist.
The crewmember designated on the checklist accomplishes
the checklist items with the appropriate challenge/response.
NOTE: “Control” means responsible for flight control of

the aircraft, whether manual or automatic.
The pilot designated to fly the aircraft (i.e., PF) does not per-
form tasks that compromise this primary responsibility, regard-
less of whether he uses the autopilot or flies manually.
Both pilots must be able to respond to an emergency situation
that requires immediate corrective action without reference to a
checklist. The elements of an emergency procedure that must
be performed without reference to the appropriate checklist are
called memory or recall items. Accomplish all other abnormal and
emergency procedures while referring to the printed checklist.
Accomplishing abnormal and emergency checklists differs from
accomplishing normal procedure checklists in that the pilot
reading the checklist states both the challenge and the
response when challenging each item.
When a checklist procedure calls for the movement or manipu-
lation of controls or switches critical to safety of flight (e.g.,
throttles, engine fire switches, fire bottle discharge switches),
the pilot performing the action obtains verification from the
other pilot that he is moving the correct control or switch prior
to initiating the action.
Any checklist action pertaining to a specific control, switch, or
equipment that is duplicated in the cockpit is read to include its
relative position and the action required (e.g., “Left Throttle –
IDLE; Left Boost Pump – OFF”).

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Time Critical Situations

When the aircraft, passengers, and/or crew are in jeopardy,
remember three things.
■ FLY THE AIRCRAFT – Maintain aircraft control.
■ RECOGNIZE CHALLENGE – Analyze the situation.
■ RESPOND – Take appropriate action.
Aborted Takeoffs
The aborted takeoff procedure is a preplanned maneuver; both
crewmembers must be aware of and briefed on the types of mal-
functions that mandate an abort. Assuming the crew trains to a
firmly established SOP, either crewmember may call for an abort.
The PF normally commands and executes the takeoff abort for
directional control problems or catastrophic malfunctions.
Additionally, any indication of the following malfunctions prior to
V1 is cause for an abort:
■ engine failure
■ engine fire.
In addition to the above, the PF usually executes an abort prior
to 65 KIAS for any abnormality observed.
When the PNF calls an abort, the PF announces “Abort.” or
“Continue.” and executes the appropriate procedure.

September 2002
Critical Malfunctions in Flight

In flight, the observing crewmember positively announces a
malfunction. As time permits, the other crewmember makes
every effort to confirm/identify the malfunction before initiating
any emergency action.
If the PNF is the first to observe any indication of a critical fail-
ure, he announces it and simultaneously identifies the malfunc-
tion to the PF by pointing to the indicator/annunciator.
After verifying the malfunction, the PF announces his decision
and commands accomplishment of any checklist memory
items. The PF monitors the PNF during the accomplishment of
those tasks assigned to him.
Non-Critical Malfunctions in Flight

Procedures for recognizing and verifying a non-critical malfunc-
tion or impending malfunction are the same as those used for
time critical situations: use positive oral and graphic communi-
cation to identify and direct the proper response. Time, how-
ever, is not as critical and allows a more deliberate response to
the malfunction. Always use the appropriate checklist to accom-
plish the corrective action.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Radio Tuning and Communication

The PNF accomplishes navigation and communication radio
tuning, identification, and ground communication. For naviga-
tion radios, the PNF tunes and identifies all navigation aids.
Before tuning the PF’s radios, he announces the NAVAID to be
set. In tuning the primary NAVAID, the PNF coordinates with
the PF to ensure proper selection sequencing with the autopi-
lot mode. After tuning and identifying the PF’s NAVAID, the PNF
announces “(Facility) tuned and identified.”
Monitor NDB audio output anytime the NDB is in use as the
NAVAID. Use the marker beacon audio as backup to visual
annunciation for marker passage confirmation.
In tuning the VHF radios for ATC communication, the PNF
places the newly assigned frequency in the head not in use
(i.e., preselected) at the time of receipt. After contact on the
new frequency, the PNF retains the previously assigned fre-
quency for a reasonable time period.
Altitude Assignment
The PNF sets the assigned altitude in the altitude alerter and
points to the alerter while orally repeating the altitude. The PNF
continues to point to the altitude alerter until the PF confirms
the altitude assignment and alerter setting.
Pre-Departure Briefings
The PIC should conduct a pre-departure briefing prior to each
flight to address potential problems, weather delays, safety
considerations, and operational issues. Pre-departure briefings
should include all crewmembers to enhance team-building and
set the tone for the flight. The briefing may be formal or infor-
mal, but should include some standard items. The acronym
AWARE works well to ensure no points are missed. This is also
an opportunity to brief any takeoff or departure deviations from
the SOP due to weather or runway conditions.

October 1996
NOTE: The acronym AWARE stands for the following.

■ Aircraft status
■ Weather
■ Airport information
■ Route of flight
■ Extra
Advising of Aircraft Configuration

Change
If the PF is about to make an aircraft control or configuration
change, he alerts the PNF to the forthcoming change (e.g.,
gear and flap selections). If time permits, he also announces
any abrupt flight path changes so there is always mutual under-
standing of the intended flight path.
Time permitting, a PA announcement to the passengers pre-
cedes maneuvers involving unusual pitch or bank angles.
Transitioning from Instrument to

Visual Conditions
If visual meteorological conditions (VMC) are encountered dur-
ing an instrument approach, the PNF normally continues to
make callouts for the instrument approach being conducted.
However, the PF may request a changeover to visual traffic pat-
tern callouts.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

October 1996
Phase of Flight SOP

Holding Short
P PN
call: “Before Takeoff

checklist.”
action: Complete Before
Takeoff checklist.
call: “Before Takeoff
checklist complete.”
Takeoff Briefing
action: Brief the following:

Assigned Runway for Takeoff
Initial Heading/Course
Initial Altitude
Airspeed Limit (If Applicable)
Clearance Limit
Emergency Return Plan
SOP Deviations
Consider the following:
Impaired Runway Conditions
Weather
Obstacle Clearance
Instrument Departures Procedures
MEL
Abort
King Air 200 2C-11

August 2010 Developed for Training Purposes
SimuFlite
Holding Short (continued)

P PN
Cleared for Takeoff
action: Confirm Assigned

Runway for Takeoff
and Check Heading
Indicator Agreement
call: “Assigned Runway
Confirmed, Heading
Checked”
action: Confirm Assigned

Runway for Takeoff
and Check Heading
Indicator Agreement
call: “Assigned Runway
Confirmed, Heading
Checked”
call: “Takeoff Checklist”
action: Complete Takeoff

Checklist
call: “Takeoff Checklist
Complete
2C-12 King Air 200

Developed for Training Purposes August 2010
Takeoff Roll
PF PNF
Setting Takeoff Power
ACTION ”Set Power.”

CALL “Ignition lights off.”
CALL “Autofeather lights
on.”
“Power set.”
Initial Airspeed Indication
CALL “Airspeed alive.”
At 65 KIAS
CALL “65 knots; power set.”
At V1/VR
ACTION Move hand from CALL “Rotate.”

throttles to yoke.
ACTION Rotate to
approximately 7°
pitch attitude for take-
off.

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Climb
PF PNF
At Positive Rate of Climb
CALL “Positive rate.”

Only after PNF’s call,
CALL “Gear up.”
CALL “Gear selected up.”
When gear indicates
up, “Gear indicates
up.”
After Gear Retraction
ACTION Immediately
accomplish attitude
correlation check.
■ PF’s and PNF’s ADI
displays agree.
■ Pitch and bank
angles are
acceptable.
CALL “Attitudes check.”
Or, if a fault exists,
give a concise
statement of the
discrepancy.

October 1996
Climb (continued)
PF PNF
At VYSE and 400 Ft Above Airport Surface (Minimum)
CALL “VYSE.”
CALL “FLAPS UP.” CALL “Flaps selected up.”
(if selected) When flaps indicate
up, “Flaps indicate
up.”
At 3,000 Ft Above Airport Surface and Clear of Traffic
CALL “Climb power.”

ACTION Set climb power
CALL “Climb power set.”
CALL “Climb checklist.”
ACTION Complete Climb
checklist.
At Transition Altitude
ACTION Turn recognition lights

off.
CALL “29.92 set.” CALL “29.92 set.”
CALL “Climb checklist
complete.”

June 2000
CAE SimuFlite
Cruise
PF PNF
At 1,000 Ft Below Assigned Altitude
CALL “ (altitude) for

(altitude).”
(e.g., “9,000 for
10,000.”)
(altitude).”
(e.g., “9,000 for
10,000.”)
After Level Off and Acceleration
CALL “Cruise checklist.”

ACTION Complete Cruise
checklist.
CALL “Cruise checklist
complete.”
Altitude Deviation in Excess of 100 Ft
CALL “Altitude.”
CALL “Correcting.”
Course Deviation in Excess of One Half Dot
CALL “Course.”

June 2000
Descent
PF PNF
CALL “Descent checklist.”
ACTION Complete Descent

checklist.
CALL “Descent checklist
complete.”
At 1,000 Ft Above Assigned Altitude

(altitude).”
(e.g., “10,000 for
9,000.”)
(altitude).”
(e.g., “10,000 for
9,000.”)
At Transition Level
CALL “Altimeter set ” CALL “Altimeter set .”

CALL “Transition Level
At 10,000 Ft
CALL “10,000 ft.”

CALL “Check.”
Speed 250 kts.”
Maintain sterile cockpit below 10,000 ft above airport surface.

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Descent (continued)
PF PNF
At Appropriate Workload Time

REVIEW REVIEW
Review the following:
■ approach to be executed
■ field elevation
■ appropriate minimum sector altitude(s)
■ inbound leg to FAF, procedure turn direction and altitude
■ final approach course heading and intercept altitude
■ timing required
■ DA/MDA
■ MAP (non-precision)
■ VDP
■ special procedures (DME step-down, arc, etc.)
■ type of approach lights in use (and radio keying
procedures, if required)
■ missed approach procedures
■ runway information conditions
ACTION Brief the following:

■ configuration
■ approach speed
■ minimum safe altitude
■ approach course
■ FAF altitude
■ DA/MDA altitude
■ field elevation
■ VDP
■ missed approach
- heading
- altitude
- intentions
■ abnormal implications.
Accomplish as many checklist items as possible. The Approach

checklist must be completed prior to the initial approach fix.

October 1996
Precision Approach
PF PNF
Prior to Initial Approach Fix
CALL “Approach checklist.”

ACTION Complete Approach
checklist.
CALL “Approach checklist
complete.”
CALL “Flaps APPROACH.”
When flaps indicate
APPROACH,“Flaps
indicate APPROACH.”
At Initial Convergence of Course Deviation Bar
CALL “Localizer/course CALL “Localizer/course

alive.” alive.”
At Initial Downward Movement of Glideslope Raw Data Indicator
CALL “Glideslope alive.” CALL “Glideslope alive.”
When Annunciators Indicate Localizer Capture
CALL “Localizer captured.” CALL “Localizer captured.”

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Precision Approach (continued)

PF PNF
At One Dot From Glideslope Intercept
CALL “One dot to go.”

CALL “Gear down.
Before Landing
checklist.”
CALL “Gear selected down.”
When gear indicates
down,
“Gear indicates
down.”
ACTION Complete Before
Landing checklist
except for full flaps
and autopilot/yaw
damper.
When Annunciator Indicates Glideslope Capture
CALL “Glideslope captured.” CALL “Glideslope captured.”
If the VOR on the PNF’s side is used for crosschecks on the inter-
mediate segment, the PNF’s localizer and glideslope status calls
are accomplished at the time the PNF changes to the ILS fre-
quency. This should be no later than at completion of the FAF
crosscheck, if required. The PNF should tune and identify his
NAV radios to the specific approach and monitor.

October 1996

PF PNF
At FAF
CALL “Outer marker.” or

“Final fix.”
ACTION Start timing.
■
Visually crosscheck
■
that both altimeters

agree with crossing
altitude.
■ Set final missed
approach altitude in
altitude alerter.
■ Check PF and PNF
instruments.
■ Call FAF inbound.
CALL “Outer marker.” or

“Final fix.”
“Altitude checks.”
At 1,000 Ft Above DA(H)
CALL “1,000 ft to
minimums.”
CALL “Check.”

June 2000
CAE SimuFlite

PF PNF
At 500 Ft Above DA(H)
CALL “500 ft to minimums.”

CALL “Check.”
NOTE: An approach window has the following parameters:

■ within one dot deflection, both LOC and GS
■ IVSI less than 1,000 fpm
■ IAS within V
AP ±10 kts (no less than VREF)
■ no flight instrument flags with the landing runway or visual
references not in sight

■ landing configuration, except for full flaps (circling or
single engine approaches).
When within 500 ft above touchdown, the aircraft must be within
the approach window. If the aircraft is not within this window, a
missed approach must be executed.

CALL “Check.”

CALL “Check.”

October 1996

PF PNF
At Point Where PNF Sights Runway or Visual References
CALL “Runway (or visual

reference)
o’clock.”
CALL “Going visual. Land.”
ACTION As PF goes visual,
PNF transitions to
instruments.
At DA(H)
CALL “Minimums. Runway

(or visual reference)
o’clock.”
ACTION Announce intentions.
CALL “Going visual. Land.
Set flaps DOWN.”
ACTION As PF goes visual,

PNF transitions to
instruments.

June 2000
CAE SimuFlite
Precision Missed Approach

PF PNF
At DA(H)
CALL “Minimums. Missed

approach.”
CALL “Missed approach.
ACTION Apply power firmly
and positively.
Activate go-around ACTION Assist PF in setting
mode and initially power for go-around.
rotate the nose to the
flight director go-
around attitude.

CALL “Gear up.”
When gear indicates
up,
“Gear indicates up.”
ACTION Announce heading
and altitude for
missed approach.

June 2000
Precision Missed Approach (continued)

PF PNF
At VYSE and 400 Ft Above Airport Surface (Minimum)
CALL “Flaps UP.”

CALL “Flaps selected UP.”
When flaps indicate
UP, “Flaps indicate
UP.”
At 1,500 Ft (Minimum) Above Airport Surface and Workload

Permitting

checklist.
complete.”

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Precision Approach Deviations

PF PNF
± One Half Dot – Glideslope
CALL “One half dot (high,

low) and (increasing,
holding, decreasing).”
± One Half Dot – Localizer
CALL “One half dot (right,

left) and (increasing,
VAP ±
CALL “Speed (plus or

minus) (knots)
and (increasing,
At or Below VREF
CALL “VREF.” or
“VREF minus
(knots below VREF).”
Rate of Descent Exceeds 1,000 FPM
CALL “Sink (amount)

hundred and
(increasing, holding,
decreasing).”

October 1996
Non-Precision Approach
PF PNF
Prior to Initial Approach Fix
CALL “Approach checklist.”

ACTION Complete Approach
checklist to flaps.
CALL “Flaps selected
APPROACH.”
When flaps indicate
APPROACH,“Flaps
At Initial Convergence of Course Deviation Bar

alive.” alive.”
When Annunciators Indicate Course Capture

captured.” captured.”

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Non-Precision Approach (continued)

PF PNF
Prior to FAF
CALL “ (number)
miles/minutes from
FAF.”
CALL “Gear down. Before
Landing checklist.”
CALL “Gear selected down.”
When gear indicates
down,
“Gear indicates
down.”
Landing checklist
except for full flaps.

October 1996

PF PNF
At FAF
CALL “Outer marker.” or CALL “Outer marker.” or

“Final fix.” “Final fix.”
ACTION Start timing.
■ Visually crosscheck
that both altimeters

agree.
■ Set MDA (or
nearest 100 ft
above) in altitude
alerter.
■ Check PF and PNF
instruments.
■ Call FAF inbound.
At 1,000 Ft Above MDA
CALL “1,000 ft to
minimums.”
CALL “Check.”

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite

PF PNF
At 500 Ft Above MDA

CALL “Check.”
NOTE: An approach window has the following parameters:

■ within one dot CDI deflection or 5° bearing
■ IVSI less than 1,000 fpm
■ IAS within V
AP ±10 kts (no less than VREF)
■ no flight instrument flags with the landing runway or visual
references not in sight

■ landing configuration, except for full flaps non-precision or
single engine approaches).

When within 500 ft above touchdown, the aircraft must be within
the approach window. If the aircraft is not within this window, a
missed approach must be executed.
At 200 Ft Above MDA

CALL “Check.”
At 100 Ft Above MDA

CALL “Check.”

September 2002

PF PNF
At MDA
CALL “Minimums.
(time) to go.” or
“Minimums.
(distance) to go.”
CALL “Autopliot Engaged.”
(as required)
ACTION “Engage Autopilot
At Point Where PNF Sights Runway or Visual References
CALL “Runway (or visual

reference)
o’clock.”
CALL “Going visual. Land.”
CALL “Flaps DOWN.”
(or as briefed)
DOWN.”
When flaps indicate
DOWN,
“Flaps indicate
DOWN.”
If Missed Approach, (Non-Precision Missed Approach) follows on next page.

June 2000
CAE SimuFlite
Non-Precision Missed Approach

PF PNF
At MAP
CALL “Missed approach

point. Missed
approach.”
CALL “Missed approach.”
ACTION Apply power firmly ACTION Assist PF in setting
and positively. power for go-around.
Activate go-around
mode and initially
rotate the nose to the
flight director go-
around attitude.

CALL “Gear up.”
When gear indicates
up,
“Gear indicates up.”
ACTION Announce heading
and altitude for
missed approach.

June 2000
Non-Precision Missed Approach (continued)

PF PNF
At VYSE 400 Ft Above Airport Surface (Minimum)
CALL “Flaps UP.”

CALL “Flaps selected UP.”
When flaps indicate
UP, “Flaps indicate
UP.”
At 1,500 Ft (Minimum) Above Airport Surface and Workload

Permitting

checklist.
complete.”

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Non-Precision Approach Deviations

PF PNF
± One Half Dot – Localizer/VOR
CALL “One half dot (high,

low) and (increasing,
± 5° At or Beyond Midpoint for NDB Approach
CALL “ (degrees off

course) (right, left)
and (increasing, hold-
ing, decreasing).”
VAP ±
CALL “Speed (plus or

minus) (knots)
and (increasing,
At or Below VREF
CALL “VREF.” or
“VREF minus
(knots below VREF).”
Descent is ±200 FPM of Briefed Rate
CALL “Sink (amount)

hundred and
(increasing, holding,
decreasing).”

October 1996
Visual Traffic Patterns

PF PNF
Before Pattern Entry/Downwind (1,500 Ft Above Airport Surface)
CALL “Approach checklist.” ACTION Complete Approach

checklist to flaps.
CALL “Holding flaps.”
Downwind

APPROACH.”
When flaps indicate
APPROACH, “Flaps
CALL “Gear down.

Before Landing
checklist.” CALL “Gear selected down.”
When gear indicates
down,
“Gear indicates
down.”
Landing checklist
except for full flaps.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Visual Traffic Patterns (continued)

PF PNF
At 1,000 Ft Above Airport Surface
CALL “1,000 AGL.”

CALL “Check.”
At 500 Ft Above Airport Surface
CALL “500 AGL.”

CALL “Check.”
At 200 Ft Above Airport Surface
CALL “200 AGL.”

CALL “Check.”
CALL “Flaps DOWN.”

DOWN.”
When flaps indicate
DOWN,
“Flaps indicate
DOWN.”

October 1996
Landing
PF PNF
At Point on Approach When PF Sights Runway or Visual

Reference (Landing Assured)
CALL “Going visual. Land.

Flaps – DOWN.”

DOWN.”
When flaps indicate
DOWN,
“Flaps indicate
DOWN.”
ACTION Push autopilot and ACTION Continue with:
trim disconnect switch ■ speed check
to first level. ■ vertical speed
check
■ callouts
■ gear down
CALL “Autopilot/yaw verification
damper off.” ■ flap verification
■ autopilot/yaw
damper off.
CALL “Final gear and flaps
recheck.”
Before Landing
At 100 Ft Above Touchdown
CALL “100 ft.”
At 50 Ft Above Touchdown
CALL “50 ft.”

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Landing (continued)
PF PNF
At Touchdown
ACTION Move propeller levers

full forward.
CALL “Props full.”
ACTION Move power levers to
Beta or reverse, as
required.
At Propeller Reverse Minimum Speed (40 KIAS)
CALL “40 kts.”

ACTION Move power levers
out of reverse

June 2000
Maneuvers
Table of Contents
Normal Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-3
Rejected Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-5
Steep Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-7
Approaches to Stalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-9
Visual Approach/Balked Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-11
Two Engine ILS Approach and Landing . . . . . . . . 2D-13
Single Engine ILS Approach and Landing . . . . . . . 2D-15
Two Engine Non-Precision Approach and Landing . . 2D-17
Single Engine Non-Precision Approach and Landing . 2D-19
Zero Flap Approach and Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-21
Circling Approach/Circling Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-23
Engine Failure After Liftoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-25
Go-Around/Missed Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-27
King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 2D-1

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
King Air Power Settings

Power settings used in this chapter work in the aircraft as well as
in the simulator. Speed varies slightly with attitudes, weight, OAT
and individual aircraft. The 100# torque adjustment rule works in
the speed ranges used in this chapter.
100# Torque = 150 FPM or 10 Knots
Two Engines AIRSPEED TORQUE RPM GEAR FLAPS

Approach Area
150 700 1700 UP 0
High Speed
Approach Area
130 700 1700 UP 40%
Low Speed
ILS ñ OM
Inbound
130 700 1700 DOWN 40%
(Gear @ G/S 650
FPM)
Non-Precision
FAF Inbound
130 400 1700 DOWN 40%
(Gear @ FAF
800/1000 FPM)
Steep Turns 180 1100 1700 UP 0
Circle to Land/ 130 1000 1700 DOWN 40%

MDA
Single Engine AIRSPEED TORQUE RPM GEAR FLAPS

Approach Area
150 1300 2000 UP 0
High Speed
Approach Area
130 1300 2000 UP 40%
Low Speed
ILS ñ OM
Inbound
130 1300 2000 DOWN 40%
(Gear @ G/S
650 FPM)
Non-Precision
FAF Inbound
130 1000 2000 DOWN 40%
(Gear @ FAF
800/1000 FPM)
Circle to Land/ 130 1800 2000 DOWN 40%
MDA
2D-2 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

September 2002
Maneuvers
Normal Takeoff
1 TAKEOFF
n FLIGHT DIRECTOR SET
5 n PITCH 7°
n BRAKES HOLD
n TAKEOFF POWER SET
n AIRSPEED ALLOW TO INCREASE
n BRAKES RELEASE
TO 160 KIAS
n CONFIGURATION FLAPS UP (IF USED)
n POWER SET PROPELLERS 1,900 RPM / ITT 725° (770*) OR TORQUE 2,230 FT-LBS
3 AT VR
n ROTATE TO 7°
6 AT 3,000 FT AGL MINIMUM

n CLIMB CHECKLIST COMPLETE
2 ROLLING TAKEOFF
n POWER SET TAKEOFF POWER BY 65 KIAS
4 AT POSITIVE RATE OF CLIMB

n PITCH 7°
n CONFIGURATION GEAR UP
*B200

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite

October 1996
Maneuvers
Rejected Takeoff
1 STATIC TAKEOFF
n BRAKES HOLD
n TAKEOFF POWER SET
2 ROLLING TAKEOFF
n BRAKES RELEASE n TAKEOFF POWER SET BY 65 KTS
3 PRIOR TO V1
n CALL "ABORT" ABORT AS BRIEFED
n POWER IDLE
n BRAKES APPLY
n OPERATING ENGINE MAXIMUM REVERSE (IF REQUIRED)
n STOP AIRCRAFT
n ATC NOTIFY

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

June 2000
Maneuvers
Steep Turns
2 BANK SMOOTHLY ROLL TO 45°

n ALTITUDE MAINTAIN
n TRIM AS DESIRED
n PITCH INCREASE TO APPROXIMATELY 3° (AFTER 30° OF BANK)
n POWER PROPELLERS 1,700 RPM / TORQUE 1,300 FT-LBS
1 CLEAN CONFIGURATION
n POWER PROPELLERS 1,700 RPM / TORQUE 1,100 FT-LBS 4 LEAD ROLLOUT TO ASSIGNED HEADING BY
n AIRSPEED 180 KIAS APPROXIMATELY 15°
n ATTITUDE LEVEL n WINGS SMOOTHLY ROLL LEVEL
n TRIM AS REQUIRED
n PITCH AS REQUIRED
n AIRSPEED PROPELLERS 1,700 RPM / TORQUE 1,100 FT-LBS
THIS MANEUVER MAY BE USED FOR A 180° OR 360° TURN,

AND MAY BE FOLLOWED BY A REVERSAL IN THE OPPOSITE DIRECTION.
THE PNF MAY ASSIST AS DIRECTED BY THE PF.

TOLERANCES:
n SPEED ± 10 KIAS
n ALTITUDE ± 100 FT
n BANK ± 5°
n HEADING ± 10°
3 n ALTITUDE MAINTAIN
n SPEED MAINTAIN
n ATTITUDE MAINTAIN

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

June 2000
Maneuvers
Approaches to Stalls
2 TAKEOFF CONFIGURATION STALL FLAPS APPROACH, GEAR EXTENDED

n POWER TORQUE 200 FT-LBS
n TRIM VREF
n ALTITUDE MAINTAIN
DE
n BANK 15 TO 30°
ALTITU
TANT
CONS
n EXPECT STALL WARNING APPROXIMATELY 90 KIAS / 8° PITCH
n RECOVERY
- POWER MAXIMUM
- BANK LEVEL WINGS BEFORE BEGINNING STALL PRACTICE
- ATTITUDE MAINTAIN n VREF COMPUTED
- CONFIGURATION GEAR UP AT POSITIVE RATE n CLEARING TURNS COMPLETE (IN AIRCRAFT ONLY)
- AIRSPEED VYSE, FLAPS UP n PROPELLERS FULL FORWARD
- ALTITUDE MINIMUM LOSS
1 CLEAN CONFIGURATION STALL

n SET AIRSPEED BUG - VREF
n TRIM VREF
n ALTITUDE MAINTAIN
n EXPECT STALL WARNING - APPROXIMATELY 100 KIAS / 10° PITCH
n RECOVERY
- POWER MAXIMUM
- ATTITUDE MAINTAIN
- AIRSPEED ACCELERATE TO 160 KIAS (800 FT-LBS TORQUE)
- ALTITUDE MINIMUM LOSS
3 LANDING CONFIGURATION STALL FLAPS FULL, GEAR EXTENDED
n ALTITUDE MAINTAIN
n EXPECT STALL WARNING APPROXIMATELY 80 KIAS / 8° PITCH
n RECOVERY
- POWER MAXIMUM
- CONFIGURATION FLAPS APPROACH
- ATTITUDE INCREASE
CON - CONFIGURATION GEAR UP AT POSITIVE RATE
STA - AIRSPEED VYSE, FLAPS UP
NT A
LTIT
UDE - ALTITUDE MINIMUM LOSS
NOTE:
IN AIRCRAFT ONLY
n MINIMUM ALTITUDE 5,000 FT
n CONDUCT CLEARING TURNS

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

June 2000
Maneuvers
Visual Approach/Balked Landing

3 ABEAM RUNWAY THRESHOLD 2 PATTERN ENTRY (DOWNWIND 1,500 FT)
n LANDING GEAR DOWN n POWER PROPELLERS 1,700 RPM / TORQUE 700 FT-LBS
n AIRSPEED 150 KIAS
n CONFIGURATION FLAPS APPROACH
4 BASE LEG n APPROACH CHECKLIST COMPLETE
n SINK RATE ESTABLISH AT 500 TO 600 FPM
n AIRSPEED 130 KIAS
n POWER PROPELLERS 1,700 RPM / TORQUE 700 FT-LBS
n AIRSPEED 130 KIAS
1 BEFORE DESCENT
n DESCENT CHECKLIST COMPLETE
n AIRSPEED BUGS SET TO VAP / VREF
6A THRESHOLD LANDING
n AIRSPEED VREF + WIND FACTOR
n POWER IDLE
6B THRESHOLD BALKED LANDING

n PROPELLERS FULL FORWARD
n POWER MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE
n AIRSPEED 100 KIAS
n CONFIGURATION FLAPS FULL /
7A TOUCHDOWN
GEAR DOWN n BRAKES AS REQUIRED
n REVERSE AS REQUIRED
8 AT 400 FT AGL MINIMUM

n ESTABLISH NORMAL CLIMB
5 LANDING ASSURED
n AIRSPEED VAP
n CONFIGURATION FLAPS FULL
n AIRSPEED SLOWING TO VREF + WIND
7B CLEAR OF OBSTACLES
n AIRSPEED VYSE (@ 10,000 LBS VYSE 114)
n CONFIGURATION FLAPS UP
n GEAR UP

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

June 2000
Maneuvers
Two Engine ILS Approach and Landing
RADAR VECTORS
RADAR VECTORS RADAR VECTORS
1A WITHIN RANGE
n POWER PROPELLERS 1,700 RPM / 2A TERMINAL AREA 3A WITHIN 5 TO 10 NM OF FAF
n POWER PROPELLERS 1,700 RPM / n APPROACH CHECKLIST COMPLETE
TORQUE 700 FT-LBS
n AIRSPEED 150 KIAS TORQUE 700 FT-LBS n POWER PROPELLERS 1,700 RPM /
n CONFIGURATION GEAR, FLAPS UP n AIRSPEED 150 KIAS TORQUE 700 FT-LBS

n AIRSPEED 130 KIAS
1 WITHIN 3 MINUTES OF IAF

n AIRSPEED 150 KIAS
n CONFIGURATION GEAR, FLAPS UP
2 IAF OUTBOUND
n TIMING START
n APPROACH CHECKLIST COMPLETE
n AIRSPEED 130 KIAS
5 LANDING ASSURED
n CONFIGURATION FLAPS FULL (OR AS BRIEFED)
n SPEED SLOWING TO VREF + WIND
n LANDING CHECKLIST FINAL ITEMS COMPLETE
3 PROCEDURE TURN INBOUND

n AIRSPEED 130 KIAS
4 AT GLIDESLOPE INTERCEPT / FAF 7 TOUCHDOWN

n GEAR DOWN
n BRAKES AS REQUIRED
n BEFORE LANDING CHECKLIST COMPLETE
n AIRSPEED VAP
n TIMING START
n CHECK CROSSING ALT.
6 THRESHOLD
n POWER REDUCE TO IDLE

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998
Maneuvers
Single Engine ILS Approach and Landing
RADAR VECTORS
RADAR VECTORS RADAR VECTORS
1A WITHIN RANGE
n POWER PROPELLERS 2,000 RPM / 2A TERMINAL AREA 3A WITHIN 5 TO 10 NM OF FAF
n ONE ENGINE INOP APPROACH AND LANDING
TORQUE 1,300 FT-LBS
n AIRSPEED 150 KIAS CHECKLIST COMPLETE
n CONFIGURATION GEAR, FLAPS UP n CONFIGURATION FLAPS APPROACH
n AIRSPEED 130 KIAS

n AIRSPEED 150 KIAS
2 IAF OUTBOUND
n TIMING START
5 LANDING ASSURED
n SPEED SLOWING TO VREF + WIND

CHECKLIST COMPLETE
n CONFIGURATION FLAPS APPROACH 7 TOUCHDOWN
4 AT GLIDESLOPE INTERCEPT / FAF
n AIRSPEED 130 KIAS n BRAKES AS REQUIRED
n GEAR DOWN
6 THRESHOLD

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998
Maneuvers
Two Engine Non-Precision Approach and Landing
RADAR VECTORS
1A WITHIN RANGE
n POWER PROPELLERS 1,700 RPM / RADAR VECTORS
RADAR VECTORS
TORQUE 700 FT-LBS
n AIRSPEED 150 KIAS 2A TERMINAL AREA 3A WITHIN 5 TO 10 NM OF FAF
n POWER PROPELLERS 1,700 RPM / n POWER PROPELLERS 1,700 RPM /
TORQUE 700 FT-LBS TORQUE 700 FT-LBS
n AIRSPEED 150 KIAS n APPROACH CHECKLIST COMPLETE
n AIRSPEED 130 KIAS

n AIRSPEED 150 KIAS
2 IAF OUTBOUND
n TIMING START
n AIRSPEED 130 KIAS
5 AT MDA
n ALTITUDE MAINTAIN
n AIRSPEED 130 KIAS
n AUTOPILOT CONSIDER
6 LANDING ASSURED
n AIRSPEED SLOWING TO VREF
n BEFORE LANDING FINAL ITEMS CHECKLIST COMPLETE

n AIRSPEED 130 KIAS
4 PRIOR TO FAF 8 TOUCHDOWN

AT FAF
n GEAR DOWN
n TIMING START
n DESCENT 1,500 FPM MAXIMUM
7 THRESHOLD

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998
Maneuvers
Single Engine Non-Precision Approach and Landing
RADAR VECTORS
1A WITHIN RANGE
n POWER PROPELLERS 2,000 RPM / RADAR VECTORS
RADAR VECTORS
TORQUE 1,300 FT-LBS
n AIRSPEED 150 KIAS 2A TERMINAL AREA 3A WITHIN 5 TO 10 NM OF FAF
n POWER PROPELLERS 2,000 RPM / n POWER PROPELLERS 2,000 RPM /
TORQUE 1,300 FT-LBS TORQUE 1,300 FT-LBS
n AIRSPEED 150 KIAS n AIRSPEED 130 KIAS

n POWER PROPELLERS 2,000 RPM /
TORQUE 1,300 FT-LBS
n AIRSPEED 150 KIAS
2 IAF OUTBOUND
n TIMING START
5 AT MDA
n ALTITUDE MAINTAIN
n AIRSPEED 130 KIAS
6 LANDING ASSURED
n AIRSPEED SLOWING TO VREF + WIND
n CONFIGURATION FLAPS FULL

CHECKLIST COMPLETE
n CONFIGURATION FLAPS APPROACH 8 TOUCHDOWN
4 AT FAF
n AIRSPEED 130 KIAS n BRAKES AS REQUIRED
n TIMING START
n DESCENT 1,500 FPM MAXIMUM
n AIRSPEED 130 KIAS
n CONFIGURATION GEAR DOWN (SEE CAUTION)
7 THRESHOLD
Caution: Under some conditions, n AIRSPEED VREF + WIND FACTOR
flight may not be possible with n POWER REDUCE TO IDLE
gear extended.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998
Maneuvers
Zero Flap Approach and Landing
3 ABEAM RUNWAY THRESHOLD 2 PATTERN ENTRY (DOWNWIND 1,500 FT)

n LANDING GEAR DOWN n POWER PROPELLERS 1700 RPM / TORQUE 700 FT-LBS
n AIRSPEED ZERO FLAP VREF + 10 KTS n AIRSPEED 150 KIAS
n POWER PROPELLERS 2000 RPM / TORQUE 700 FT-LBS n CONFIGURATION FLAPS UP
4 BASE LEG n FLAPS UP LANDING CHECKLIST BEGIN
n SINK RATE ESTABLISH AT 500 TO 600 FPM
n POWER PROPELLERS 2000 RPM / TORQUE 500 FT-LBS
n AIRSPEED ZERO FLAPS VREF + 10 KTS
1 BEFORE DESCENT
n DESCENT CHECKLIST COMPLETE
n AIRSPEED BUGS SET TO VAP / VREF
6 THRESHOLD LANDING
n POWER IDLE
7 TOUCHDOWN
5 LANDING ASSURED
n FLAP UP CHECKLIST COMPLETE
n AIRSPEED SLOWING ZERO FLAP VREF + WIND FACTOR
n SINK RATE 900FPM

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

June 2000
Maneuvers
Circling Approach/Circling Pattern
1 1 n FLY OVER RUNWAY

n WHEN ESTABLISHED ON CENTERLINE
n FLY 90° TO RUNWAY
n START TIMING CROSSING
- 30° BANK TURN TO DOWNWIND
RUNWAY CENTERLINE
n AFTER 15 SECONDS TURN
TO DOWNWIND
1
45°
n RUNWAY IN SIGHT AND 15 SEC 4

WITHIN CIRCLING APPROACH AREA
n TURN 45° FROM RUNWAY CENTERLINE
n TIMING START
n AFTER 30 SECONDS TURN TO DOWNWIND 30° BANK
30
SE
C
2 ABEAM POINT 3
NOTES 15 SEC
n BASED ON 30° BANK TURNS
n USE CATEGORY C MINIMUMS
n A MINIMUM OF 300 FT OBSTACLE CLEARANCE
PROVIDED AT CATEGORY C CIRCLING MINIMUMS
(MDA) WITHIN 1.7 NM FROM ANY RUNWAY (CATEGORY D
AT ICING SPEEDS).
CAUTION: FAR 91.175 requires
immediate execution of the KEY POINT BASIC CIRCLING PATTERN
RECOMMENDATIONS
n FLAPS APPROACH (40°) missed approach procedure
n GEAR DOWN when an identifiable part of 1 ENTER BASIC PATTERN AS APPROPRIATE
FOR AIRCRAFT POSITION
n AIRSPEED VREF + 20 + WIND FACTOR MINIMUM the airport is not distinctly
(MAINTAIN CONSTANT SPEED FOR TIMING) visible to the pilot during the
n POWER PROPELLERS 1,700 RPM / TORQUE 1,000 FT-LBS 2 START TIMING ABEAM APPROACH END OF RUNWAY
n F/D ALTITUDE HOLD SELECT circling maneuver, unless the 1
n F/D HEADING SELECT inability to see results from a 3 START TURN TO FINAL, MAXIMUM 30° BANK
n USE OF AUTOPILOT IS OPTIONAL
normal bank of the aircraft 4 WITH RUNWAY IN SIGHT AND IN POSITION TO MAKE
n SLIGHT ADJUSTMENTS TO TIME OR HEADING n TURN OVER RUNWAY
during the approach. n AT RUNWAY END, 30° A NORMAL DESCENT TO LANDING
MAY BE USED TO ADJUST FOR WIND
BANKED TURN TO DOWNWIND n LANDING CHECKLIST FINAL ITEMS COMPLETE
n DESCENT FROM MDA BEGIN
NOTE: IF MISSED APPROACH NECESSARY n AIRSPEED VAP
AFTER BEGINNING THE CIRCLE, ENSURE n IF NOT IN A POSITION TO MAKE A NORMAL LANDING
AIRCRAFT REMAINS IN CLEARED AIRSPACE - GO-AROUND EXECUTE
BY MAKING FIRST TURN TOWARD AIRPORT/ n AT THRESHOLD
MISSED APPROACH COURSE. - AIRSPEED VREF + WIND FACTOR

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998
Maneuvers
Engine Failure After Liftoff (Takeoff Continued)
1 TAKEOFF
n BRAKES HOLD
n TAKEOFF POWER SET
n BRAKES RELEASE 3 AT V1/VR 5 AIRSPEED MAINTAIN V2 (MINIMUM)
n VR CALL PERFORMED UNTIL 400 FT AGL (MINIMUM) OR CLEAR
n RIGHT HAND MOVE TO CONTROL WHEEL OF OBSTACLES
ENGINE FAILURE RECOGNIZED
n POWER MAXIMUM
n ROTATE TO 7°
6 AT 400 FT AGL (MINIMUM) OR CLEAR OF OBSTACLES

n AIRSPEED ACCELERATE TO VYSE
n CONFIGURATION FLAPS UP (IF SELECTED)
2 ROLLING TAKEOFF n POWER SET MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE
n POWER SET TAKEOFF POWER BY 65 KIAS
n FAILED ENGINE IDENTIFY
4 AT POSITIVE RATE OF CLIMB

n AIRSPEED MAINTAIN TAKEOFF SPEED
n CONFIGURATION GEAR UP
n PROPELLER CONFIRM FEATHER (INOP ENGINE)

June 2000
CAE SimuFlite

June 2000
Maneuvers
Go-Around/Missed Approach
2 WHEN CLEAR OF OBSTACLES

n AIRSPEED VYSE
n CONFIGURATION FLAPS UP
n GEAR UP
4 n ADVISE ATC
1 MISSED APPROACH
n FLIGHT DIRECTOR SELECT GO AROUND
n PITCH 7°
n POWER MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE
n AIRSPEED 100 KIAS
3 AT 400 FT AGL MINIMUM
n POWER PROPELLERS 1,900 RPM / ITT
725° / (770*) OR TORQUE 2,230 FT-LBS
n AIRSPEED 160 KIAS
*B200

June 2000
CAE SimuFlite

June 2000
Limitations
Limitations
Table of Contents
General Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Airstair Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Authorized Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Baggage Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Maximum Weight in Baggage Compartment . . . . . . . . 3-5
Certification Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Cargo Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Emergency Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Occupancy Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Passenger Seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Couch/Passenger Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Aft-Facing Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Lateral-Tracking Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Passenger Shoulder Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Maneuvers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Minimum Flight Crew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Structural Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
King Air 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
King Air B200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Windows and Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Fuselage Side Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Operational Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Maximum Operating Pressure Altitude . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Cabin Pressurization Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Cabin Pressurization Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Crosswind/Tailwind Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
External Power Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Generator Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Starter Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
300-Amp Lear-Siegler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
OAT Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Airspeed Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Static Wicks (King Air 200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Weight Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Center of Gravity Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Flight Load Factor Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Mean Aerodynamic Chord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

October 1996
Limitations
Systems Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Autopilot – King Air 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Ice and Rain Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Instrument Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Landing Gear Cycle Limits (Hydraulic) . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Powerplant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Propellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
General Limitations
Airstair Door
■ Do not open or check security by moving door handle while
aircraft is pressurized and/or in flight.
Handle is in locked position when arm is around plunger.
■ See AFM Supplements section for limitations with the airstair
door removed.
WARNING: Only a crew member should operate the door.
WARNING: Only one person should be on the airstair door

stairway at any one time.
NOTE: No aircraft is certified for known severe icing.
Authorized Operations
■ Day and Night VFR
■ Day and Night IFR
■ Known icing conditions
■ FAR Part 91 operations when all pertinent information and
performance considerations are complied with.
■ FAR Part 135 operations when all pertinent information and
performance considerations are complied with.

June 2000
Limitations
Baggage Limits
Maximum Weight in Baggage Compartment
Prior to BB-1052, BB-1091, and BL-58:
With Fold-up Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 LBS
Without Fold-up Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 LBS
BB-1052, BB-1091 and subsequent; BL-58 and subsequent;
prior aircraft with Beech Kit #101-5068-1 installed:
With Fold-up Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 LBS
Without Fold-up Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550 LBS
WARNING: Do not carry children in the baggage

compartment unless secured in a seat.
Certification Status
■ Normal Category, FAR Part 23
Cargo
■ All cargo shall be properly secured by an FAA-approved
cargo restraint system.
■ Cargo must be arranged to permit free access to all exits and
emergency exits.
WARNING: Unless authorized by applicable Department

of Transportation regulations, do not carry hazardous
material anywhere in the aircraft.

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Cargo Door
■ 200C/B200C - Do not open or check security by moving door
handle while aircraft is pressurized and/or in flight.
■ The cabin flooring section withstands loads of 200 pounds
per square foot supported on the seat tracks. Floor areas
where seat tracks are not present (walkways and aft bag-
gage/utility area) supports 100 pounds per square foot loads.
NOTE: Prior to first flight on the day, check cabin

door/cargo door annunciator circuitry in accordance
with Cabin/Cargo Door Annunciator Check in the AFM.
WARNING: Only a crew member should operate the

door.
Emergency Exit
■ Emergency exit must be unlocked before takeoff.
Occupancy Limits
FAR Part 91 Operations (maximum, including crew) . . . . 15
FAR Part 135 Operations
(maximum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Passengers Plus Crew

June 2000
Limitations
Passenger Seating
Couch/Passenger Seats
■ Do not occupy couch as chaise lounge during takeoff and
landing.
■ Maximum weight of drawer contents is 30 lbs per drawer.
■ The headrest should be positioned properly for the occupant.
Aft-Facing Seats
■ Only aft-facing seats (placarded as such on the leg cross-
member) are authorized in the aft-facing position.
■ The seatback of each occupied aft-facing seat must be in the
fully raised position and the headrest in the full-up position
for takeoff and landing.
Lateral-Tracking Seats (if installed)

■ Seat must be in outboard position for takeoff and landing.
Passenger Shoulder Harness

■ Shoulder harness must be worn during takeoff and landing
with seat in outboard position, seat back upright, and head-
rest fully extended.
Maneuvers
■ The Beechcraft Super King Air B200 and B200C are Normal
Category Airplanes. Acrobatic maneuvers, including spins,
are prohibited.
Minimum Flight Crew

■ One pilot.

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Structural Limitations
King Air 200
Maximum Cabin Pressure Differential . . . . . . . . . 6.1 PSI
Cabin Door Forward and Aft Side Latches
(or bayonets) (4) Safelife (200 only) . . . . . . 6,000 HRS
Cabin Door Upper Latch Hooks (2) and
Attaching Hardware (200 only) . . . . . . . . . 12,000 HRS
Cabin Door Cam-Lock Actuator Cable
Safelife (200C only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,000 HRS
Wing and Associated Structure
Fatigue Safelife . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,000 HRS
Windshield Frame Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,000 HRS
All Wing Attach Bolts, Nuts, Barrel Nut Assemblies
Steel Components . . . REPLACE EVERY 6 CALENDAR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .YEARS OF INSTALLED
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BOLT AND NUT TIME
Inconel Components . . . REPLACE EVERY 15 CALENDAR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .YEARS OF INSTALLED
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BOLT AND NUT TIME
Refer to the Beechcraft Structural Inspection and Repair
Manual and the Super King Air 200 Series Maintenance Manual
for inspection and replacement procedures.

October 1996
Limitations
King Air B200

S/Ns Prior to BB-1193 and BL-73 except BB-1158 and
BB-1167
Cabin and Door Forward and Aft Side Latches
(or bayonets) (4) Safelife (B200 only) . . . . . . 6,000 HRS
Cabin Door Upper Latch Hooks (2) and
Attaching Hardware (B200 only) . . . . . . . . 12,000 HRS
Cabin Door Cam-Lock Actuator Cable
Safelife (B200C only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,000 HRS
Wing and Associated Structure
Fatigue Safelife . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,000 HRS
Windshield Frame Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,000 HRS
All Wing Attach Bolts, Nuts, Barrel Nut Assemblies:
Steel Components . . . REPLACE EVERY 6 CALENDAR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .YEARS OF INSTALLED
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BOLT AND NUT TIME
Inconel Components . . . REPLACE EVERY 15 CALENDAR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .YEARS OF INSTALLED
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BOLT AND NUT TIME
Refer to the Beechcraft Structural Inspection and Repair
Manual and the Super King Air 200 Series Maintenance Manual
for inspection and replacement procedures.
BB-1158, BB-1167; BB-1193 and subsequent; BL-73 and
subsequent
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Super King Air 200 Series Maintenance
Manual for structural limitations.

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Windows and Windshield

King Air 200/King Air B200 prior to BB-1193 and BL-73
except BB-1158 and 1167
Fuselage Side Window

■ If cracking, chipping, or stress crazing that can be felt with a
fingernail occurs in either ply of the exterior window, replace
the window according to instructions in the Maintenance
Manual.
■ If the window cannot be replaced prior to the next flight,
pressurized flight is prohibited. Install the following placards
to conduct unpressurized flight.
– Install the following placard in clear view of the pilot:
PRESSURIZED FLIGHT IS PROHIBITED DUE TO A
DAMAGED WINDOW. CONDUCT FLIGHT WITH THE
CABIN PRESS SWITCH IN THE DUMP POSITION.
– Install the following placard next to the pressurization
control:
UNPRESSURIZED FLIGHT ONLY PERMITTED.
■ If a crack exists in both the inner and outer plies of the
exterior window, replace the window prior to further flight
unless an appropriate “Ferry Permit” is obtained through the
proper authority.

October 1996
Limitations
Crack in Side Window or Windshield

If it has been determined that a crack has developed in any side
window or windshield:
■ Maintain altitude at 25,000 ft or less.
■ Reset pressurization controller to maintain 4.0 psi or less as
required.
CAUTION: Prior to next flight, maintenance actions are

required. Refer to the AIrworthiness Limitations in
Chapter 4 of the Super King Air 200 Series Maintenance
Manual.
NOTE: Visibility throught the windshield may be slightly

impaired. Windshield wipers may be damaged if used
on a cracked surface. Heating elements may be inoper-
ative in the area of the crack.

March 1997
CAE SimuFlite

October 1996
Limitations
Operational Limits
Maximum Operating Pressure Altitude
Normal Operations – King Air 200 Prior to BB-54,
except 38, 39, 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,000 FT
Normal Operations – King Air 200 BB-38, 42, 44,
54 and subsequent*; BL-1 and subsequent . 35,000 FT
*Also includes earlier aircraft with Beech kit Nos. 101-5007-
1 and 101-5008-1 in compliance with Beechcraft Service
Instruction No. 0776-341.
Normal Operations – King Air B200 . . . . . . . 35,000 FT
King Air 200 with Aviation Gasoline:
Both Standby Boost Pumps Operative . . . . . . 31,000 FT
Either Standby Boost Pump Inoperative . . . . . 20,000 FT
Climbs without Crossfeed Capability . . . . . . . 20,000 FT
Yaw Damper System Inoperative . . . . . . . . . 17,000 FT
No restriction with Raisbeck AFT strakes installed.
VMCA Demonstration Minimum . . . . . . . . 5,000 FT AGL
Cabin Pressurization Limit

King Air 200 – Maximum Cabin
Pressure Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 PSI
King Air B200 – Maximum Cabin
Pressure Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 PSI

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Cabin Pressurization Controller

■ Depressurize cabin before landing.
(Use chart to determine correct pressure altitude setting)
Crosswind/Tailwind Components
Crosswind (maximum demonstrated) . . . . . . . . . 25 KTS
Tailwind (takeoff/landing [maximum charted]) . . . . . 10 KTS
External Power Unit

■ 28 to 28.5V DC output
■ 400A continuous
■ 1,000A surge
All B200s and subsequent
■ 28 to 28.4V DC output
■ 300A continuous
■ 1,000A surge
Generator Limits
Maximum sustained generator load is limited as follows:
In Flight – Sea Level to 31,000 ft altitude . . . . 1.00/100%
In Flight – Above 31,000 ft altitude . . . . . . . . 0.88/88%
On Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.85/85%

September 2002
Limitations
■ During ground operation, observe the limitations shown in

Tables 3-A, 3-B, and 3-C (following page).
Minimum Gas Generator RPM – N1%

Generator Load Without A/C With A/C
(right engine only)
King Air 200

0 to 0.70 52 60
0.70 to .75 55 60
0.75 to 0.80 60 60
0.80 to 0.85 65 65
King Air B200

0 to 0.75 56 62
0.75 to 0.80 60 62
0.80 to 0.85 65 65
BB1439 and sub

0 to 0.75 61 62
0.75 to 0.80 61 62
0.80 to 0.85 65 65
Table 3-A; King Air 200 and B200 Generator Limits
Minimum Gas Generator RPM – N1%

Generator Load Without A/C With A/C (right If Flight
engine only) (all altitudes)
0 to 0.75 IDLE 62 IDLE
0.75 to 1.00 63 68 85
Table 3-B; 300A Lear-Siegler Starter-Generator 23085-001

Limits

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Max Generator
Type of Operation Minimum N1% RPM
Load % of Load
Ground
(from sea level to 52 50
5,000 ft1) 55 66
65 90
70 100
Flight2 75 100
Table 3-C; 300A Lear-Siegler Starter-Generator 23069-016

Limits
1 Sea level to 5,000 ft., observe engine ITT limits when operating at low N1. Decrease
high ITT by reducing accessory load and/or increasing N1 speed.
2 This flight operation is for airspeeds of 116 KIAS and higher. Observe engine ITT
limits.

October 1996
Limitations
Starter Limitations
■ Standard Start Cycle:
– 40 seconds ON/60 seconds OFF
– 40 seconds ON/60 seconds OFF
– 40 seconds ON then 30 minutes OFF
300-Amp Lear-Siegler (Optional)
■ Standard Start Cycle:
– 30 seconds ON/3 minutes OFF
■ For engine wash:
■ For engine soak:
OAT Limits
Sea Level to 25,000 ft Pressure Altitude . . . MAX ISA +37°C
Above 25,000 ft Pressure Altitude . . . . . . MAX ISA + 31°C
All Altitudes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIN -53.9°C

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Airspeed Limitations
King Air 200
VA, Maneuvering (12,500 lbs) . . . . . . 181 KIAS/182 KCAS
Do not make full or abrupt control movements above this
speed.
VFE, Maximum Flap Extension/Extended:
Approach – 40% . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 KIAS/200 KCAS
Full Down – 100% . . . . . . . . . . . 146 KIAS/144 KCAS
Do not extend flaps or operate with flaps in prescribed
position above these speeds.
VLO, Maximum Landing Gear Operating:
Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 KIAS/182 KCAS
Retraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 KIAS/164 KCAS
Do not extend or retract landing gear above the given
speed.
VLE, Maximum Landing Gear Extended . . 181 KIAS/182 KCAS
Do not exceed this speed with the landing gear extended.
VMCA, Minimum Control Airspeed . . . . . . 86 KIAS/91 KCAS
This is the lowest airspeed at which the aircraft is directionally
controllable with one engine at takeoff power when the other
engine suddenly becomes inoperative with propeller wind-
milling.

October 1996
Limitations
VMO/MMO, Maximum Operating:

BB-2 to 198 without
Beech Kit 101-5033-1 . . . . . . . . 269 KIAS/270 KCAS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.48 M
BB-199 and subsequent, BL-1
and subsequent; prior S/Ns
with Beech Kit 101-5033-1 . . . . . 259 KIAS/260 KCAS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.52 M
Do not exceed these airspeeds or Mach numbers in any
operation.
King Air B200/B200C

VA, Maneuvering (12,500 lbs) . . . . . . 181 KIAS/182 KCAS
Do not make full or abrupt control movements above this
speed.
VFE, Maximum Flap Extension/Extended:
Approach – 40% . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 KIAS/200 KCAS
Full Down – 100% . . . . . . . . . . . 157 KIAS/155 KCAS
Do not extend flaps or operate with flaps in prescribed
position above these speeds.
VLO, Maximum Landing Gear Operating:
Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 KIAS/182 KCAS
Retraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 KIAS/164 KCAS
Do not extend or retract landing gear above the given
speed.
VLE, Maximum Landing Gear Extended . . 181 KIAS/182 KCAS
Do not exceed this speed with the landing gear extended.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
VMCA, Minimum Control Airspeed

Hartzell Propellers . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 KIAS/92 KCAS
McCauley Propellers . . . . . . . . . . . 86 KIAS/91 KCAS
This is the lowest airspeed at which the aircraft is direc-
tionally controllable when one engine suddenly becomes
inoperative and the other engine is at takeoff power.
VMO/MMO, Maximum Operating . . . . . 259 KIAS/260 KCAS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.52 M
NOTE: S/Ns BB-2, BB-6 thru BB-733, BB-735 thru BB-

792, BB-794 thru BB-828, BB-830, etc. (200s) Airspeed
indicators marked in CAS values.
NOTE: B200 Airspeed indicators marked in IAS values.
All Models (at 12,500 lbs)

VMCG, Ground Minimum Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 KIAS
VMCA, Air Minimum Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 KIAS
Takeoff (Flaps 0%/Flaps 40%):
V1/VR (rotation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 KIAS/94 KIAS
50 ft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 KIAS/106 KIAS
V2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 KIAS/106 KIAS
VSSE, Intentional One-Engine Inoperative . . . . . . 104 KIAS

VY, Two-Engine Best Rate-of-Climb . . . . . . . . . 125 KIAS
VYSE, One-Engine Inoperative Best Rate-of-Climb . . 121 KIAS
VX, Two-Engine Best of Angle-of-Climb . . . . . . . 100 KIAS

June 2000
Limitations
VXSE, One-Engine Inoperative Best Angle-of-Climb . . 115 KIAS

Maximum Glide Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 KIAS
Turbulent Air Penetration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 KIAS
Balked Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 KIAS
Cruise Climb:
Sea Level to 10,000 ft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 KIAS
10,000 to 20,000 ft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 KIAS
20,000 to 25,000 ft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 KIAS
25,000 to 35,000 ft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 KIAS
Landing Approach:
Flaps 100% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 KIAS
Flaps 0% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 KIAS
Icing Conditions (minimum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 KIAS
Effective Windshield Deicing (maximum) . . . . . . 226 KIAS
Emergency Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 KIAS
Manual Gear Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 KIAS
Stall Speeds – Power Idle, 0° Angle-of-Bank:
100% Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 KIAS (VSO)
40% Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 KIAS
0% Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 KIAS (VS1)
Airstart (minimum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 KIAS

Autopilot Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMO/MMO
Flight with Cabin Entrance Door Removed . . . . . 205 KIAS

June 2000
CAE SimuFlite
Static Wicks (King Air 200)

■ One wick may be broken or missing from:
– Each wing (includes aileron)
– Each side of horizontal or vertical stabilizer
(Maximum of 3 wicks may be missing).
Towing
■ Do not tow the aircraft with rudder gust lock installed.
■ Do not tow the aircraft if one or more landing gear struts are
deflated.
NOTE: Exceeding the nosewheel deflection limit markings

during towing operations damages the nose strut/linkage.
Nosewheel deflection of approximately 10° or more with
the rudder gust lock installed damages the nosewheel
steering linkage.

June 2000
Limitations
Weight Limitations
Maximum Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,590 LBS
Maximum Takeoff
All Except FAR Part 135 Operations . . . . . . 12,500 LBS
FAR Part 135 Operations . . . . SEE CHART (Figure 3-1)
Maximum Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,500 LBS
Maximum Zero Fuel:
King Air 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10,400 LBS
King Air B200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,000 LBS
Center of Gravity Limits

■ The reference datum is 83.5 inches forward of the center of
the front jack point.
■ Aft limit – 196.4 inches aft of datum at all weights.
■ Forward at 12,500 lbs – 185.0 inches aft of datum with straight
line variation to 181.0 inches aft of datum at 11,279 lbs.
■ Forward at 11,279 lbs or less – 181.0 inches aft of datum.
Flight Load Factor Limits

Flaps Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 POSITIVE Gs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.27 NEGATIVE Gs
Flaps Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.00 POSITIVE Gs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.27 NEGATIVE Gs;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.0 G (B200)
Mean Aerodynamic Chord

MAC Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70.41 INCHES
Leading Edge of MAC . . . 171.23 INCHES AFT OF DATUM

June 2000
CAE SimuFlite
FAR, Part 135 Operations

Maximum Enroute Weight
3-1

October 1996
Limitations
Systems Limitations
Autopilot – King Air 200
FAR Part 91 or FAR Part 135 Operations
■ Refer to the FAA Approved Flight Manual Supplement in the
AFM Supplements Section or applicable FAR.
Fuel System
Approved Fuel Anti-Icing Additive
■ Use anti-icing additive conforming to Specification MIL-I-
27686.
Minimum Temperature Limit

Engine oil is used to heat the fuel on entering the fuel control.
Since no temperature measurement is available for the fuel at
this point, it must be assumed to be the same as the OAT.
Operations with Commercial Grade fuels are prohibited below
the OAT indicated below unless approved anti-icing fuel adi-
tives are used. Military Grade fuels have anti-icing additives
blended in the fuel at the refinery, and no further treatment is
necessary. Operations with Military Grade fuels below the tem-
peratures indicated are prohibited.
■ A minimum oil temperature of 55°C is recommended for opti-
mum fuel heater operation at takeoff power.
COMMERCIAL GRADES MILITARY GRADES

Jet A: -40°C JP-4: -58°C
Jet A-1: -47°C JP-5: -46°C
Jet B: -50°C JP-8: -50°C

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
CAUTION: Anti-icing additive must be properly blended

with the fuel to avoid deterioration of the fuel cells. The
additive concentration by volume shall be a minimum of
0.06% and a maximum of 0.15%. Approved procedure for
adding anti-icing concentrate is contained in AFM Section
IV, Normal Procedures.
CAUTION: JP-4 fuel per MIL-T-5624 has anti-icing additive

per MIL-I-27686 blended at the refinery, and no further
treatment is necessary. Some fuel suppliers blend anti-
icing additive in their storage tanks. Prior to refueling,
check with the fuel supplier to determine whether or not the
fuel has been blended. To assure proper concentration by
volume of fuel on board, blend only enough additive for the
unblended fuel.
Fuel Biocide Additive

Fuel biocide-fungicide BIOBOR JF in concentrations of 135 PPM
or 270 PPM may be used in the fuel. BIOBOR JF may be used
as the only fuel additive, or it may be used with the anti-icing
additive conforming to MIL-I-27686 specification. Used together,
the additives have no detrimental effect on the fuel system
components.
Refer to the King Air 200 or Super King Air 200 Series
Maintenance Manual and to the latest Pratt and Whitney Canada
Engine Service Bulletin No. 3044 for concentrations to use and
for procedures, recommendations, and limitations pertaining to
the use of biocidal/fungicidal additives in turbine fuels.
Approved Engine Fuels

Commercial Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . Jet A, Jet A-1, Jet B
Military Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JP-4, JP-5, JP-8

June 2000
Limitations
Emergency Engine Fuels

Commercial Aviation Gasoline Grades . . . . . 80 RED, 91/98,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100LL*, 100 GREEN,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115/145 PURPLE
Military Aviation Gasoline Grades . . . . . . . . . 80/87 RED,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100/130 GREEN,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115/145 PURPLE
*In some countries, this fuel is colored Green and designated
“100L.”
Limitations on the Use of Aviation Gasoline

■ Operation is limited to 150 hours between engine overhauls.
■ Operation is limited to 20,000 ft pressure altitude (FL 200) or
below if either standby pump is inoperative.
■ Crossfeed capability is required for climbs above 20,000 ft
pressure altitude (FL 200).
■ Operation above 31,000 ft (FL 310) is prohibited.
Auxiliary Fuel
■ Do not put any fuel into the auxiliary tanks unless the main
tanks are full.
Fuel Crossfeed
■ Crossfeeding of fuel is permitted only when one engine is
inoperative.
WARNING: The airplane is approved for takeoff with one

standby boost pump inoperative, but in such a case,
crossfeed of fuel will not be available from the side of the
inoperative standby boost pump.

June 2000
CAE SimuFlite
Fuel Gages in the Yellow Arc

■ Do not take off if fuel quantity gages indicate in the yellow arc
or indicate less than 265 lbs of fuel in each main tank system.
Fuel Imbalance Between Wings

Maximum Allowable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1,000 LBS
Operating with Low Fuel Pressure

■ Operation of either engine with its corresponding fuel pressure
(L/R FUEL PRESS annunciator) illuminated is limited to 10
hours before overhaul or replacement of the engine-driven
fuel pump. Windmilling time need not be charged against this
time limit.
Ice and Rain Protection Systems

Sustained Icing Conditions Airspeed . . . 140 KTS MINIMUM
■ On King Air B200 S/Ns BB-743, 793, 829, 854 to 870, 874
to 891, 894, 896 to 911, 913 to 1438, 1440 to 1443; BL-37
to 138, sustained flight in icing conditions is prohibited with
flaps extended. This does not include approach and landing,
if needed.
Optional Brake Deice System

■ Do not operate system above 15°C ambient temperature.
■ Do not operate system longer than 10 minutes (one deice
timer cycle) with the landing gear retracted. If operation does
not automatically terminate approximately 10 minutes after
gear retraction, manually select the system off.
■ Maintain 85% N1 or higher during periods of simultaneous
brake deice and wing boot operation. If inadequate pneu-
matic pressure is developed for proper wing boot inflation,
select brake deice system off.
NOTE: The rudder boost system may not operate when

the brake deice system is in use.

September 2002
Limitations
■ Both sources of instrument bleed air must be in operation.

■ Select brake deice system off during single engine operation.
Pneumatic Deice Boots

Minimum Ambient Temperature for Operation
of Deicing Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40°C
Ice Vanes (Inertial Separator System)

■ The ice vanes shall be extended for operations in ambient
temperature of +5°C or below when flight free of visible mois-
ture cannot be assured.
■ The ice vanes shall be retracted for operations in ambient
temperatures of +15°C or above.
■ On King Air B200 aircraft, ICE VANES LEFT and RIGHT
shall be extended or ENGINE ANTI-ICE LEFT and RIGHT
shall be ON for operation in ambient temperatures of +5°C or
below when flight free of visible moisture cannot be assured.
■ On King Air B200 aircraft, ICE VANES LEFT and RIGHT
shall be retracted or ENGINE ANTI-ICE LEFT and RIGHT
shall be OFF for all takeoff and flight operations in ambient
temperatures of above +15°C.
■ On King Air 200/B200 S/Ns prior to BB-1439; prior to
BL-138, once the manual override system is activated (i.e.,
anytime the ICE VANE EMERGENCY MANUAL EXTENSION
handle has been pulled out), do not attempt to operate the ice
vanes electrically until the override assembly inside the
engine cowling has been properly reset on the ground. Even
after the manual extension handle has been pushed back in,
the manual override system is still engaged.
■ Ice vanes should be extended for all ground operations for all
B200 models. It is also recommended for all 200s.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Instrument Markings
Fuel Quantity
Yellow Arc (No Takeoff Range) . . . . . . . . . 0 TO 265 LBS
Cabin Pressure Differential Gage

King Air 200 – before BB-195
Green Arc (approved operating range) . . . . . 0 TO 6.0 PSI
Red Arc (unapproved operating range) . . . 6.0 PSI TO END
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .OF SCALE
King Air 200 – BB-195 and subsequent; BL-1 and subsequent
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .OF SCALE
King Air B200
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .OF SCALE
Pneumatic Gage
Green Arc (normal operating range) . . . . . . 12 TO 20 PSI
Red Line (maximum operating limit) . . . . . . . . . . 20 PSI
Vacuum/Gyro Suction Gage
King Air 200
Narrow Green Arc
(normal from 35,000 to 15,000 ft MSL) . . . 3.0 TO 4.3 IN HG
Wide Green Arc
(normal from 15,000 ft to sea level) . . . . 4.3 TO 5.9 IN HG
King Air 200 (alternate gage) and King Air B200
Narrow Green Arc
(normal from 35,000 to 15,000 ft MSL) . . . 2.8 TO 4.3 IN HG

September 2002
Limitations
Wide Green Arc

(normal from 15,000 ft to sea level) . . . . 4.3 TO 5.9 IN HG
35K Marked on Face of Gage at . . . . . . . . . . 3.0 IN HG
15K Marked on Face of Gage at . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 IN HG
Propeller Deice Ammeter
Green Arc (normal operating range) . . 14 TO 18 AMPERES
. . . . . . . . . .18 TO 24 AMPERES (BB-1444 AND SUB)
Landing Gear Cycle Limits (Hydraulic)

■ Landing gear cycles (1 up – 1 down) are limited to one every
5 minutes for a total of 6 cycles followed by a 15 minute cool-
down period.
Powerplant
■ Number of Engines – 2
■ Engine Manufacturer – Pratt & Whitney of Canada (Longueuil,
Quebec, Canada)
■ Engine Model Number PT6A-41 (King Air 200) or PT6A-42
(King Air B200)
■ Do not lift power levers in flight.
Engine Operating Limits

■ The following limitations presented in Figures 3-2, 3-3 and
Tables 3D, 3E, and 3F shall be observed. Each column pre-
sents limitations. The limits represented do not necessarily
occur simultaneously. Refer to Pratt & Whitney Engine
Maintenance Manual for specific actions required if limits are
exceeded.
Oil Specifications
■ Any oil specified by brand name in the latest revision of Pratt
& Whitney SB 3001 is approved for use in the PT6A-41
(King Air 200) or the PT6A-42 (King Air B200) engine.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Overtemperature Limits – Starting Conditions Only

(PT6A-41 and -42)
3-2
Adjustments:
AREA A 1. Determine and correct cause of overtemperature.
2. Visually inspect through exhaust duct.
3. Record in engine log book.
AREA B Perform hot section inspection.
AREA C Return engine to overhaul.
NOTE: Interturbine temperatures shown make no allowance

for instrument errors.

September 2002
Limitations
Overtorque Limits – All Conditions

(PT6A-40, -41, -42 and -42A)
3-3
Adjustments:
AREA A No action required.
AREA B 1. Determine and correct cause of overtorque.
2. Record in engine log book.
AREA C Return engine to overhaul.
September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

September 2002
Limitations
Max Prop RPM Oil Press

Torque N1 RPM N1 %
Operating Condition SHP Observed Oil Temp °C
(ft-lbs)1 N2 (PSI)2
ITT (°C)
Starting – – 10003 – – – – -40 (min)
Low Idle – - 6604 19,500 52 (min) – 60 (min) -40 to 99
High Idle – – – – 5 – – -40 to 99
Takeoff9 850 2230 750 38,100 101.5 2000 105 to 135 10 to 99
Max Continuous and 6

850 2230 750 38,100 101.5 2000 105 to 135 10 to 99
Cruise
Cruise Climb and 6

850 2230 725 38,100 101.5 2000 105 to 135 0 to 99
Rec Cruise
Max Reverse7 – – 750 – 88 1900 105 to 135 0 to 99
Transient – 27503 850 38,5008 102.68 22003 – 0 to 1049
Table 3-D; King Air 200 Engine Operating Limits (PT6A-41)

1 Torque limit applies within range of 1,600 to 2,000 propeller RPM (N ). Below 1,600 RPM, torque limited to 1,100 ft-lbs.
2
2 When gas generator speeds are above 27,000 RPM (72% N ) and oil temperatures are between 60 and 71°C, normal
1
oil pressure are:
100 to 135 PSI below 21,000 ft and 85 to 135 PSI at 21,000 ft and above
During extremely cold starts, oil pressure may reach 200 PSI. Oil pressure between 60 and 85 PSI is undesirable;
it should be tolerated only for the completion of the fight, and then only at a reduced power setting not exceeding
1,100 ft-lbs torque. Oil pressure below 60 PSI is unsafe; it requires that either the engine be shut down, or that a
landing be made as soon as possible with minimum power to sustain flight. Fluctuations of ±10 PSI are acceptable.
3 These values are time limited to 5 seconds.
4 High ITT at ground idle may be corrected by reducing accessory load and/or increasing N RPM.
1
5 At approximately 70% N .
1
6 Cruise torque values vary with altitude and temperature.
7 This operation is time limited to one minute.
9 These values are time limited to 5 minutes.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

September 2002
Limitations

Torque N1 RPM N1 % Oil Temp
Operating Condition SHP Observed
(ft-lbs)1 N2 (PSI)2 °C3,4
ITT (°C)
Starting – – 10005 – – – – -40 (min)
Low Idle – - 7506 21,000 56 (min) – 60 (min) -40 to 99
High Idle – – – – 70 (approx.) – – -40 to 99
Takeoff 850 2230 800 38,100 101.5 2000 100 to 135 0 to 99

850 2230 800 38,100 101.5 2000 100 to 135 0 to 99
Cruise
Cruise Climb and 8

850 2230 770 38,100 101.5 2000 100 to 135 0 to 99
Rec Cruise
Max Reverse9 – – 750 – 88 1900 100 to 135 0 to 99
Transient – 27505 850 38,50010 102.610 22005 – 0 to 10411
Table 3-E; King Air B200 Engine Operating Limits (PT6A-42); S/Ns BB-743, 793, 829, 854 to 870,
874 to 891, 894, 896 to 911, 913 to 1438, 1440 to 1443; BL-37 to 138
2
2 When gas generator speeds are above 27,000 RPM (72% N ) and oil temperatures are between 60 and 71°C, normal oil pressure are:
1
100 to 135 PSI below 21,000 ft and 85 to 135 PSI at 21,000 ft and above
During extremely cold starts, oil pressure may reach 200 PSI. Oil pressure between 60 and 85 PSI is undesirable; it should be tolerated
only for the completion of the fight, and then only at a reduced power setting not exceeding 1100 ft-lbs torque. Oil pressure below 60 PSI
is unsafe; it requires that either the engine be shut down, or that a landing be made at the nearest suitable airport with minimum power to
sustain flight. Fluctuations of ±10 PSI are acceptable.
3 A minimum oil temperature of 55°C is recommended for fuel heater operation at takeoff power.
4 Oil temperature limits are -40°C and 99°C. However, temperature of up to 104°C are permitted for a maximum time of 10 minutes.
6 High ITT at ground idle may be corrected by reducing accessory load or increasing N RPM.
1
1

11 Values above 99°C are time limited to 10 minutes.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

September 2002
Limitations

Torque N1 RPM N1 % Oil Temp
Operating Condition SHP Observed N2
(ft-lbs)1 (PSI)2 °C3,4
ITT (°C)
Starting – – 10005 – – – – -40 (min)
Low Idle – – 7506 22,875 61 (min) 12 60 (min) -40 to 99
High Idle – – – – 7 – – -40 to 99
Takeoff6 850 2230 800 38,100 101.5 2000 100 to 135 0 to 99

850 2230 770 38,100 101.5 2000 100 to 135 0 to 99
Cruise
Cruise Climb and 8

850 2230 770 38,100 101.5 2000 100 to 135 0 to 99
Rec Cruise
Max Reverse9 – – 750 – 88 1900 100 to 135 0 to 99
Transient – 27505 850 38,50010 102.610 22005 200 0 to 10411
Table 3-F; King Air B200 Engine Operating Limits (PT6A-42); S/Ns BB-1439, BB-1444 and subsequent
except BB-1463; BL-139 and subsequent; BW-1 and subsequent
2
2 When gas generator speeds are above 27,000 RPM (72% N ) and oil temperatures are between 60 and 71°C, normal oil pressure are:
1
Below 21,000 ft 100 to 135 PSI; 21,000 ft and above 85 to 135 PSI
During extremely cold starts, oil pressure may reach 200 PSI. Oil pressure between 60 and 85 PSI is undesirable; it should be tolerated only for the com-
pletion of the fight, and then only at a reduced power setting not exceeding 1100 ft-lbs torque. Oil pressure below 60 PSI is unsafe; it requires that either
the engine be shut down, or that a landing be made at the nearest suitable airport with minimum power to sustain flight. Fluctuations of ±10 PSI are
acceptable.
3 A minimum oil temperature of 55°C is recommended for fuel heater operation at takeoff power.
4 Oil temperature limits are -40°C and 99°C. However, temperature of up to 104°C are permitted for a maximum time of 10 minutes.
6 High ITT at ground idle may be corrected by reducing accessory load or increasing N RPM.
1
1
11 Values above 99°C are time limited to 5 minutes.
12 1,100 RPM for McCauley propeller and 1,180 RPM for Hartzell propeller.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

September 2002
Limitations
Powerplant Instrument Markings
Red Line Yellow Arc Green Arc Red Line

Instrument
Minimum Limit Caution Range Normal Operating Range Maximum Limit
Interstage Turbine Temperature – – 400 to 750°C1 750°C1

400 to 800°C2 800°C2
Torquemeter – – 400 to 2230 ft-lbs 2230 ft-lbs
Propeller Tachometer – – 1600 to 2000 RPM 2000 RPM
Gas Generator Tachometer – – 61 to 101.5%3 101.5%
Oil Temperature – – 10 to 99°C 99°C
Oil Pressure 60 PSI 60 to 100 PSI3 105 to 135 PSI1 200 PSI
100 to 135 PSI2 135 PSI3
85 to 135 PSI3
1 King Air 200
2 King Air B200 S/Ns BB-743 to 1443 with exceptions; BL-37 to 138
3 King Air B200 S/Ns BB-1439, 1444 and subsequent except 1463; BL-139 and subsequent; BW-1 and subsequent
4 A dual-band yellow/green arc extends from 85 to 100 PSI, indicating the extended range of normal oil pressure for oper-
ation at, or above, 21,000 ft. A red diamond at 200 PSI indicates upper transient limit.
5 Red line maximum limits are maximum continuous or cruise values. Transients may occur at higher values.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

September 2002
Limitations
Powerplant Instrument Markings (cont.)
Green Arc
Instrument Red Line Minimum Limit Red Line Maximum Limit
Normal Operating
Interstage Turbine Temperature – 400 to 800°C 800°C1
Torquemeter – 400 to 2230 ft-lbs 2230 ft-lbs
Propeller Tachometer (N2) – 1600 to 2000 RPM 2000 RPM
Gas Generator Tachometer (N1) – – 101.5%
Oil Temperature – 10° to 99°C 99°C
Oil Pressure2 60 PSI 100 to 135 PSI 200 PSI

S/Ns BB-1439, BB-1444 thru BB-1485, except BB-1463 and BB-1484; BL-139 and BL-140
1 Starting Limit (Dashed Red Radial): 1000°C
2 A dual-band yellow/green arc extends from 85 to 100 PSI, indicating the extended range of normal oil pressure for operation at, or above, 21,000 ft. A red
diamond at 200 PSI indicates upper transient limit.
Yellow Arc Green Arc

Instrument Red Line Minimum Limit Red Line Maximum Limit
Caution Range Normal Operating Range
Interstage Turbine Temperature – – 400 to 800°C 800°C1
Torquemeter – – 400 to 2230 ft-lbs 2230 ft-lbs
Propeller Tachometer (N2) – – 3 2000 RPM
Gas Generator Tachometer (N1) – – 61 to 101.5% 101.5%
Oil Temperature – – 0° to 99°C 99°C
Oil Pressure2 60 PSI 60 to 100 PSI 85 to 135 PSI 135 PSI

S/Ns BB-1484, BB-1486 and subsequent; BL-141 and subsequent
1 Starting Limit (Dashed Red Radial): 1000°C
2 A dual-band yellow/green arc extends from 85 to 100 PSI, indicating the extended range of normal oil pressure for operation at, or above, 21,000 ft.
A red diamond at 200 PSI indicates upper transient limit.
3 1180 to 2000 RPM (Hartzell propellers), 1100 to 2000 RPM (McCauley propellers).

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

September 2002
Limitations
Propellers
King Air 200
Number of Propellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hartzell Propeller, Inc.
Propeller Hub Model Numbers . . . . . . . . HC-B3TN-3G or
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HC-B3TN-3N
Propellers Blades
BB-2, BB-6 to BB-815, BB-817 to BB-824; BL-1 to BL-29
T10178B-3R
BB-816, BB-825 and subsequent; BL-30 and subsequent
T10178K-3R
Propeller Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98.5 Inches Only
Propeller Blade Angles at 30-Inch Station
Feathered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +90.0°
Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -9.0°
Propeller Rotational Speed Limits
Transients not exceeding 5-seconds . . . . . . . 2,200 RPM
Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,900 RPM
All other conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2,000 RPM
Propeller Rotational Overspeed Limits
■ The maximum propeller overspeed limit is 2,200 RPM and
time-limited to five-seconds. Sustained propeller overspeeds
faster than 2,000 RPM indicate failure of the primary governor.
The flight may be continued at propeller overspeeds up to
2,080 RPM provided torque is limited to 1,800 foot-pounds.
Sustained propeller overspeeds above 2,080 RPM are not
approved.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
King Air B200 - S/Ns BB-743 to 1143 with exceptions;

BL-37 to 138
Number of Propellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Manufacturer . . . . . Hartzell Propeller, Inc., Piqua, Ohio
. . . . . . . . . . . . .McCauley Propeller, Vandalia, Ohio
Propeller Hub and Model Numbers
Propeller Diameter
Hartzell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98.5 Inches Only
McCauley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98.0 Inches Only
Hartzell Feathered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +90.0°
Hartzell Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -9.0°
McCauley Feathered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +86.8°
McCauley Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -10.0°
Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,900 RPM
faster than 2,000 RPM indicate failure of the primary gover-
nor. Flight may be continued at propeller overspeeds up to
Sustained propeller overspeeds greater than 2,080 RPM are
not approved.*
*2,120 RPM (BB-1444 and subsequent).

September 2002
Limitations
King Air B-200 - S/Ns BB-1439 and subsequent with

exceptions; BL-139 and subsequent; BW-1 and
subsequent
Number of Propellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Manufacturer . . . . . Hartzell Propeller, Inc., Piqua, Ohio
. . . . . . . . . . . . .McCauley Propeller, Vandalia, Ohio
Propeller Hub and Blade Model Numbers
Hartzell Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HC-E4N-3G
Hartzell Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D9390SK-1R
McCauley Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4HFR34C771-X
McCauley Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-94LA-0
■ The letter appearing in the place of the X represents minor
variations in the propeller hub or blades. They do not effect
the eligibility or interchangeability.
Propeller Diameter
Hartzell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93.0 INCHES (MAX)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92.0 INCHES (MIN)
McCauley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94.0 INCHES (MAX)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93.5 INCHES (MIN)
Hartzell Feathered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +87.9°
Hartzell Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -11.2°
McCauley Feathered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +87.5°
McCauley Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -10.0°

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,900 RPM
Minimum Idle Speed
Hartzell Propellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,180 RPM
McCauley Propellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,100 RPM
faster than 2,000 RPM indicate failure of the primary governor.
The flight may be continued at propeller overspeeds up to
Sustained propeller overspeeds above 2,080 RPM (2,120 RPM;
SNs BB-1444 and subsequent) are not approved.

September 2002
Systems
Table of Contents
Avionics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1
Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1
Environmental Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-1
Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-1
Flight Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-1
Ice and Rain Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4G-1
Landing Gear and Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4H-1
Oxygen System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4I-1
Powerplant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4J-1

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998
B2CRH AV 9/16/02 11:19 AM Page 1
Avionics
Pitot/Static System
Non-ADC Equipped
PITOT PITOT
HEAT N N HEAT
SWITCH O O SWITCH
1 2
7.5 A D D 7.5 A
U U
A A
L L
F F
E E
D D
B B
U U
S S
PILOT'S COPILOT'S
SIDE SIDE
AIRSPEED
INDICATOR
ALTIMETER
VERTICAL
SPEED
INDICATOR
CABIN
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE
GAGE
ALTERNATE
STATIC AIR ALTERNATE
SELECTOR STATIC AIR
SWITCH (PILOT ONLY)
AFT PRESSURE BULKHEAD
STATIC STATIC
PORTS PORTS
PILOT'S PITOT
COPILOT'S PITOT
PILOT'S STATIC
COPILOT'S STATIC
ALTERNATE STATIC

October 1998
B2CRH AV 9/16/02 11:19 AM Page 2
CAE SimuFlite
Pitot/Static System
ADC Equipped
PITOT PITOT
HEAT N N HEAT
SWITCH O O SWITCH
1 2
7.5 A D D 7.5 A
U U
A A
L L
F F
E E
D D
B B
U U
S S
AFCS
PILOT'S AIR DATA COPILOT'S
SIDE COMPUTER SIDE
AIRSPEED
INDICATOR
AIRSPEED
INDICATOR
ALTIMETER
ALTIMETER
VERTICAL
SPEED
INDICATOR VERTICAL
SPEED
INDICATOR
CABIN
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE
GAGE
ALTERNATE
STATIC AIR ALTERNATE
SELECTOR STATIC AIR
SWITCH (PILOT ONLY)
STATIC STATIC
PORTS PORTS
PILOT'S PITOT
COPILOT'S PITOT
PILOT'S STATIC
COPILOT'S STATIC
ALTERNATE STATIC

October 1998
Avionics
Avionics
This section includes:
■ pitot/static system
■ avionics power
■ communications and navigation equipment
■ autopilot.
Please refer to the applicable manuals for more detailed infor-
mation.
Pitot/Static System
A pitot mast on the left and right forward fuselage and static
ports on the left and right rear fuselage provide ram and static
pressure to the pitot/static system. Electrically powered heating
elements warms the pitot masts to prevent ice formation. With
the LEFT and RIGHT PITOT switches in ON, the pitot mast
heating elements are powered. Static ports are unheated.
The pilot or left pitot supplies the pilot airspeed indicator and air
data computer (if installed). The copilot or right pitot supplies the
copilot airspeed indicator. On S/Ns BB-324 to BB-452 without
SI 1047, the copilot’s pitot mast also supplies the landing gear
warning system’s differential pressure switch.
The static ports supply pressure for the:
■ airspeed indicators
■ vertical speed indicators
■ altimeter
■ cabin pressure differential gage
■ air data computer (if installed).
The PILOT’S STATIC AIR SOURCE valve handle can connect
the pilot’s pitot/static system to an alternate static source in the
aircraft tailcone.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
Air Data Computer

The air data computer processes ram and static air pressure
inputs to provide electrical outputs for various flight and avionics
equipment. These outputs include:
■ indicated and true airspeed
■ vertical speed
■ pressure and barometric corrected altitude
■ altitude alerting
■ altitude and airspeed warnings.
The ADC then provides information from the outputs to the fol-
lowing:
■ pilot’s altimeter
■ flight management system (if installed)
■ flight guidance system (FGS)
■ SAT/TAS indicator
■ ATC transponders
■ automatic flight control system (AFCS).
■ Avionics Power
The aircraft battery and/or generators supply 28V DC to three
avionics buses (Avionics Nos. 1, 2, and 3) when the AVIONICS
MASTER PWR switch is on. If the AVIONICS MASTER PWR
switch fails, pull the AVIONICS MASTER circuit breaker to restore
power to the Avionics buses by de-energizing the avionics relays.
An optional ground communications electric power bus can sup-
ply power to the No. 2 communications radio and audio panel.
This feature reduces battery load of radio use before engine start.
Another option is an auxiliary DC bus system to power essential
avionics equipment if electrical load-shedding is required. With
the generator and battery switches off, the AUX DC BUS switch
in ON normally provides power directly from the Hot Battery bus
to the No. 2 communications and navigation radios, audio panel,
compass, and glareshield floodlights.

October 1998
Avionics
Communications Equipment
A typical communications equipment installation includes:
■ two audio control panels
■ two VHF communications transceivers
■ radio telephone
Because of the wide variation of equipment found in these air-
craft, please refer to the applicable manuals for more detailed
descriptions and operating information.
Static Discharging
Static wicks on the aircraft structure and control surfaces mini-
mize the effects of lightning strikes and static charges on avion-
ics equipment and the aircraft structure. The wicks bleed off
accumulated static charges to the atmosphere. Due to varying
configurations, consult your MEL for number and position of sta-
tic wicks.
Navigation
Navigation equipment provides aircraft direction and attitude
information, determines aircraft position, and furnishes flight
management.
Attitude and direction equipment use inertial and magnetic
forces to sense and display aircraft heading and attitude.
Equipment includes:
■ magnetic compass
■ turn and slip indicator
■ gyro horizon/vertical gyro
■ radio magnetic indicator
■ vertical gyro system
■ compass system.

June 2000
CAE SimuFlite
Position determining equipment includes systems that operate

independently of ground stations or with ground stations to
determine aircraft position. Equipment includes:
■ instrument landing system (ILS)
■ very high frequency (VHF) navigation equipment
■ automatic direction finding (ADF)
■ distance measuring equipment (DME)
■ transponder
■ long range navigation equipment
■ LORAN
■ global positioning system (GPS)
■ flight management system (FMS)
■ weather radar.
Autopilot
The autopilot system provides automatic control and stabiliza-
tion of the aircraft about the pitch, roll, and yaw axes. It positions
the aircraft elevator, ailerons, and rudder in response to autopi-
lot/flight computer steering commands. Selectable operating
modes automatically maintain a desired altitude, pitch attitude
or heading, and capture and track localizer, glideslope, and
VOR signals.
Systems certified on this aircraft include:
■ Collins AP-105
■ Collins AP-106
■ Collins APS-65
■ Collins APS-80
■ King KFC-300
■ King KFC-400 (B200 only)
■ Honeywell (Sperry) SPZ-200A
■ Honeywell (Sperry) SPZ-4000.

October 1998
Avionics
A typical autopilot system consists of:

■ autopilot or flight control computer
■ autopilot controller
■ airspeed sensor or air data computer (ADC)
■ mode selector
■ aileron, elevator, and rudder servo-actuators.
The autopilot system receives signals from the airspeed sensor
or ADC, vertical accelerometer, vertical and directional gyros,
and navigation receivers. With this data, the autopilot drives the
servo-actuators to maintain a desired altitude, attitude, naviga-
tion path, or airspeed.
A typical autopilot system provides:
■ yaw damping
■ roll rate and bank angle limiting
■ automatic capture and track of VOR, ILS, and localizer
■ heading, roll, airspeed, and altitude capture and hold
■ heading select
■ soft ride.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
4A-8 Developed for Training Purposes October 1998

Electrical System
Schematic Symbols
ON
OFF
RELAY COIL SWITCH SHUNT WITH
METER
CURRENT GROUND DIODE

LIMITER
PUSH-PULL SWITCH FUSE

CIRCUIT BREAKER
BREAKER
CHECK NORMALLY NORMALLY

VALVES OPEN CLOSED
(NO) (NC)

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
DC Electrical System
King Air 200
RIGHT GEN 40
RIGHT GENERATOR BUS

60
20 80
RIGHT CONTROL 0 10 20
30
100
0
STARTER 50A 50A 50A

GEN 15A DC LOAD 60A
15A 60A 60A
REVERSE ISOLATION LEFT LANDING 50A RECOGNITION
CURRENT + - LIMITER LEFT PITOT
LIGHT SW 60A LIGHT SW MANUAL PROP
PROTECTION
SHUNT RIGHT START RELAY 325A HEAT SW DEICE CONTROL
PROP DEICE RIGHT LANDING
AUTO HEAT SW LEFT MANUAL
LIGHT SW PROP DEICE RIGHT MANUAL
PROP DEICE
EXT PWR TAXI LIGHT SW
ICE LIGHT SW FLAP MOTOR
EXTERNAL POWER PROPELLER
PLUG-ENGAGED GOVERNOR
SENSOR NAV LIGHT SW
STROBE LANDING GEAR FLAP CONTROL
BEACON CONTROL & INDICATOR
SHUNT LIGHTS SW LIGHTS RIGHT IGNITOR
RIGHT PITOT POWER
HEAT SW STALL WARNING LEFT IGNITOR
HEAT POWER RIGHT STARTER
BATTERY BATTERY M CONTROL
BATTERY 5A A L FUEL FLOW
LEFT STARTER
CHARGE SW BB225 AND AFTER
I LEFT OIL PRESSURE RIGHT OIL CONTROL
SENSOR BATTERY N INDICATOR PRESSURE R FUEL FLOW
AVIONICS INDICATOR BB225 AND AFTER
BB364 AND AFTER RELAY FUSE MASTER CONTROL LEFT ENGINE FUEL
B CONTROL HEAT RIGHT ENGINE FUEL
A I LEFT OIL TEMP CONTROL HEAT
RIGHT OIL TEMP
LEFT FUEL N N
INDICATOR O
5A T S INDICATOR PRESSURE O
FIRE DETECTION WARNING
RIGHT STANDBY
5A T O CHIP DETECTOR N
FUEL PUMP RIGHT ICE VANE 3
H E L LEFT ICE VANE O
R A
LEFT BLEED LEFT AUX FUEL 4
O AIR CONTROL RIGHT BLEED AUTOFEATHER QUANTITY RIGHT FIREWALL
T BATTERY Y T PROP AIR CONTROL 2 WARNING AND VALVE
5A I SYNCHROPHASER N TRANSFER D
RELAY O
LOGO LIGHT
CABIN TEMP U D
LEFT STANDBY O CABIN PRESSURE CONTROL
5A B N
RADIO & ENGINE
D A U
FUEL PUMP B CONTROL INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT LIGHTS A
A U 1 U SUBPANEL AND
L
DIRECT LIGHT L
T S FLIGHT A CONSOLE LIGHTS RIGHT STANDBY
5A B INSTRUMENT LIGHTS CABIN FASTEN SEAT
L FUEL PUMP
THRESHOLD LT T STALL WARNING BELT & NO SMOKING LEFT STANDBY
E U D SYSTEM SIGN AND CHIMES RIGHTBLEED FUEL PUMP F
EXT POWER S OVERHEAD AND U AIR WARNING E RIGHT AUX FUEL F
R SIDE PANEL LIGHTS LANDING GEAR E
5A Y RELAY A LANDING GEAR F D QUANTITY
LEFT FIREWALL WARNING HORN ANNUNCIATOR WARNING AND
LEFT BLEED L POSITION INDICATOR E D
SHUTOFF VALVE
- + AIR WARNING LEFT FUEL D
INDICATOR TRANSFER
B VENT HEATER RIGHT FUEL LEFT FIREWALL B RIGHT FUEL

RIGHT FIREWALL 5A ANNUNCIATOR F VENT HEATER WINDSHIELD WIPER VALVE U PRESSURE B
U POWER
U
SHUTOFF VALVE
S E OPTIONAL
B S WARNING
D ALTIMETER COPILOT'S TURN & VACUUM DAMPER LEFT FUEL S
PNEUMATIC
SLIP INDICATOR U SYSTEM QUANTITY FUEL
5A SURFACE DEICE S CROSSFEED
LEFT FIRE EXT OVER TRIM TAB
VOLT BB364
PROT PILOT'S TURN AND B RUDDER BOOST NO. 2 INVERTER
AND RIGHT FUEL
5A SLIP INDICATOR
U LEFT GEN SYSTEM CONTROL QUANTITY
RIGHT FIRE EXT AFTER S CONTROL
5A NO. 1 INVERTER RIGHT GEN
CONTROL CONTROL
YAW
DAMP
- + + FUEL DRAIN
COLLECTER PUMPS
EXT POWER CONNECTION ISOLATION
LIMITER 325A
SHUNT LEFT START RELAY
REVERSE 50A
CURRENT + - 60A 50A 50A
60A
50A
PROTECTION 60A 60A
15A 40 60
LEFT 15A 0
20
10 20
30
80
100
0
STARTER
LEFT GEN
GEN CONTROL
DC LOAD
LEFT GENERATOR BUS

October 1998
Electrical System
RIGHT GENERATOR BUS
FROM NO. 2 60A 40A 50A

DUAL FED BUS
MOD OPTIONAL TO AC
5A EQUIPMENT
POWER
LDG GEAR CONTROL
VENT BLOWER COPILOT'S
60A POWER 50A WINDSHIELD
50A ANTI-ICE
AFT EVAPORATOR
BLOWER POWER 30A RIGHT RADIANT
LANDING GEAR 20A HEAT
MOTOR CONTROLLER AIR CONDITIONER
AND DYNAMIC BRAKE CLUTCH
7.5A
DC TEST JACK
15A
LANDING
GEAR
MOTOR AVIONICS BUS NO. 2
30A
AVIONICS NO. 2
POWER RELAY
AVIONICS BUS NO. 3
FROM NO. 1
DUAL FED BUS
AVIONICS NO. 3
POWER RELAY
AVIONICS
SWITCH
ON AVIONICS BUS NO. 1
5A
AVIONICS OFF
MASTER AVIONICS NO. 1
CONTROL POWER RELAY
30A 30A
PILOT'S
WINDSHIELD TO AC
50A ANTI-ICE CONDENSER
BLOWER
POWER
LEFT RADIANT 40A
20A HEAT 60A 40A
50A CURRENT
LIMITER
LEFT GENERATOR BUS

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
King Air B200
RIGHT GEN 40 60
RIGHT GENERATOR BUS
RIGHT CONTROL 0
20
10 20
80
100
STARTER 0 30
50A
GEN 15A DC LOAD 60A 50A 50A
50A 60A 60A
15A 60A
REVERSE
ISOLATION L EFT LANDING
CURRENT + - LIMITER LIGHT LEFT PITOT
MANUAL PROP
HEAT
PROTECTION RIGHT START RELAY 325A RIGHT LANDING TAXI LIGHT DEICE CONTROL
SHUNT PROP AUTOMATIC LIGHT SWITCH
SWITCH
LEFT MANUAL
HEAT SWITCH PROP DEICE RIGHT MANUAL
ICE LIGHTS PROP DEICE
EXT PWR NAV LIGHTS
BEACON LIGHTS FLAP MOTOR
EXTERNAL POWER PROPELLER
PLUG-ENGAGED SWITCH RECOGNITION LANDING GEAR
CONTROL GOVERNOR
SENSOR STROBE LIGHTS LIGHTS FLAP CONTROL
TAIL FLOOD & INDICATOR
SHUNT SWITCH LIGHTS SWITCH RIGHT IGNITOR
STALL WARNING POWER
RIGHT PITOT HEAT HEAT LEFT IGNITOR
POWER RIGHT STARTER
BATTERY M CONTROL
BATTERY A
CHARGE SENSOR BATTERY SW AVIONICS LEFT STARTER
I MASTER CONTROL
RIGHT FUEL
CONTROL
LEFT FUEL FLOW
5A N FLOW INDICATOR RIGHT OIL PRESS
R NAV LEFT OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR N
MEMORY (OPT) B LEFT OIL PRESSURE O
5A A I WARNING (OPT.) RIGHT OIL PRESS RIGHT OIL TEMP N
LEFT ICE VANE WARNING (OPT.) LEFT FUEL O
BAT RELAY T S CONT LEFT ENGINE FUEL
TEMPERATURE
PRESSURE 3
T O CONT HEAT WARNING
5A L
RIGHT ENGINE FUEL
R ICE VANE CONT 4
STEREO (OPT.) H E LEFT GEN CONTROL HEAT
O R A OVERHEAT (OPT.)
LEFT FUEL D
FIRE DETECTION
T Y T N RIGHT FIRE RIGHT GEN QUANTITY U RIGHT FIREWALL
ENTRY LTS & 5A BATTERY I PROP DETECTION OVERHEAT (OPT.)
A
VALVE D
CLOCK LTS & SYNCHROPHASER O LEFT CHIP N U
EXT PWR SENSE
RELAY O DETECTOR LEFT AUX FUEL L
B B N RIGHT CHIP O AUTOFEATHER QUANTITY A
5A FLIGHT & GYRO 1 L
A U INSTRUMENT LIGHTS INSTRUMENT DETECTOR WARNING AND
RIGHT STANDBY 2 AVIONICS & ENGINE TRANSFER
FUEL PUMP 5A T S INDIRECT LIGHTS F
B INSTRUMENT LTS
2 T OVERHEAD AND
D CABIN READING E RIGHT STANDBY
5A E U SIDE PANEL LIGHTS STALL WARNING LIGHTS
D FUEL PUMP F
LEFT STANDBY U SYSTEM D COPILOT'S TURN E
FUEL PUMP 5A R S LEFT BLEED A & SLIP
2 Y EXT POWER AIR WARNING OVERHEAD, U RIGHT AUX FUEL D
5A RELAY L LANDING GEAR SUBPANEL AND A QUANTITY
WARNING HORN CONSOLE LTS FLOURESCENT LTS B WARNING AND
THRESHOLD LT
+ L
- ANNUNCIATOR
POWER LEFT FUEL
NO SMK, FSB, AND
CABIN
U TRANSFER
B
B F RIGHT BLEED AIR LEFT STANDBY S
LEFT FIREWALL 5A U
VENT HEATER WARNING FUEL PUMP
RIGHT FUEL
U
SHUTOFF VALVE PNEUMATIC E F S
S QUANTITY
SURFACE DEICE D BRAKE DEICE E
LANDING GEAR
5A (OPTIONAL) ANNUNCIATOR POSITION IND
RIGHT FIREWALL INDICATOR D RIGHT FUEL
SHUTOFF VALVE AUTOMATIC
OXYGEN CONTROL PRESSURE
5A OVER B YAW DAMPER WINDSHIELD WIPER
RIGHT FUEL
LEFT FIREWALL WARNING
VOLT U VENT HEAT
LEFT FIRE EXT LEFT BLEED AIR B VALVE
PROT S FUEL
CONTROL PILOT'S TURN U
5A & SLIP CABIN TEMP CROSSFEED
S CABIN PRESSURE
RIGHT FIRE EXT 5A ENCODER CONTROL LOSS (OPT.)
ALTIMETER (OPT.) NO. 1 INVERTER
1 - + +
PITCH TRIM
CONTROL NO. 2 INVERTER RIGHT BLEED AIR
EXT POWER ISOLATION CONTROL CONTROL
LIMITER LEFT OIL
CONNECTION LEFT GEN CONTROL TEMPERATURE RUDDER BOOST
325A FURNISHINGS
CONTROL
MASTER CONTROL
CABIN PRESS
SHUNT CONTROL RIGHT GENERATOR
REVERSE LEFT START RELAY 50A CONTROL
CURRENT + - 60A 50A 50A 50A
PROTECTION 60A CIGARETTE 60A 60A
15A 40 60
LIGHTER
15A 20 80
LEFT 0 10 20 100
0 30
STARTER LEFT GEN DC LOAD

GEN CONTROL LEFT GENERATOR BUS
1
ON BB-1096, BB-1098 AND SUBSEQUENT
CIRCUIT BREAKERS REPLACE FUSES
2 ON BB-1097, BB-1095 AND PRIOR

October 1998
Electrical System
RIGHT GENERATOR BUS

FROM NO. 2 60A 40A 50A
DUAL FED BUS
MOD OPTIONAL TO AC
5A EQUIPMENT POWER
LDG GEAR CONTROL
VENT BLOWER COPILOT'S
POWER
60A 50A WINDSHIELD
50A ANTI-ICE
AFT EVAPORATOR
BLOWER POWER RIGHT RADIANT
30A
LANDING GEAR 20A HEAT
MOTOR CONTROLLER AIR CONDITIONER
AND DYNAMIC BRAKE CLUTCH
7.5A
DC TEST JACK
15A
LANDING
GEAR 30A
MOTOR
AVIONICS BUS NO. 2
AVIONICS NO. 2
POWER RELAY
AVIONICS BUS NO. 3
FROM NO. 1
DUAL FED BUS
AVIONICS NO. 3
POWER RELAY
AVIONICS
SWITCH
ON AVIONICS BUS NO. 1
5A
AVIONICS
MASTER OFF AVIONICS NO. 1
CONTROL POWER RELAY
30A 30A
PILOT'S
WINDSHIELD
50A ANTI-ICE CONDENSER
BLOWER
TO AC
POWER
LEFT RADIANT 40A
20A HEAT
40A 50A
60A
LEFT GENERATOR BUS

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998
Electrical System
Electrical System
DC System
DC electrical sources include:
■ a 24V, 34 amp-hour nickel-cadmium battery
■ two 250A 30V DC starter/generators
■ an external DC power system.
These power sources supply the dual-fed bus system that dis-
tributes power to the aircraft through circuit breakers:
■ Battery
The battery powers starting and emergency operation of essen-
tial equipment powered from the Hot Battery bus. With the BATT
switch in ON, power flows from the battery through the battery
relay to the Main Battery bus. The Main Battery bus then feeds
the Isolation bus that, in turn, provides power to the Left and
Right Generator buses. Once the Generator buses are pow-
ered, the four Dual-Fed buses are powered.
The Main Battery bus also supplies two starter circuits controlled
by the engine starter switches and starter relays.
For nicad batteries, a battery charge current detector continu-
ously monitors battery charging rate. If charging rate exceeds 7
amps for six seconds or more, the monitoring system illuminates
the BATTERY CHARGE annunciator and triggers the flashing
MASTER CAUTION annunciators. After a battery engine start,
the BATTERY CHARGE annunciator normally illuminates after
the operating engine generator is turned on.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
Generators
The generators function as starters during engine starts. Once
an engine is running, the generators provide DC power to the
aircraft. GEN 1 and GEN 2 switches control the generators. The
MASTER SWITCH gang bar turns off the battery and generator
switches simultaneously.
Reverse-current protection prevents the generators from
absorbing power from the Generator buses if the generators are
not operating, or if generator voltage is less than bus voltage.
Voltage Regulation
On aircraft BB-2 to 88, a voltage regulation system consists of
transistorized regulators, overvoltage relays, paralleling relays,
and reverse current relays. These components provide:
■ generator load paralleling
■ reverse current cutout
■ voltage regulation to 28.25 ±0.25V DC
■ overvoltage protection
■ under voltage protection
■ starter/generator priority
The voltage regulators (one for each generator) maintain a con-
stant level voltage output. The paralleling circuit functions when
both generators are on-line. The circuit depresses the voltage of
the high- output generator and increases that of the low-output
generator until both are equal.
If generator output exceeds 32 to 34V, the overvoltage relay
trips to take the generator off-line. Actuation of the overvoltage
relay also removes voltage from the SW terminal of the reverse-
current relay so it opens and removes the generator from the bus.
If the overvoltage condition is the result of a voltage regulator mal-
function, the overvoltage relays stops the condition. If generator
output voltage drops below bus voltage, the reverse current relay
isolates the generator from the bus to protect the generator.

September 2002
Electrical System
On aircraft BB-89 and subsequent; BL-1 and subsequent,

generator control units (GCUs) and line contactor relays regu-
late voltage to provide:
■ voltage regulation
■ line contactor relay control
■ generator load paralleling
■ differential voltage and reverse current sensing and control
■ overvoltage and overexcitation control
■ start/generator priority.
Once the engine is running, the GCU uses residual voltage to
build generator voltage to the point where it can actually regulate
output voltage. Once generator output reaches this point, the
GCU increases generator output until it reaches 28.25 ±0.25V
DC. At this point, generator output can be connected to the asso-
ciated Generator bus.
After the GEN switch is in ON, the GCU compares bus voltage
to generator output voltage. When these voltages are nearly the
same, the GCU closes the line contactor relay. Generator output
is then connected to the respective Generator bus. With both
generators on-line, the GCU equalizer relay energizes to enable
load paralleling circuits. Both GCUs compare their respective
generator’s output voltage to the opposite generator. The GCUs
then adjusts generator output voltage so both generators equal-
ly share the load within approximately 10%.
If a generator begins drawing current from the electrical system
(i.e., reverse current condition), the GCU opens the line contac-
tor relay to remove the generator from its Generator bus. Once
the reverse current condition clears, the GCU automatically
resets and the generator comes back on-line.
An overvoltage condition can occur when generator output
voltage increases to 32V DC. If this occurs, the GCU will de-
energize the generator and trip the line contactor. Once the
overvoltage condition clears, the generator must be manually
brought back on-line.
September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
External Power
An appropriately rated ground power unit (GPU) can supply the
aircraft electrical system through an external power receptacle
on the right wing. The ground power unit (GPU) should be capa-
ble of providing a continuous load of 300A at 24 to 30V DC and
1,000A for 0.1 seconds during engine start. Use of an inade-
quate GPU will cause a voltage drop below the start relay’s
drop-out voltage. This may result in relay chatter and welded
contacts. Similarly, a GPU that provides more than 350A contin-
uous load will damage the external power relay and airplane
power cables. Connecting a GPU illuminates the EXT PWR
annunciator. With external power connected, the generators will
not come on-line.
CAUTION: The output setting must not exceed 1,000A on

external power sources with a higher current-carrying
capability. Any current in excess of 1,000A may overtorque
the starter-generator driveshaft or produce heat sufficient
to shorten starter-generator life.

September 2002
Electrical System
DC Power Distribution
The DC power distribution system includes:
■ Hot Battery bus
■ Main Battery bus
■ Isolation bus
■ Left and Right Generator buses
■ Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 Dual-Fed buses
■ Nos. 1 and 2 Avionics buses
■ optional No. 3 Avionics bus.
The battery directly powers the Hot Battery bus. This bus is un-
switched (i.e., always powered) and supplies power to items that
may be operating with the battery switch OFF. With the battery
switch ON, the closed battery contacts connect the battery to
the Main Battery bus.
The primary load of the Main Battery bus is the left and right
starter/generators during engine start. It also powers the
Isolation bus. With a GPU connected to the aircraft, the Main
Battery bus is powered through the closed external power relay.
The Isolation bus serves as a connection between the Left and
Right Generator buses. High amperage current limiters between
the Isolation bus and the Generator buses isolate the battery
from a Generator bus fault.
Each of the four Dual-Fed buses receive power simultaneously
from the Left and Right Generator buses. These buses are
always powered from a combination of three sources. Typically,
these sources are both generators or a generator and/or battery.
The left and right generators power, respectively, the Nos. 1 and
2 DC Avionics buses. The AVIONICS MASTER switch and
avionics master power relays control this power. With the switch
in ON, the relays de-energize to the normally closed position to
ensure that if the switch fails, the relays provide continued
power to the avionics equipment.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
AC Electrical System
KING AIR 200

RIGHT GEN BUS
YAW RATE
(BB113 AND AFTER)
50 A 2
6 RIGHT ENGINE
V TORQUEMETER
A RIGHT ENGINE FUEL FLOW

C (PRIOR TO BB225)
B LEFT ENGINE
U TORQUEMETER
NO. 2 26V S
INV AC LEFT ENGINE FUEL FLOW
(PRIOR TO BB225)
115V AC
5A KING AIR B200

INV
CONTROL 2
RELAY 10A
6 YAW RATE
FROM NO. 2 V
DUAL-FED BUS INV
SELECT A RIGHT ENGINE 1
SWITCH C TORQUEMETER
NO. 2 INV 1
CONTROL B LEFT ENGINE
U TORQUEMETER
AC
AVIONICS 5A S
5A AND
RADAR 5A
5A
NO. 1 INV
CONTROL
FROM NO. 1
DUAL-FED BUS 10A
INV
INV SELECT
CONTROL RELAY
RELAY MODEL VARIATION
ANNUNCIATOR
5A KING AIR B200 KING AIR 200
INVERTER INST INV
115V AC
NO. 1 26 V
INV AC
TEST JACK
400
5A
390 410
110 120 420

380
100 130
50A
AC VOLTS
LEFT GEN BUS

VOLTS/FREQUENCY METER
FROM NO. 2
DUAL-FED BUS
1 BB-1097, BB-1095 AND PRIOR

October 1998
Electrical System
AC Power
Two 250VA or 750VA, 400 Hz static inverters supply 115V and
26V AC power. Each inverter operates on 28V DC. The Left
Generator bus powers the No. 1 inverter while the Right
Generator bus powers the No. 2 inverter.
Placing the INVERTER switch in the No. 1 or No. 2 position
energizes the respective inverter’s control relay. The relay clos-
es so that Generator bus powers the inverter. The INVERTER
switch also controls the inverter select relay to connect the 26V
AC buses to the selected inverter and 115V AC to the
voltage/frequency meter and inverter fail relay.
THE INVERTER or INST INV annunciator illuminates when
115V is lost at the annunciator relay.
MODEL
PC-250 PC-17A
250VA 750VA
115V ±3% 115V +5% or -7%
400 Hz ±1% 400 Hz ±1%

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Electrical Systems
Power Source Battery
Starter/Generators (2) 250A (STD)
External power unit
Distribution Hot Battery bus
Battery relay
Main Battery bus
Start Relays (left and right)
Isolation bus
Generator buses (left and right)
Dual-Fed buses (No. 1 through 4)
Avionic buses (No. 1, No. 2, and optional No. 3)
Control Switches
BATT
IGNITION AND ENGINE START (L/R)
Two-position GEN (1/2) – BB-088 and prior
Three-position GEN (1/2) – BB-089 and sub.
Monitor DC volt/loadmeter (L/R)
GEN annunciators (L/R)
EXT POWER annunciator
Battery Charge annunciator
Protection Voltage regulator
Generator paralleling
Reverse current sensing and control
Over-voltage protection
Over-excitation protection
Under-excitation protection
GPU Reverse polarity sensing
Generator buses
Isolation limiters (325A)
Current limiters
Circuit breakers
Dual-fed buses
Current limiters (60A)
Circuit breakers (50A)
Diodes (70A)
Hot Battery bus
Fuses or circuit breakers

September 2002
Electrical System
AC Electrical System
Power Source Inverters (250VA – 750VA)
Distribution Generator buses (L/R)

Inverters Nos 1 and 2
26V AC bus
115V AC avionics
Control INVERTER switch
Monitor INVERTER annunciator

Volt/Frequency meter
Protection DC to inverter: 50A current limiter

Inverter output: fuses and circuit breakers

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998
B2CRH EV 9/16/02 12:54 PM Page 1
Environmental Systems
Bleed Air Warning System
ENVIRONMENTAL
MIXING PLENUM
L BLEED AIR FAIL R BLEED AIR FAIL
ENGINE
BLEED AIR
AMBIENT
AIR
BLEED AIR ENVIRONMENT
FLOW WARNING BLEED AIR
CONTROL SWITCHES SHUTOFF
UNIT VALVE (N.C.)
AFT FIREWALL
PNEUMATIC
BLEED AIR
PLUGS SHUTOFF
AIR INLET VALVE (N.O.)
AIR-TO-AIR
HEAT EXCHANGER
18
PSI
CABIN HEAT LEFT BLEED AIR RIGHT BLEED AIR
CONTROL WARNING LINE WARNING LINE
VALVE (POLY FLOW TUBING) (POLY FLOW TUBING)
BLEED AIR WARNING LINE

PRESSURIZATION BLEED AIR
PNEUMATIC BLEED AIR
AMBIENT
COOLED BLEED AIR

October 1998
B2CRH EV 9/16/02 12:54 PM Page 2
CAE SimuFlite
Pressurization System
STATIC AIR
MOISTURE
DRAIN OUTFLOW
VALVE
FILTER
N.O.
PRESET
SOLENOID N.C.
DUMP
SOLENOID SAFETY
VALVE
TO N
VACUUM O
SOURCE 1
RATE ALTITUDE
D
CABIN PRESSURE U
UP PRESS A
CONTROL SWITCH
L.G. CTRL L
SAFETY DUMP
SWITCH PRESS F
DOWN 5A E CABIN
D
TEST AIR INPUT
B
U
RAM AIR S
DOOR LATCH
4 PSI
TO STATIC
DOOR PRESS
IN SUCTION
SEAL
CABIN AIR
N.O. MIXED CABIN AND SUCTION
SOLENOID
ENVIRONMENTAL BLEED AIR

October 1998
Pneumatic System FROM NO. 1 FROM NO. 2 RIGHT P 3

TO DOOR SEAL DUAL-FED BUS DUAL-FED BUS INSTRUMENT AIR
RIGHT BRAKE
DEICE MANIFOLD
SINGLE N.
CYCLE RUDDER
BOOST
O. INSTRUMENT AIR VALVE
5A
OFF
5A
N. C. RIGHT BRAKE DEICE VALVE BRAKE
MANUAL
TO DEICE
OFF
WING DEICE TIMER SWITCH
DISTRIBUTOR 10 MIN
BOOTS BLEED AIR VALVES TIME DELAY
VALVE N
OPEN PCB
5A LEFT RIGHT O
FROM NO. 1 1
DUAL-FED BUS BRAKE DEICE ON
D
ENVIR U
5A OFF A
FROM NO. 2 INSTR & ENVIR OFF L
DUAL-FED BUS
F
5A E
D
LH MLG B
UPLOCK U
S
R BL AIR FAIL SWITCH
PNEUMATIC
PRESSURE FROM NO. 2 RIGHT RUDDER RUDDER
GAGE 5A DUAL-FED BUS BOOST SERVO
N. C.
10
18 PSI 15 PSI
0 20 PRESSURE PRESSURE
PNEUMATIC
PRESSURE
REG REG
SUCTION FILTER N. C.
GAGE 5A FROM NO. 1
DUAL-FED BUS
4
4 PSI
3 6
REG
AIR LEAK
GYRO
SUCTION
INCHES OF MERCURY LEFT RUDDER
COPILOT'S N. P SWITCH BOOST SERVO
COPILOT'S O.
ATTITUDE TURN & SLIP AFT
INDICATOR INDICATOR TO PRESSURE
L BL AIR FAIL
DOOR BULKHEAD
L R SEAL UNREGULATED
VACUUM
REGULATOR 10 10
REGULATED
20 20
AIR
FLIGHT
VACUUM
VACUUM HOURS 1/10
FLT HOUR
AIR FILTER N.C. 045 62 METER
CABIN 1000
ALT
FT
DUMP
6 7 8
9 SOLENOID N. C. LEFT BRAKE DEICE VALVE
5
30
25
10
4
TO OUTFLOW
3
TO DUMP VALVE
19 21 2
35
11
ACFT ALT
3
100 FT
VALVE RATE CABIN

2
13
17
ALT
15
1
N.O.
15
N. INSTRUMENT AIR VALVE

0
M M
I A
PRESET
N X
O. LEFT BRAKE
PRESSURIZATION SOLENOID
DEICE MANIFOLD
CONTROLLER LEFT P 3
CABIN
AIR FILTER INSTRUMENT AIR

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998
Air Conditioning System
N
47 PSI COMPRESSOR N1 SENSOR 10 SEC O
PRESSURE UNDER PRESSURE/ SWITCH TIME DELAY AUTOMATIC
FROM TEMP
SWITCH OVER PRESSURE 60% N1, FOR 200 DEACTIVATION CONTROLLER 7.5A 1
INPUT SWITCH 62% N1, FOR B200 TO REACTIVATION
D
U
COMPRESSOR A
CABIN
COMPRESSOR HEAT CONTROL L
CLUTCH VALVE
POSITION F
SWITCH E
D
B
U
S
50°F OAT/47 PSI

PRESSURE UNDER OVER
SWITCH INPUT PRESSURE PRESSURE
SWITCH SWITCH
VENT AFT
BLOWER EVAPORATOR SUCTION GASEOUS FREON
BYPASS VALVE
SENSE SWITCH (33°F) PRESSURE GASEOUS FREON
PRESSURE LIQUID FREON
CONDENSER FWD
OUT
EVAPORATOR
IN
OUT
IN
EXPANSION VALVE
EXPANSION VALVE TEMPERATURE BULB
TEMPERATURE BULB
AFT VENT
BLOWER
CONDENSER
BLOWER FWD EXPANSION EXPANSION
BULKHEAD VALVE VALVE
BY-PASS
RECEIVER VALVE
DRYER

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998
Air Distribution System AMBIENT AIR

REFRIGERANT MODULATING
COMPRESSOR VALVE
PNEUMATIC FLOW CONTROL

THERMOSTAT UNIT
SIDE
ENVIRONMENTAL VIEW
BLEED AIR 1 DOOR FWD
SHUTOFF VALVE (N.C.)
PNEUMATIC/ FLOOR DUCT AFT
INSTRUMENT AIR FLOOR
SHUTOFF
VALVE (N.O.) AIR CONDITIONED
AIR FROM AFT CEILING
AIR TO AIR EVAPORATOR OUTLETS
FIREWALL HEAT
FWD EVAPORATOR EXCHANGER
MIXING PLENUM CABIN - HEAT

AIR CONTROL
INLET 1 DOOR (COOLED
CEILING DUCT/ DUCT VALVE AIR TO FLOOR
VENT BLOWER FLOOR DUCT OVERTEMP OUTLETS) NORMAL
DIVIDER DUCT SENSOR FLAPPER OUTFLOW VALVE
MUFFLER
FRESH AIR VALVE SENSOR VALVES
(CLOSED WHEN SAFETY/DUMP
PRESSURIZED) VALVE
RAM AIR SCOOP
CONDENSER
RECEIVER DRYER AFT PRESSURE
OUTLET BULKHEAD
CONDENSER BLOWER CABIN
AIR
AIR CONTROL
VALVE AFT EVAPORATOR
FLOOR OUTLET
FWD PRESSURE AIR INLET SCOOP AFT EVAPORATOR
BLOWER CEILING OUTLET
BULKHEAD
ENVIRONMENTAL
CREW HEAT DUCT BLEED AIR CABIN-HEAT
SHUTOFF VALVE (N.C.) CONTROL
VALVE AND 30° HOT ENGINE BLEED AIR
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER
(ON GLARESHIELD) PNEUMATIC POSITION SWITCH
COOLED BLEED AIR
THERMOSTAT
AIR-TO-AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER ENVIRONMENTAL BLEED AIR
RECIRCULATED CABIN AIR
(AIR-CONDITIONED WHEN
EVAPORATOR IS ON)
AMBIENT AIR
PNEUMATIC/ PRESSURE VESSEL

AMBIENT AIR INSTRUMENT AIR
MODULATING SHUTOFF
VALVE FIREWALL VALVE (N.O.)

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998
Air Distribution System

BB-1439, 1444 and subsequent;
BT-35 and subsequent FIREWALL AMBIENT AIR
MODULATING
R BLEED AIR FLOW

CONTROL VALVE
PNEUMATIC BLEED
AIR SHUTOFF VALVE (N.O.)
RIGHT BLEED AIR

SHUTOFF VALVE (N.C.)
AIRDUCT FORWARD CABIN HEAT

TEMP SENSE ELECT CONTROL VALVE
ELEMENT HEATER AFT AFT
FORWARD ELECT OVERHEAT
FORWARD VENT HEATER SENSOR
BLOWER OVERHEAT
FORWARD SENSOR DUCT OVERTEMP CHECK CABIN TEMP
EVAPORATOR SENSE SWITCH VALVES CONTROL
FRESH AIR VALVE
(CLOSED WHEN
PRESSURIZED)
RAM AIR SCOOP
PRESSURE
BULKHEAD
CONDENSER
RECEIVER DRYER
OUTLET
CONDENSER BLOWER AIR
AFT VENT AFT EVAPORATOR

FWD PRESSURE AMBIENT AIR BLOWER
BULKHEAD AIR INLET
SHUTOFF VALVE SCOOP
CABIN HEAT ELECTRONIC MODULE BOX
LEFT BLEED AIR CONTROL VALVE ELEC HEAT CONT
FLOW CONTROL VALVE FIREWALL 30° POSITION AIR CONDITIONING CONT
SWITCH
AIR-TO-AIR
HEAT EXCHANGER AMBIENT AIR
COOLED AIR
BLEED AIR
SHUTOFF
VALVE (N.C.) HEATED AIR
THERMISTER LEFT ENGINE P3 AMBIENT AIR PNEUMATIC BLEED

AMBIENT BLEED AIR MODULATING AIR SHUTOFF VALVE (N.O.)
AIR VALVE

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998
This environmental section includes the following systems:
■ bleed air supply (pneumatic system)
■ heating system
■ air conditioning system
■ pressurization system
Bleed Air Supply

The bleed air system extracts bleed air from the engine’s com-
pressor section (P3) and transfers it to various aircraft systems.
The pneumatic side of the supply is for surface deice, rudder
boost, brake deice, and door seal. In addition, a venturi-ejector
in the system creates a vacuum source for the air-driven gyros,
pressurization control, and deflation of the deice boots. The
environmental supply is for air conditioning and pressurization.
A pair of BLEED AIR VALVES switches controls bleed air sup-
ply. With the switches in the OPEN position, both the ENVIR and
INSTR shutoff valves open to supply engine bleed air. Placing
the switches in ENVIR OFF stops bleed air flow to the environ-
mental system (air conditioning and pressurization) by closing
the environmental shutoff valve. Placing the switches in INSTR
& ENVIR OFF stops bleed air flow completely by closing both
environmental and pneumatic shutoff valves for the selected
side. The ENVIR valve is a normally closed valve while the
INSTR valve is a normally open valve.
The pneumatic instrument bleed air flows from the shutoff valve
to a tee-fitting where the left and right engine bleed air supplies
combine. Check valves in each supply line prevent reverse
bleed air flow when an engine is not operating. The combined
bleed air supply then flows through a 18 PSI pressure regulator.
Bleed air from the 18 PSI regulator produces the vacuum.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
The environmental system bleed air supply flows through a flow

control unit (FCU). Based on atmospheric pressure and tem-
perature, the FCU maintains the required bleed air flow by mix-
ing bleed and ambient air in an ejector.
On BB-2 to 1179; BL-1 to 69, with weight-on-wheels, the ambi-
ent air modulating valve closes so that only bleed air flows
through the FCU to ensure rapid cabin warmup during low ambi-
ent temperature operating conditions.
Once airborne, the modulating valve opens to admit ambient air
into the FCU. To prevent a pressure surge caused by simulta-
neously opening of the left and right modulating valves, a time
delay circuit delays right valve opening for six seconds. As ambi-
ent temperature decreases, the flow control valve gradually
closes the modulating valve until at approximately -30°F ambi-
ent air flow ceases.
On BB-1180 and subsequent; BL-70 and subsequent; earli-
er aircraft with Kit 101-5065-1 S, placing the BLEED AIR
SWITCHES in OPEN energizes the flow control unit’s (FCU)
electronic controller. The controller closes the bleed air modu-
lating valve and opens the firewall shutoff valve so bleed air
flows through the FCU. After the modulating valve closes com-
pletely, it slowly cycles open to provide the desired bleed air
flow. With weight-on-wheels the ambient air modulating valve
remains closed and only bleed air flows through the FCU.
Once airborne, the ambient air modulating valve opens to admit
ambient air into the FCU. As aircraft altitude increases or ambi-
ent air temperature decreases, the controller drives the ambient
air modulating valve toward the closed position until at approxi-
mately -30°F, the valve closes completely. The FCU’s bleed air
bypass valve opens to increase bleed air flow.

October 1998
Heating and Air Conditioning

The air conditioning system provides conditioned air to the cabin
and cockpit. In addition, the right engine drives a freon system
for cooling. During unpressurized flight, a ram air scoop pro-
vides fresh air ventilation.
At maximum takeoff power, bleed air from the engine compres-
sor section flows to the environmental flow control unit (FCU) at
approximately 650°F and 120 PSI. The FCU directs the regulat-
ed and mixed bleed air to the cabin-heat control valve, which
determines the amount of air that passes through the air-to-air
heat exchanger. As the valve closes, more of the air mass pass-
es through the exchanger to decrease the temperature of the air
directed to the cabin.
With the CABIN TEMP MODE selector in AUTO, the heating
and air conditioning systems operate automatically as the
CABIN TEMP knob modulates the cabin heat control valve to
maintain the proper temperature.. A temperature-sensing unit in
the cabin along with the requested setting initiates a heat or cool
command to the temperature controller. A duct anticipator tem-
perature probe provides for constant temperature control.
Selecting a warmer cabin (toward INCR) signals the automatic
temperature control to modulate the cabin heat control valves
one at a time to allow bleed air to bypass the heat exchangers.
Selecting a cooler cabin (toward DECR) signals the cabin heat
control valves to pass bleed air through the air-to-air heat
exchanger. If necessary, the freon air conditioning system is
activated to reach the desired temperature.
When the evaporative-type freon air conditioning system is
necessary, high pressure high temperature freon gas flows to
a condenser coil where it is cooled to a liquid. The condensed
liquid then flows through a receiver/dryer before being metered
to flow through an evaporator to be cooled.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
With the CABIN TEMP MODE selector in MAN HEAT or MAN

COOL , manual control of the cabin temperature can be made
with the MANUAL TEMP switch. Momentarily holding the MAN-
UAL TEMP spring-loaded center return switch to INCR (hot) or
DECR (cold) modulates the cabin heat control valves. Only one
valve moves at a time. Allow approximately 30 seconds per
valve (one minute total) for the valves to move to the full heat or
full cold position. Cool air comes out of the overheat vents while
the majority of warm air comes out of the floor vents. MAN
COOL directs the air conditioner system to operate if the right
engine speed is above 60% (200) to 62% (B200) N1.
High and low pressure switches protect the air conditioning sys-
tem. If a refrigerant over or under pressure condition occurs,
the appropriate pressure switch actuates. Switch actuation that
cuts power to the compressor clutch. The system also has
temperature protection to prevent evaporator freezing. If evapo-
rator temperature falls to approximately 33°F, the thermal switch
actuates a bypass valve that routes hot refrigerant past the sys-
tem’s expansion valve.
Supplemental Heating
Optional radiant heating panels provide increased heating. The
RADIANT HEAT switch controls the radiant heat panels usually
located above the cabin windows and on the cargo door.
Depending on the installation, thermal fuses or thermostats pro-
vide overheat protection for the panels.
On aircraft BB-1439, 1444 and subsequent; BL-139 and sub-
sequent, an optional electric heating system warms the cabin
during ground operations. With weight-on-wheels, place the
CABIN TEMP MODE in MAN HEAT and the ELEC HEAT and
AFT BLOWER switches on. When the electric heat system is
turned on, the ELEC HEAT ON annunciator must extinguish
before turning the AFT BLOWER switch off. If duct temperature
reaches 118°F (48°C), overheat sensors shut the system down
by de-energizing heater power relays and control switch.

October 1998
Pressurization
The pressurization system controls cabin altitude, climb rate,
and descent rate by operating outflow valves that vent condi-
tioned air to the atmosphere.
The pressurization controller regulates the outflow valve open-
ing to maintain the desired cabin rate-of-change during climb
and descent and cabin pressure altitude during cruise. If a neg-
ative cabin pressure differential occurs, a negative pressure
relief diaphragm opens to allow ambient air inflow into the cabin.
This prevents cabin altitude being lower than aircraft altitude.
Aircraft with PT6-41 engines have a 6.1 PSI maximum cabin
pressure differential while aircraft with PT6A-42 engines have a
6.6 PSI maximum cabin pressure differential. The pressurization
system maintains approximately a 10,000 ft cabin altitude at
31,000 (PT6A-41) or 35,000 ft pressure altitude (PT6A-42). If
the system malfunctions and cabin pressure differential exceeds
the system’s maximum value, a safety valve dumps excess
pressure to atmosphere. Place the CABIN PRESS switch in
DUMP to releases cabin pressure regardless of weight-on-
wheels status.
Placing the CABIN PRESS switch in TEST bypassing the land-
ing gear squat switch to test the system, which enables the
aircraft to be pressurized on the ground.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
Air Conditioning/Heating System
Power Source Engine bleed air – heating
Right engine – Freon system
Distribution Engine compressor bleed air

Environmental control unit
Cabin
Cockpit
Control Switches
BLEED AIR VALVES
MANUAL TEMP
VENT BLOWER
AFT BLOWER
RADIANT HEAT (prior to BB 1439)
ELEC HEAT (BB 1439 and subsequent)
CABIN TEMP MODE selector
CABIN TEMP control selector
Right engine RPM above 60%
Monitor CABIN AIR gage

Thermostat
AIR CND1 LOW annunciator
Protection High and low pressure switches

N1 speed switch
47 PSI pressure switch

October 1998
Bleed Air System

Power Source Bleed air (each engine – station P3)
Distribution Prior to 18 PSI regulator

Brake deice
Rudder boost P switch
After 18 PSI regulator
Bleed air warning system
Rudder boost servos
Flight hour meter
Door seal (if installed)
Vacuum
Deice boots
Control BLEED AIR VALVE switches
Monitor PNEUMATIC PRESSURE gage

GYRO SUCTION gage
Protection BL AIR FAIL annunciators

Bleed air shutoff valves
Relief valves
Check valves

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
Pressurization System
Power Source Bleed air (each engine – station P3)
Distribution Flow control unit

Air-to-air heat exchangers
Cockpit
Cabin
Control Switches
BLEED AIR VALVES
CABIN PRESS
Pressurization controller
Monitor Cabin altitude and differential pressure gage

Cabin VSI
Protection BL AIR FAIL annunciators

Bleed air shutoff valves
CABIN ALT annunciator
Squat switch
Outflow/safety valves (negative/maximum
differential relief)
Passenger oxygen mask auto deployment
system

October 1998
B2CRH FR 9/16/02 1:10 PM Page 1
Fire Protection
Fire Detection System
Prior to BB-1439
PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS
MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER

WARNING CAUTION CAUTION WARNING
TO RESET TO RESET TO RESET TO RESET
1
L ENG FIRE INVERTER CABIN DOOR ALT WARN R ENG FIRE
L FUEL PRESS R FUEL PRESS
BRT
L OIL PRESS L GEN OVHT AP TRIM FAIL R GEN OVHT R OIL PRESS
APPROACH L CHIP R CHIP
PLATE L BL AIR FAIL AP DISC R BL AIR FAIL PRESS
DETECT DETECT TO TEST
2 FIRE DETECTION CB
1 ANNUNCIATOR
PANEL
3 TEST SWITCH
FIRE DETECTORS
CONTROL
AMPLIFIERS
FIRE
DETECTORS
2 FIRE LEFT LEFT 3

5 5 7.5 3
DET
2
ICE FUEL
VANE CONTROL 1
CONTROL HEAT
5 7.5
OFF
RIGHT RIGHT TEST SWITCH
FIRE DET & FIRE EXT

October 1998
B2CRH FR 9/16/02 1:10 PM Page 2
CAE SimuFlite
Fire Detection System

BT-35 and subsequent;
BL-139 and subsequent
FIRE SENSOR
ELEMENT
PRINTED
CIRCUIT
CARDS
FIRE SENSOR
ELEMENT
SENSOR RESPONDER
1 SIMPLIFIED CIRCUIT
RESPONDER
28 V DC ALARM
SWITCH (N.O.)
TEST SWITCH
B
C
D SENSOR
ELEMENT
LEFT OR RIGHT
ENGINE INTEGRITY SWITCH
N.C. HELD CLOSED BY
NORMAL SENSOR PRESSURE

October 1998
Fire Protection
Fire Extinguishing System

PRESS PRESS PRESS PRESS
L ENG FIRE R ENG FIRE
PUSH TO EXT PUSH TO EXT MASTER
MASTER MASTER MASTER
WARNING CAUTION CAUTION WARNING
D OK D OK
TO RESET TO RESET TO RESET TO RESET
1
L ENG FIRE INVERTER CABIN DOOR ALT WARN R ENG FIRE
L FUEL PRESS R FUEL PRESS
BRT
L OIL PRESS L GEN OVHT AP TRIM FAIL R GEN OVHT R OIL PRESS
APPROACH L CHIP R CHIP PRESS

PLATE DETECT L BL AIR FAIL AP DISC R BL AIR FAIL DETECT TO TEST
2 TEST
SWITCH
1 ANNUNCIATOR
PANEL
3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER
SUPPLY CYLINDER
LEFT
MONITOR
MODULE
RIGHT
MONITOR
MODULE
PRESSURE
GAGE
2
LEFT
3
EXT
2
RIGHT
1
EXPLOSIVE
SQUIB
OFF
TEST SWITCH 3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER
FIRE DET & FIRE EXT SUPPLY CYLINDER

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998
Fire Protection
Fire Protection Systems

Fire protection systems include:
■ engine fire detection
■ engine fire extinguishing
■ bleed air warning.
Engine Fire Detection

Engine fire detection consists of either infrared sensitive photo-
cells or temperature sensing elements. With either system, an
engine fire illuminates the respective ENG FIRE or FIRE ENG
light on the glareshield panel.
On S/Ns BB-2 to 1438; BB-1440 to 1443; BL-1 to 138, the
detection system consists of three photo-cells strategically
placed in each engine compartment. When sufficient infrared
radiation strikes a cell, a control amplifier relay closes to illumi-
nate the respective ENG FIRE or FIRE ENG light and the MAS-
TER WARNING flashing lights. Once the fire extinguishes and
infrared radiation decreases below a set level, the system
resets and the FIRE light extinguishes.
On S/Ns BB-1439; BB-1444 and subsequent; BL-130 and
subsequent, each engine’s temperature sensing element con-
sists of a sealed stainless steel tube. Within this tube is an inert
gas and an inner core with an active gas. The sensing element
connects to a responder that contains an alarm switch for
detection and and integrity switch for testing.
Exposing a sensing element to temperatures of 450°F (232°C)
along its entire length or 900°F (482°C) along a one-foot section
expands the element’s core gases. This closes the responder
alarm switch to illuminate the respective ENG FIRE light and
trigger the MASTER WARNING flashing lights. Once the sens-
ing element cools below its trigger temperature, the ENG FIRE
light extinguishes. The MASTER WARNING lights, however, do
not extinguish until they are reset.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
Engine Fire Extinguishing

If installed, the engine fire extinguishing system consists of a fire
extinguisher bottle in each main wheel well. Spray nozzles con-
nected to each bottle direct fire extinguishing agent to the engine
accessory section and power sections. Each bottle contains
approximately 2.5 lbs of Halon 1301 pressurized with dry nitrogen
to 450 PSI at 60°F (pressurization is directly proportional to OAT).
The fire detection system illuminates the ENG FIRE PUSH
TO EXT light. Pressing that light supplies DC power to the
extinguisher bottle’s explosive squib. The squib’s detonation
dislodges a sealing disc so that bottle contents flow to the spray
nozzles. Once a bottle discharges, the respective D or DISCH
caption illuminates.
Testing
Aircraft with a photo-cell detection system have a rotary TEST
SWITCH with six positions: L and R EXT on left side of switch;
3, 2, 1 on right side of switch, and OFF. Aircraft with sensing
elements have a switch labeled TEST SWITCH FIRE DET &
EXT with positions of EXT L-R and DET L-R (BB-1439, BB-144
to 1462) or a switch labeled TEST SWITCH ENG FIRE SYS
with OFF, EXT L-R and DET L-R positions (BB-1463 and sub-
sequent; BL-139 and subsequent). Aircraft without extin-
guishing systems eliminate the EXT labels on the switches.
Rotating the TEST switch through positions 3, 2, and 1 or DET
L-R illuminates the left and right red MASTER WARNING flash-
ers, the red L and R ENG FIRE annunciators, and the red L and
R ENG FIRE PUSH TO EXT lights (if installed). If any of the fire
detection annunciators fail to illuminate at each test position, a
malfunction exists in the detector circuits.
Rotating the switch to the L/R EXT or EXT L-R positions tests
the fire extinguishing system. Illumination of the ENG FIRE
light’s D (DISCH) caption indicates the bulb is functioning; illu-
mination of the OK caption indicates detector circuitry and
squib-firing circuits are operational.

October 1998
Fire Protection
Engine Bleed Air Warning

Polyflow tubing that parallels the bleed air lines from the firewall
into the cabin provides a warning system for a bleed air leak.
These parallel tubing lines are pressurized with instrument
bleed air at approximately 18 PSI.
If a bleed air line ruptures, excessive heat (200°F) melts the
adjacent tubing to release pressure. When pressure is reduced,
a switch in the line under the copilot floor closes to illuminate
the respective BL AIR FAIL annunciator.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
Fire Protection System

Power Source No. 1 Dual-Fed bus – fire detection
Hot Battery bus – optional fire extinguishing
Portable hand fire extinguishers
Distribution Extinguisher bottle to corresponding engine

(no crossfiring)
Control TEST SWITCH FIRE DET (& EXT, if installed)

ENG FIRE-PUSH TO EXT (L/R) lens/switch
(if installed)
Monitor ENG FIRE (L/R) annunciators

Red ENG FIRE-PUSH TO EXT (L/R) lens
(if installed)
Amber D lens to confirm electrical wiring
continuity (if installed)
Green OK lens to test system (if installed)
MASTER WARNING (L/R) flashers
Protection FIRE DET CB (5A)

FIRE extinguisher fuse (if installed)
(prior to BB-1096)
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CB (5A) (if installed)
(BB-1096 and subsequent)

September 2002
B2CRH FC 9/16/02 1:05 PM Page 1
Flight Controls
Rudder Boost System
RUDDER RUDDER
BOOST BOOST
FROM NO. 2
DUAL-FED BUS 5A
OFF
BLEED AIR VALVES
FROM NO. 1 OPEN
DUAL-FED BUS 5A LEFT RIGHT
FROM NO. 2 ENVIR

DUAL-FED BUS 5A OFF
INSTR & ENVIR OFF
P SWITCH
(65 ± 5 PSI DIFFERENTIAL)
18 PSI
P3 PNEUMATIC P3
AIR PRESSURE AIR
N.O. LEFT CHECK REGULATOR CHECK N.O. RIGHT
INSTRUMENT VALVE VALVE INSTRUMENT
AIR VALVE AIR VALVE
AFT
PRESSURE
BULKHEAD
15 PSI
PRESSURE FILTER
REGULATOR
LEFT RIGHT
RUDDER RUDDER
SERVO SERVO
N.C. N.C.
TO LEFT REGULATED BLEED AIR TO RIGHT

RUDDER RUDDER
CABLE UNREGULATED P3 AIR CABLE
King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 4E-1

October 1998
B2CRH FC 9/16/02 1:05 PM Page 2
CAE SimuFlite
Flap System
N
O FLAP
MOTOR
3
D 20A
U
A
L FLAP
CONTROL
F POSITION
FLAP POSITION POSITION
E TRANSMITTER INDICATOR
5A
D
B
U
S
SPLIT FLAP PROTECTION
POSITION TRANSMITTER
LIMIT SWITCHES
FLAP
ACTUATORS
RH
SPLIT
FLAP D
PROTECTION FW
LH FLAP
MOTOR
FLEXIBLE DRIVES
LIMIT SWITCHES
UP
FLAP FLAP
SELECTOR APPROACH DYNAMIC
HANDLE BRAKE
RELAY
DOWN
STALL FLAP
LIFT WARNING MOTOR
COMPUTER BIAS
RELAYS
4E-2 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

October 1998
Flight Controls
Flight Controls
Primary flight controls include the ailerons, elevators, and rud-
der. These control the aircraft through the pitch, roll, and yaw
axes. Each of the primary flight controls has a mechanically
operated trim system; the elevator trim system also has an
electrically operated trim system. The flap system is the only
secondary flight control system.
Related flight systems include the stall warning, rudder boost,
and yaw damper systems.
Primary Flight Controls

Ailerons on the outboard trailing edge of each wing provide roll
control mechanically through the control wheel or electrically
through the autopilot servo. Rotating the control wheel left or
right from neutral mechanically actuates the ailerons through a
system of cables and bellcranks. Mechanical stops on the
ailerons limit total movement to approximately 25° up and 15°
down from neutral. The autopilot also actuates the ailerons
through a servo connected to the aileron control circuit’s cables.
A trim tab on the left aileron provides lateral trim capability.
Rotating the AILERON TAB knob left or right from the neutral or
“0” position mechanically drives the trim tab up or down respec-
tively. Toward RIGHT drives the tab up for a left wing up move-
ment; movement toward LEFT produces the opposite effect.
The elevators on the trailing edge of the T-tail horizontal stabi-
lizer provide pitch control. Pushing the control column fore and
aft from neutral mechanically deflects the elevators down and up
through cables and bellcranks. Stops limit total elevator move-
ment to approximately 20° up and 14° down from neutral. An
autopilot servo connected to the control cables also operates
the elevators.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
A mechanically or electrically operated pitch trim system drives

the elevator trim tabs to reduce elevator control forces and trim
the aircraft in the longitudinal axis. Rotating the ELEVATOR
TAB wheel forward or aft from neutral mechanically drives the
trim tab actuators. The jack-screw type actuators then extend
or retract to move the elevator trim tabs in the necessary direc-
tion to pitch the nose up or down. With the ELEV TRIM switch
in the ON position, the electric pitch trim system is activate.
Actuating a set of TRIM switches toward the NOSE UP or
NOSE DN position drives powers the electric trim tab actuator.
The actuator’s clutch then engages to connect the motor to the
cable drum. The motor then operates the trim tab actuators
through cables.
A bi-level, pushbutton, momentary-on trim disconnect switch is
inboard of the dual-element thumb switch on the outboard grip of
each control wheel. If an autopilot is installed, pressing the switch
to the first level disconnects the autopilot and yaw damper sys-
tem. Pressing the switch to the second level additionally discon-
nects the electric elevator-trim system. If no autopilot is installed,
pressing the switch to the first level has no effect. The second
level disconnects the elevator-trim system.
The rudder provides directional control of the aircraft about the
vertical axis. A direct connect cable system from both sets of
rudder pedals to the tail section drives the rudder. Deflecting a
set of rudder pedals from neutral mechanically deflects the rud-
der to produce a yaw movement. Total rudder movement is
approximately 25° left or right from neutral.
Rotating the RUDDER TAB wheel left or right from neutral
mechanically moves the rudder trim tab to reduce rudder pedal
control forces. Total tab deflection is approximately 15° left or
right from neutral.

June 2000
Flight Controls
Rudder Boost and Yaw Damper

A rudder boost system pneumatically positions the rudder to
compensate for asymmetric engine power differences. With the
RUDDER BOOST switch in ON, the BLEED AIR VALVES
switches in OPEN or ENVIR OFF, and engine bleed air avail-
able, the rudder boost system is active.
If engine power difference increases (i.e., failed engine), a dif-
ferential pressure switch (∆P) moves toward the low pressure
side. Once pressure differential reaches approximately 60 ±4
PSI, the switch opens the opposite side’s shutoff valve. The
shutoff valve then supplies bleed air to the rudder servo to drive
the rudder toward the engine producing more power.
With the BLEED AIR VALVE switch(es) in INST & ENVIR OFF
the rudder boost relay interrupts pressure differential switch
power supply to disengage the rudder boost system.
On aircraft without an autopilot, the rudder boost system also
provides a yaw damping function. Bleed air passes through a
10 PSI pressure regulator before reaching a solenoid control
valve and yaw control valve. With the YAW DAMP switch in ON
and weight-off-wheels, the system’s yaw sensor, amplifier, and
control valve generate rudder inputs with the rudder boost ser-
vos to counteract aircraft yaw.
On aircraft with an autopilot, the yaw damping function is part
of the autopilot. The yaw sensor, amplifier, control valve and
related equipment are not present.

June 2000
CAE SimuFlite
Flaps
Each wing contains two flaps on the trailing edge inboard of the
ailerons. With flaps extended, stall speed decreases.
Selection of a flap position on the FLAP handle controls travel
of the flaps by powering flap motor through limit switches and
the flap motor relay. The flap motor drives a gearbox connect-
ed to four flexible driveshafts that, in turn, connect to jackscrew
actuators at each flaps. To prevent overtravel, the flap motor
has a dynamic braking system of two sets of motor windings.
Limit switches interrupt power to the flap motor when the
desired position is reached. On aircraft BB-2 to 187, roller type
microswitches limit flap travel. On aircraft BB-188 and subse-
quent; aircraft with SI-1121-II, open-cam type microswitches
provide greater reliability in limiting flap travel.
A safety mechanism interrupts power if a split flap situation
occurs. On aircraft BB-2 to 424 this system cuts power by
pulling one of the flap motor fuses. On aircraft BB-425 and
subsequent; BL-1 and subsequent, flap asymmetry operates
a flap safety switch.
The landing gear warning system provides an aural and visual
warning of improper flight configurations. With the FLAP handle
in UP, APPROACH, or DOWN, retarding the power levers below
about 79% N1 RPM setting with the landing gear retracted
sounds the gear warning horn and flashes the landing gear lever
light. With the FLAP handle in UP or APPROACH, pressing the
horn silence button stops the horn. Advancing the power levers
or extending the landing gear cancels the warning completely.
With flaps down, the horn cannot be silenced by advancing the
power levers or by pressing the horn silence button.

October 1998
Flight Controls
Stall Warning System

The stall warning system provides an audible warning to notify
the crew of an impending stall.
With weight-off-wheels, an electrically heated lift transducer
measures the aircraft’s angle-of-attack (AOA). The system’s lift
computer then processes the transducer’s inputs and modifies
it based on flap setting. The lift computer adjusts the stall warn-
ing limits to the following:
■ 5 to 13 kts above stall with flaps retracted (UP)
■ 5 to 12 kts above stall with APPROACH flaps
■ 8 to 14 kts above stall with flaps extended fully (DOWN).
If a stall is imminent, the lift transducer triggers the warning
horn sounds.
With weight-on-wheels, placing the STALL WARN TEST switch
in the test position magnetically deflects the lift transducer to
the pre-stall position. If the system is working normally, the stall
warning horn sounds.
NOTE: Stall Warning system may be unreliable during

operations in icing conditions with accumulation of ice on
airframe surfaces.

June 2000
CAE SimuFlite
Flight Controls
Flap System
Power Source No. 3 Dual-Fed bus – electric motor/control
Control FLAP handle
Monitor FLAP indicator
Protection Circuit breakers

FLAP CONTROL (5A)
FLAP MOTOR (20A)
Split flap protection
Limit switches

June 2000
B2CRH FU 9/16/02 1:17 PM Page 1
Fuel System
Auxiliary Fuel Transfer System
Before Engine Start – No Transfer
N
O
3
O
R
AUX
TRANS 4
D
5A U
A
L
F
E
AUX TRANSFER D
SWITCH MOTIVE FLOW
PRESSURE B
OVERRIDE SWITCH U
AUX TANK 5-7 PSI NO S
FLOAT SWITCH TRANSFER
LIGHT
AUTO NOT EMPTY
PRE
T
ES
EMPTY S
S TO T
AUXILIARY
TRANSFER
CONTROL AND
TIMER TRANSFER
(P.C.B) JET PUMP
AUXILIARY
FLOAT SWITCH TANK
MOTIVE FLOW
N.C. VALVE
AUX RETURN
HOT BAT BUS LINE
(NACELLE
OVERFLOW)
5A 5A
FUEL PRESSURE 1
SWITCH
STRAINER
FROM 5A 10A
CROSSFEED PRESS STBY FROM
SWITCH WARN PUMP WING
FUEL PRESS SW TANK
WARN
TO NACELLE TANK
ENGINE NO. 3 OR 4 ENGINE-DRIVEN
DUAL-FED BUS BOOST PUMP
FUEL UNDER PRESSURE
STATIC PRESSURE
FUEL IN STORAGE
King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 4F-1

September 2002
B2CRH FU 9/16/02 1:17 PM Page 2
CAE SimuFlite
Auxiliary Fuel Transfer System

After Engine Start – Fuel Transferring
N
O
3
O
R
AUX
TRANS 4
D
5A U
A
L
F
E
AUX TRANSFER D
SWITCH MOTIVE FLOW
PRESSURE B
OVERRIDE SWITCH U
AUX TANK 5-7 PSI NO S
FLOAT SWITCH TRANSFER
LIGHT
AUTO NOT EMPTY PRE
T
ES
EMPTY S
S TO T
AUXILIARY
TRANSFER
CONTROL AND
TIMER TRANSFER
(P.C.B) JET PUMP
AUXILIARY
FLOAT SWITCH TANK
MOTIVE FLOW
N.C. VALVE
HOT BAT BUS
5A 5A
FUEL PRESSURE 1
SWITCH
FROM STRAINER
CROSSFEED 5A 10A
SWITCH PRESS STBY TO
WARN PUMP WING
FUEL PRESS SW TANK
WARN
TO NACELLE TANK
ENGINE NO. 3 OR 4 ENGINE-DRIVEN
DUAL-FED BUS BOOST PUMP
FUEL UNDER PRESSURE

STATIC PRESSURE
JET PUMP PRESSURE
FUEL IN STORAGE
4F-2 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

September 2002
Fuel System
Fuel System
King Air 200
FROM NOZZLE
MANIFOLD
FLOAT SWITCH
FUEL DRAIN 6 8
COLLECTOR TANK 4 FUEL
12
FUEL DRAIN 2
RETURN PUMP R FUEL PRESS
0 14
5A
5A NO. 4 DUAL-FED BUS
5A
HOT BATT BUS

5A
STANDBY PUMP 5A 5A
57 GAL FIREWALL ON
SHUTOFF VALVE PRIOR TO BB-1098
10A
OFF
136 GAL TOTAL
RIGHT FUEL
QUANTITY TRANSMITTER
40 GAL
13 GAL F
DRAIN
23 GAL 25 GAL
F 35 GAL
79 GAL
DRAIN
FUEL UNDER PRESSURE

STATIC PRESSURE
JET PUMP PRESSURE
FUEL IN STORAGE
F FUEL FILLER
FUEL PROBES

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998
Fuel System
Fuel System
King Air B200
FUEL CONTROL UNIT

ENGINE FUEL
P 3 BLEED AIR LINE MANIFOLD
ENGINE FUEL PUMP PRESSURE TANK
6 8 FUEL HEATER
4 FUEL
FIREWALL FUEL
12 AIR FILTER FILTER
2
L FUEL PRESS FUEL FLOW TRANSMITTER AND INDICATOR
0 14 DRAIN VALVE
LEFT FUEL PRESSURE SWITCH
ENGINE DRIVEN
5A BOOST PUNP
FUEL CONTROL PURGE VALVE
FIREWALL SHUT OFF
NO. 3 DUAL-FED BUS 5A VALVE
GRAVITY FLOW CHECK VALVE
TRANSFER CONTROL MOTIVE FLOW VALVE STANDBY
5A BOOST PUMP
PRESSURE SWITCH FOR LEFT NO FUEL
HOT BATT BUS TRANSFER LIGHT ON FUEL PANEL STRAINER AND
5A DEFUELING
STANDBY PUMP FIREWALL DRAIN VALVE
5A 5A
ON SHUT OFF VALVE
PRIOR TO BB-1098
VENT FLOAT VALVE
10A
NACELLE TANK
OFF
CROSSFEED VALVE
136 GAL TOTAL
57
GAL
LEFT FUEL QUANTITY
1 TRANSMITTER
F FROM
RIGHT
40 GAL WING
F 13 GAL STRAINER, DRAIN
DRAIN & FUEL SWITCH
AUXILIARY
INTEGRAL (WET CELL) 25 GAL 23 GAL
F
VENT FLOAT VALVE 35 GAL
AIR INLET 79 GAL
DRAIN TRANSFER JET PUMP

RECESSED VENT
FUEL UNDER PRESSURE HEATED RAM VENT
DRAIN
STATIC PRESSURE
JET PUMP PRESSURE 1 BB-1376 AND SUBSEQUENT FLAME ARRESTOR
FUEL IN STORAGE
F FUEL FILLER
FUEL PROBES

June 2000
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998
Fuel System
Fuel
The airframe fuel system includes fuel storage, venting, indicat-
ing, and distribution. Refer to the Powerplant chapter for engine
fuel and fuel control systems. Refueling is covered in the
Servicing chapter.
Storage
Wing and auxiliary fuel tanks hold a usable total of 544 or 650
U.S. gallons (with tip tanks). Each wing tank consists of five
interconnected tanks and a nacelle tank behind the engine.
These tanks are either bladder or integral type. Fuel from the
wing tank gravity feeds into the nacelle tank.
From the nacelle tank, an engine-driven fuel boost pump sup-
plies fuel under pressure to the engine through a firewall fuel
shutoff valve. Placing a firewall shutoff valve switch in the
CLOSED position electrically drives the valve closed.
The auxiliary fuel tank consists of a center section tank in each
wing root. Because these tanks are lower than the rest of the
fuel tanks, motive flow fuel powers a jet transfer pump to move
fuel to the nacelle tank.
Optional wing tip tanks, which gravity drain into the outboard
wing tank, are available.
Drain valves at tank low points permit fuel sampling and water
removal. These drains are forward of the wheel well (nacelle
tank), outboard of the nacelle (leading edge tank), halfway out
on the wing (integral tank), and on the middle of the wing root
(auxiliary tank). A drain valve permits removal of accumulated
water from the gravity feed line that connects the wing and
nacelle tanks. The optional tip tanks also have a drain valve at
their lowest point.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
Indicating
A capacitance-type fuel indicating system provides accurate
measurement of fuel quantity regardless of fuel temperature and
type. If installed, the tip tank fuel quantity system uses a simple
float type quantity transmitter and a separate set of gages.
As fuel level rises and falls in a fuel tank, probe capacitance
increases and decreases proportionately. The fuel indicating
system then produces an output current to drive the fuel gages.
Normally, the fuel gages display main tank quantity in pounds.
Placing the fuel selector switch in AUXILIARY displays auxiliary
fuel tank quantity.
For tip tank quantities, a fuel quantity transmitter provides a
resistance value that corresponds to tank quantity. As fuel tank
level falls from full, resistance drops until at the empty level there
is near zero resistance. This output drives the associated TIP
TANK FUEL gage.

October 1998
Fuel System
Venting
The wing and auxiliary fuel tanks vent to atmosphere through a
pair of vents on the wing underside near the engine nacelle.
Each pair of vents has an unheated recessed vent and a heat-
ed ram air vent. If one vent clogs, the other continues to provide
tank venting.
The outer wing tanks vent to each other and then to atmosphere
through a vent float valve near the wing tip and a pair of vents
on the lower wing surface. The float valve connects to a vent line
running the length of the outboard wing section. The vent line
then connects to an unheated recessed vent through a check
valve and to a heated ram air vent through a flame arrestor.
An air inlet and two suction relief valves in the wing tip prevent
fuel siphoning through the venting system. One of the pressure
relief valves connects to the air inlet while the other one con-
nects the float valve to a siphon break line.
The nacelle tank also has a vent float valve and two suction
relief valves. From the float valve, a vent line connects this tank
to the two wing vents.
When the auxiliary fuel tank is full, its float-operated check
valve closes to prevent fuel loss through the venting system.
The tank then vents to atmosphere through the vent line con-
nected to the integral wing tank. As the fuel level in this tank
drops, the check valve opens and the tank vents directly
through the two wing vents.
The optional tip tanks vent through the wing system. Each tip
tank has a vent float valve that closes when the tank is full. As
fuel level drops, the float valve opens and the tank vents through
the wing vent lines.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
Tank Gallons Pounds Liters Kilograms

Left Auxiliary 79 529 299 1418
Left Main 193 1293 731 3466
Right Auxiliary 79 529 299 1418
Right Main 193 1293 731 3466
Total Usable 544 3644 2060 9768
Table F1; Usable Fuel Capacity
Tank Gallons Pounds Liters Kilograms

Left Auxiliary 79 529 299 1418
Left Main 193 1293 731 3466
Left Tip Tank 53 355 200 952
Right Auxiliary 79 529 299 1418
Right Main 193 1293 731 3466
Right Tip Tank 53 355 200 952
Total Usable 650 4354 2460 11672
Table F2; Usable Fuel Capacity – Aircraft with Tip Tanks
Distribution
Fuel either gravity flows from the wing tank or is pumped from
the auxiliary tank to the nacelle tank. Each nacelle tank supplies
fuel to its engine through the firewall fuel shutoff valve.
During engine operation, the engine’s fuel boost pump draws
fuel from the nacelle tank and provides it under pressure to the
engine. If this pump fails, an electrically driven standby fuel
boost pump in the nacelle tank provides pressurized fuel. The
standby boost pump also moves fuel during crossfeed.

October 1998
Fuel System
With the respective STANDBY PUMP switch on, 28V DC from

the No. 3 Dual-Fed (left pump) or No. 4 Dual-Fed (right pump)
powers the standby boost pump. If power is not available from
these buses, the Hot Battery bus can also power the standby
pumps. On aircraft BB-1096, 1098 and subsequent, the
standby pumps are not on the Hot Battery bus.
A jet transfer pump transfers fuel from the auxiliary tank to
the nacelle tank. With the engine-driven or standby fuel pumps
operating, motive flow fuel operates the transfer pump. Placing
an AUX TRANSFER switch in AUTO powers the associated
motive flow valve after a 30 to 50 second delay. The motive flow
valve opens directing pressurized fuel from the engine-driven
or standby fuel pump to the jet transfer pump. The transfer
pump moves fuel from the auxiliary tank to its nacelle tank.
Excess fuel delivered by the transfer pump flows back into the
auxiliary tank through a float valve and overflow line at the top
of the nacelle tank.
A pressure switch downstream from the motive flow valve moni-
tors fuel pressure in the motive flow fuel supply line. If a boost
pump fails and fuel pressure fails to reach 6 ±1 PSI with fuel in the
auxiliary tank, the pressure switch illuminates the NO TRANS-
FER light. Place the AUX TRANSFER switch in OVERRIDE
bypasses the control circuitry to open the motive flow valve.
Once the auxiliary tank empties, the tank’s float switch provides
an empty signal to the control circuitry. After a 30 to 50 second
delay, the motive flow valve closes.
A single-valve crossfeed system supplies fuel from an inopera-
tive engine’s tanks to the opposite engine. Its use is restricted
to single engine operation. With an inoperative right engine, for
example, place the CROSSFEED FLOW switch to the left. This
action opens the crossfeed valve, energizes the right engine’s
electric boost pump, and closes the left engine’s motive flow
valve. Fuel under pressure then moves from the right side to
the left side.

June 2000
CAE SimuFlite
Fuel Systems
Main Fuel System
Power Source Hot Battery bus (BB 1097, 1095 and prior)
or No. 3 Dual-Fed bus
Left standby pump
Hot Battery bus (BB 1097, 1095 and prior)
or No. 4 Dual-Fed bus
Right standby pump
Hot Battery bus and/or No. 4 Dual-Fed bus
Crossfeed valve
No. 3 and No. 4 Dual-Fed buses
Firewall shutoff valves (L/R)
Distribution Wing tanks (gravity feed) to nacelle tank

Nacelletank to engine
Control Switches
STANDBY PUMP
CROSSFEED
FIREWALL SHUTOFF VALVES
CROSSFEED (closes motive flow valve on
receiving side, opens crossfeed valve, turns
on standby boost pump on feeding sides, and
eliminates crossfeed annunciator)
Monitor Main fuel gages

Fuel flow indicator
Annunciators
FUEL CROSSFEED
FUEL PRESS

Check valves
Fuses
Fuel drain system
Fuel filters (pressure switches)
Vent system
Oil/Fuel heat exchanger

June 2000
Fuel System
Auxiliary Fuel System
Power Source Motive flow
Distribution Auxiliary (center) tank (automatic transfer

to nacelle tank with AUX TRANSFER switch
in AUTO)
Control Switches
AUX TRANSFER OVERRIDE-AUTO
(opens motive flow valve)
Monitor Aux fuel gages

NO TRANSFER lights

Fuses

June 2000
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998
Ice and Rain Protection
Windshield Anti-Ice System
G
E
N 50A
B
U
S
TEMP
CONTROLLER
(100-105° F)
NORMAL
OFF
5A
WINDSHIELD HIGH NORMAL SWITCH POSITION
HEAT SWITCH 360 IN2 AT 2.4 WATTS/IN2
G
E
N 50A
B
U
S
TEMP
CONTROLLER
(100-105° F)
NORMAL
OFF
5A
WINDSHIELD HIGH HIGH SWITCH POSITION
HEAT SWITCH 265 IN2 AT 4.5 WATTS/IN2
King Air 200 4G-1

October 1998 Developed for Training Purposes Only
B2CRH IR 9/16/02 1:24 PM Page 2
CAE SimuFlite
Propeller Deice System

King Air 200 BB-6 to BB-815; BB-817 to BB-824;
BL-1 to BL-29
RH PROP
LH PROP
OUTER INNER
MANUAL MANUAL
OVERRIDE OVERRIDE
RELAY RELAY
PROP
TIMER
(34 SECS)
PROP
OUTER INNER AMMETER
LH SHUNT
MANUAL
PROP 20A
DEICE
N N N
O O O
20A 4 3 1
D D D
RH MANUAL U U U
PROP DEICE A A 20A A
L L L
5A F F AUTO F
E E PROP E
D D DEICE D
MANUAL
PROP DEICE B B B
CONTROL U U U
S S S
4G-2 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

October 1998
Propeller Deice System

King Air 200 BB-816; BL-30 and Subsequent
RH PROP LH PROP
RIGHT LEFT
MANUAL MANUAL
OVERRIDE OVERRIDE
RELAY RELAY
PROP
TIMER
(90 SEC)
MANUAL
PROP DEICE PROP
CONTROL AMMETER
SWITCH
SHUNT
N N N
O O O
4 3 1
20A 20A
D D D
U U U
LH A MANUAL A 20A A
MANUAL L PROP L L
PROP
DEICE F 5A F AUTO F
E E PROP E
D D DEICE D
MANUAL
B PROP DEICE B B
U CONTROL U U
S S S
King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 4G-3

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
Dual-Motor Inertial
Ice Separation System
BT-35 and subsequent;
BL-139 and subsequent
DUAL MOTOR
ELECTRIC ACTUATOR SCREEN
INDUCTION AIR
FORWARD LOWER
COWLING
INERTIAL
OIL BYPASS ACCESS ICE VANE
COOLER DOOR PLATE
AFT LOWER
COWLING

October 1998
Deice System
FROM NO. 1 FROM NO. 2
DUAL-FED BUS RIGHT P 3
DUAL-FED BUS INSTRUMENT AIR
SINGLE RIGHT BRAKE
TO TAIL BOOTS CYCLE DEICE MANIFOLD
N.
RUDDER
BOOST
O. INSTRUMENT AIR VALVE
5A
OFF
MANUAL 5A
N. C. RIGHT BRAKE DEICE VALVE BRAKE
DEICE
TO OFF SWITCH
WING DEICE TIMER 10 MIN
BOOTS DISTRIBUTOR TIME DELAY
VALVE BLEED AIR VALVES
OPEN PCB
5A LEFT RIGHT
FROM NO. 1 N
BRAKE DEICE ON O
DUAL-FED BUS
ENVIR 1
5A OFF
FROM NO. 2 INSTR & ENVIR OFF D
U
DUAL-FED BUS A
5A L
LH MLG F
E
UPLOCK D
FROM NO. 1 SWITCH
R BL AIR FAIL B
DUAL-FED BUS U
S
PNEUMATIC RIGHT RUDDER

PRESSURE FROM NO. 2 BOOST SERVO
GAGE 5A DUAL-FED BUS RUDDER
N. C.
10
18 PSI 15 PSI
0
PNEUMATIC
20 PRESSURE PRESSURE
PRESSURE
REG REG
SUCTION FILTER N. C.
5A
GAGE FROM NO. 1
4 PSI DUAL-FED BUS
3
4
6 REG
COPILOT'S COPILOT'S
TURN & SLIP
GYRO
ATTITUDE
SUCTION
INCHES OF MERCURY LEFT RUDDER
INDICATOR INDICATOR N. BOOST SERVO
P SWITCH
O.
AFT
PRESSURE
L R
VACUUM TO L BL AIR FAIL

DOOR BULKHEAD
REGULATOR
SEAL
10 10
20 20
AIR
VACUUM FLIGHT
AIR FILTER FLT HOUR
CABIN 1000
N.C. HOURS 1/10
METER N. C. LEFT BRAKE DEICE VALVE
045 62
ALT
7 8
FT
DUMP
SOLENOID
6
9
5
30
25
TO OUTFLOW
10
4
TO DUMP
19 21 2
35
11
VALVE
ACFT ALT
3
100 FT
RATE CABIN
VALVE N. INSTRUMENT AIR VALVE
2
13
17
ALT
15
O.
1
N.O.
15
M
I
M
A
0
UNREGULATED LEFT BRAKE
PRESET
N X
DEICE MANIFOLD
CABIN PRESSURIZATION SOLENOID REGULATED
AIR FILTER CONTROLLER LEFT P 3
INSTRUMENT AIR VACUUM

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998

Ice and rain protection systems include:
■ wing and stabilizer deice boots
■ engine air inlet lip heat
■ engine inertial separators
■ window and windshield heating
■ pitot heat.
Wing and Stabilizer Deice Boots

A distributor valve controls the instrument air that inflates and
deflates the wing and stabilizer deice boots. Engine bleed air
regulated to 18 PSI supplies the pressure for inflation when the
DEICE switch is in the SINGLE or MANUAL position. To deflate
the boots, bleed air operates a venturi ejector to create a vacu-
um that deflates and holds the boots down when not in use.
The SINGLE cycle inflates the wing boots for six seconds. A
timer switch then deflates the wing boots and inflates the hori-
zontal stabilizer boots for four seconds. With the switch held in
MANUAL, all boots inflate simultaneously and remain inflated
until the switch is released.
Engine Air Inlet Lip Heat

On S/Ns BB-2 to 1265; BL-1 to 28, hot exhaust gases heat the
lip around each air inlet to prevent ice formation during
inclement weather. A scupper in each engine exhaust stack
deflects the hot exhaust gases downward into the hollow lip
(overboard at the 6 o’clock position) tube that encircles the
engine air inlet.
On S/N BB-1266 and subsequent and those with Kit 101-
9048, the engine exhaust scupper in the left exhaust stack
deflects hot gases into the hollow lip and out through the right
exhaust stack.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
Engine Inertial Separators

An electrically actuated inertial vane system on each engine
prevents ice or other foreign objects such as dust or sand from
entering the engine inlet or ice from accumulating on the engine
inlet screen. The system extends an ice vane and bypass door
to accelerate ice and moisture laden air past the engine screen
area to exit overboard through the bypass door.
The ice vane and bypass doors extend or retract simultane-
ously through a linkage system connected to electric actuators.
When the ICE VANE switches are in EXTEND, two green advi-
sory annunciators illuminate as the vane and door extend.
When the ice vanes and bypass doors retract (switch in
RETRACT), the annunciators extinguish.
A manual mechanical backup system operates the system by
flexible cable. If the vanes and doors do not move with 15 sec-
onds after actuation, an amber annunciator illuminates. Pull the
ICE VANE CBs on the copilot CB panel to disable electric
power and pull the manual T- handle for the appropriate engine
to activate the system. If the manual positioning is successful,
the amber annunciator extinguishes and the green annuncia-
tors illuminate.
Do not attempt to retract or extend electrically until the linkage
is properly reset. The vane may be retracted with the manual
system. With the manual system, the electric motor switch posi-
tion must match the manual handle position for a correct
annunciator readout. Maximum airspeed for manual extension
of ice vanes is 160 kts.
On S/Ns BB-1439, 1444 and subsequent; BL-139 and sub-
sequent, the vanes and bypass door are extended or retracted
through a linkage system connected to an electric dual-motor
actuator. Two switches with positions of MAIN or STANDBY
control both the left and right engine system. When either posi-
tion is selected, the remaining position is used to actuate the
backup motor when the main motor is inoperable.

October 1998
Propeller Deicing
An electrically heated boot for each propeller blade provides
automatic and manual anti-ice protection for the propellers. The
No. 1 Dual-fed bus powers the automatic system while the No.
3 and 4 Dual-fed bus powers the manual switch.
On BB-2 to 815, 817 to 824, and 991; BL-1 to 29, the propeller
deicing system is an inner and outer heating element on each
propeller blade. With the PROP switch in AUTO, the deicer
timer cycles power for approximately 30 seconds each to the
RH outboard, RH inboard, LH outboard, and LH inboard heat-
ing elements. If the automatic system fails, hold the PROP
MAN switch in either INNER or OUTER to power the corre-
sponding heating elements through a manual override relay.
On BB-816, 825 to 990, 992 and subsequent; BL-30 and
subsequent, and all four-bladed props, each propeller blade
has a single heating element. With the PROP switch in AUTO,
the deicer timer cycles power to the right and then left propeller
heating elements for 90 seconds each. If the automatic system
fails, hold the PROP MAN in MANUAL to power the heating ele-
ments through the manual override relays.
Windshield Anti-Icing
Electric heating elements embedded in the windshield lamina-
tions provide protection against the formation of ice, while air
from the cabin heating system prevents fogging. Heavy duty
windshield wipers provide improved visibility during rainy flight
conditions.
With the pilot or copilot WSHLD ANTI-ICE switch in NORMAL,
an automatic temperature controller senses the windshield
temperature and then attempts to maintain it at approximately
100 to 105°F by energizing the normal heat relay as necessary.
In this mode, both the inboard and outboard areas of the wind-
shield are heated.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
With the switch in HI, the “high” heat relay switch is energized to
apply heat to a more concentrated, essential viewing area of the
windshield. The outboard two-thirds of the windshield is heated.
If the NORMAL position is insufficient to raise the windshield
temperature above freezing, switching to HI nearly doubles the
available heat to the smaller windshield area.
Brake Deice
An optional brake deice system uses instrument bleed air to
warm the main wheel brakes to prevent ice and slush build-up.
With the BRAKE DEICE switch in ON, the left and right sole-
noid shutoff valves in the wheel well open to admit bleed air to
a distributor manifold. The manifold then directs bleed air
toward the brake assembly.
To prevent overheat damage, a timing circuit turns the deice
system off 10 minutes after gear is retracted by closing the
solenoid valve.
CAUTION: Use of brake deice during engine-out proce-

dures substantially reduces the effectiveness of rudder
boost assistance. Turn brake deice off for takeoff.

October 1998
Pitot and Stall Warning Vane Anti-Icing

Electrical heating warms the pitot masts and stall warning vane.
The static plates are unheated.
With the PITOT switches on, the No. 1 Dual-fed (left pitot) and
No. 2 Dual-fed (right pitot) buses power the heating elements
with 28V DC
With the STALL WARN switch on, the No. 2 Dual-fed bus pow-
ers the vane heating element. To prevent stall warning vane
from overheating, a safety switch through the left main landing
gear limits voltage. With weight-on-wheels, the heating element
only receives 12V DC. Once airborne, the heating element
receives 28V DC.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite

Surface Deice System
Power Source Bleed air

No. 1 Dual-Fed bus
Distribution Wing leading edge boots

Horizontal stabilizer leading edge boots
Control DEICE CYCLE switch

SINGLE – inflation/deflation of wing boots,
then horizontal stabilizer boots
MANUAL – inflation of all boots
simultaneously
Monitor Visual monitoring for wing

Pneumatic gages
Prop Heat System
Power Source No. 1 Dual-Fed bus (auto)

No. 3 and 4 Dual-Fed bus (manual)
Distribution Heated boot for each propeller blade
Control Switches
PROP AUTO
PROP MANUAL
INNER/OUTER (200 only)
Monitor Prop ammeter

Loadmeters
Protection Circuit breakers/circuit breaker switch (auto)

September 2002
Brake Deice
Power Source Engine P3 bleed air
Control BRAKE DEICE switch
Monitor BRAKE DEICE ON annunciator
Protection 10-minute timer, CB
Pitot Heat
Power Source Dual-Fed buses Nos 1/2

Control PITOT circuit breaker switches
Protection 2-minute ground operation limit
Stall Warning Heat
Power Source Dual-Fed bus No. 2
Control STALL WARN circuit breaker switches

Landing Gear safety switch
Protection CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCH
Fuel Vent Heat
Control FUEL VENT circuit breaker switches

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Windshield Heat
Power Source L/R GEN bus

Control WSHLD ANTI-ICE switches
Protection Circuit breaker (5A)

Temperature sensing element
Temperature controller
50A current limiters
Ice Vanes
Control ICE VANE switches

VANE MANUAL PULL handle
Monitor ICE VANE amber and green annunciators

Manual override system

October 1998
B2CRH LG 9/16/02 1:31 PM Page 1
Landing Gear and Brakes

Electro-Mechanical Landing Gear System
N
O
2
D
U LANDING
A GEAR
L DOWN
RELAY LIMIT DOWN
F DOWN SWITCH
E
D 5A
EMERGENCY
B EXTENSION GROUND LIMIT
U SWITCH
S UP AIRBORNE
ENGAGED GROUND LANDING

GEAR
GEAR CONTROLLER
DOWNLOCK AIRBORNE
HOOK
GEAR SAFETY
SWITCH LIMIT
UP
R LIMIT
I SWITCH
G UP
H
T
60A
G TORQUE
E
N TUBES
1
B
U
S
RIGHT
MAIN
GEAR TORQUE
TUBES
SPRING-LOAD
IDLER SPROCKETS
CROSS SHAFT
DUPLEX CHAIN
DOWNLOCK
INDICATOR
SWITCH
DOWNLOCK
HOOK
1
LEFT
MAIN
GEAR
NOSE
GEAR DRAG BRACE
ASSEMBLY
King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 4H-1

October 1998
B2CRH LG 9/16/02 1:31 PM Page 2
CAE SimuFlite
4H-2 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

September 2002
Hydraulic Landing Gear System
REGULATED BLEED AIR

OVERBOARD
VENT
60A
POWER PACK ASSEMBLY VENT PORT
5A
RH GEN
BUS FILL
RESERVOIR
MAIN 5 SECONDARY
POWER RESERVOIR
FILL
RELAY
AUX. PORT
LANDING GEAR RETURN
TIME DELAY PCB PORT
VDC
TIME DELAY
PRIMARY
AUX. RESERVOIR HYD FLUID LOW
14 PRESS.
PORT UP SELECTOR VALVE DOWN
SERVICE
VALVE
SWITCH PUMP
LANDING HAND
GEAR RH SQUAT PUMP
CONTROL AIR SWITCH PRESS
PRESS.
PORT
CHECK HAND
VALVE PUMP
2A GROUND
PRESS. HAND PUMP

NO 2 DUAL LANDING SWITCH SUCTION
GEAR UP
FED BUS GEAR LH SQUAT PORT
PORT
CONTROL SWITCH
ACCUM
UP 800 psi
DOWN
RH MLG
SERVICE
DOWN
VALVE
LOCK
LH MAIN NOSE RH MAIN

ACTUATOR ACTUATOR ACTUATOR
NOSE
ACTR.
SW
LEGEND
LH MLG UNLOCK
DOWN NORMAL
LOCK
LOCK
EMERGENCY

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Hydraulic Gear Position Indication
LDG
GEAR
IND
5A
Nose
Uplock
Switch
UP
NOT
DN
NOT
UP
DN
LH Main Nose
Uplock Dragbrace
Switch Switch
UP UP
NOT NOT
UP UP
Nose
Actuator LH Main
Landing Switch Uplock
Gear NOT
Switch
NOT
Motor DN
DN
DN
DN
NOT NOT
DN DN
NOSE
DN L R DN
LH Main RH Main
Dragbrace Dragbrace
Switch Switch

September 2002
Brake System
DRAIN DRAIN DRAIN
RESERVOIR RESERVOIR RESERVOIR
PILOT'S COPILOT'S
MASTER MASTER
CYLINDERS CYLINDERS
PARKING
BRAKE PARKING
BRAKE
PILOT'S PILOT'S
MASTER MASTER
CYLINDERS CYLINDERS
COPILOT'S COPILOT'S
MASTER MASTER
CYLINDERS CYLINDERS
SHUTTLE SHUTTLE PARKING

VALVE VALVE BRAKE
BB-2 TO BB-452 BB-453 TO BB-665 BB-666 AND SUBSEQUENT
SUPPLY
LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT
BRAKE BRAKE BRAKE BRAKE BRAKE STATIC BRAKE
BRAKE PRESSURE

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998

The aircraft has a tricycle-type landing gear that is, depending on
aircraft serial number, either electrically or hydraulically operated.
The nose and main gear have conventional air/oil struts to
absorb taxi and landing shocks. A position indicating system pro-
vides indication of safe and unsafe landing gear configuration.
The nose is a single wheel assembly while the main gear is a
two wheel assemblies with dual hydraulic brakes.
Mechanical Landing Gear

Aircraft BB-2 to 1192 except 1158, 1167; BL-1 to 72 have a
mechanical landing gear system. A split-field electric motor dri-
ves a gearbox that, in turn, provides force to the nose and main
gear actuators through a chain drive and torque tubes. One field
drives the motor to retract the gear while the second drives the
motor in the opposite direction to extend the gear.
A squat switch on the right main gear torque knee opens the
landing gear control circuit when the strut is compressed (air-
craft on ground). The squat switch also actuates a solenoid-
operated downlock hook on the landing gear control switch to
prevent the handle from being raised when the aircraft is on the
ground. The hook automatically unlocks when the aircraft
leaves the ground. If the downlock solenoid fails, press the red
DOWNLOCK REL button alongside the landing gear handle to
release the downlock.
Two red parallel-wired indicator lights in the landing gear control
handle indicate that the gear is in transit or unlocked. The red
lights extinguish in a GEAR UP condition.
The lights receive information from the normally-closed, up-
position switches, one of which is in the upper portion of each
wheel well. When the gear is in the fully retracted position, each
strut actuates its respective switch and opens the circuit from
the intransit light to ground. As the gear moves from the fully

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
retracted position, the switches close and illuminate the intran-

sit light. The intransit light extinguishes when the drag brace in
each landing gear actuates its respective downlock switch.
Illumination of the landing gear intransit light indicates on or
more of the following conditions:
■ landing gear handle is in the UP position and aircraft on the
ground with weight on gear
■ one or both power levers are retarded below a preset 79% N1
level and at least one landing gear is now down and locked
■ any one or more landing gear is not fully retracted or in the
down and locked position
■ one or more of the landing gear is not down and locked and
the flaps are selected past approach. Warning horn only can
be silenced by retracting flaps or extending the landing gear.
If the normal landing gear system fails, the gear can be manu-
ally extended. Pull the LANDING GEAR RELAY CB on the pilot
right panel and verify that the gear handle is in the DN position.
Pull up on the EMERGENCY ENGAGE handle and turn clock-
wise about 60 to engage the emergency extension mechanism.
Pumping the manual extension lever mechanically drives the
nose and main landing gear actuators through the motor gear-
box, chain drive, and torque tubes. When the landing gear
reach the extended position and the green down-and-locked
lights illuminate, discontinue use of the manual extension lever
to prevent damage to the landing gear operating mechanism.

October 1998
Hydraulic Landing Gear

Aircraft BB-1158, 1167, 1193 and subsequent; BL-73 and
subsequent; aircraft with kit 101-8018 have a hydraulically-
operated landing gear system with an electric-driven hydraulic
pump (powerpack), selector valve, hydraulic gear actuators, and
related plumbing and valves.
Placing the landing gear lever to DN actuates the powerpack
down solenoid. Fluid then flows to the extend side of the actua-
tors. As the actuator piston extends the landing gear, fluid on the
other side of the actuators exits through the retract port and
flows back to the powerpack through retract plumbing. Fluid
from the pump flows through the selector valve, opens a pres-
sure check valve, and then allows the return fluid flow into the
primary reservoir.
When the actuator piston positions to fully extend the gear, an
internal mechanical lock in the nose gear actuator locks the
actuator piston and holds the gear in the down position. The
main gears are held in the extend position by this mechanical
locking system. The downlock switches interrupt current to the
power relay.
Moving the landing gear handle to UP provides hydraulic fluid
under pressure to the retract side of the gear actuators. As the
actuator pistons moves to retract the gear, the fluid in the other
side of the actuators exists through the extend port and flows
back to the powerpack through the extend plumbing. Fluid flows
the powerpack through the selector valve and returns to the pri-
mary reservoir.
When the gear reaches the fully retracted position, hydraulic
system pressure hold the gear in the up position. When
hydraulic pressure reaches approximately 2,775 PSI, the uplock
pressure switch opens the landing gear relay to interrupt current
to the pump motor. The same pressure switch actuates the
pump that increases hydraulic pressure if it drops below 2,475
PSI. The system also has a 14-second timer that interrupts cur-
rent to the pump motor 14 seconds after it has started.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
Up and down position switches on the nose and main landing

gear illuminate the landing gear lever’s red intransit light and the
three green down-and-locked lights. Essentially, the intransit
light illuminates when a landing gear up and down position
switches are simultaneously de-actuated (i.e., with a landing
gear transitioning between positions.
The red intransit light illuminates whenever:
■ landing gear handle is in up position with weight-on-wheels
■ any landing gear is between the fully retracted and down-
and-locked position (i.e., intransit)
■ landing gear is not down-and-locked with a power lever set
below approximately 79% N1
■ landing gear is up and flaps extended past the approach
position. Warning horn can be silenced only by retracting
flaps or extending landing gear.
If the normal landing gear system fails, manually extend with a
hand-operated hydraulic pump. Pull the LANDING GEAR
RELAY CB on the pilot inboard subpanel to interrupt electrical
power and then place the landing gear lever in the DOWN posi-
tion. Remove the LANDING GEAR ALTERNATE EXTENSION
hand pump handle from the securing clip and pump up and down
until three green indicator lights illuminate. The hand pump sup-
plies fluid to the extend side of the gear actuators. Refer to the
actual checklist for detailed instruction for extension.
If the landing gear system hydraulic reservoir level drops to a
critical level for more than four seconds, an optical sensor illu-
minates the yellow HYD FLUID LOW annunciator. When the
annunciator illuminates, sufficient hydraulic fluid remains to
manually extend the landing gear.

October 1998
Brakes
Each main gear wheel carries a multiple disc brake assembly.
Each assembly consists of two rotating discs keyed to the
wheel, a piston housing, carrier and lining (stationary disc), and
torque plate. The stationary disc and torque plate provide a fric-
tion surface for the rotating discs.
Depressing either set of brake pedals compresses the master
cylinders’ piston rod. Piston rod movement generates hydraulic
pressure that flows through rigid and flexible lines to the brake
assembly. The brake assembly pistons then extend to force the
linings and discs together; braking occurs. Releasing brake
pressure allows the brake assembly pistons to retract, the lin-
ings move away from the discs, and release of the brakes.
Aircraft BB-2 to 665; BL-1 to 8 have shuttle valves between
the pilot’s and copilot’s brake master cylinders. In this arrange-
ment brake pedal application shifts a shuttle valve to isolate the
opposite side’s master cylinders. The active pedals then provide
the braking pressure. On aircraft BB-666 and subsequent;
BL-9 and subsequent, the pilot’s and copilot’s master cylinders
are in series so that pilot braking pressure first flows through the
copilot’s master cylinders before reaching the brake assemblies.
With pilot brake pedals depressed and brake pressure built-up,
pulling the PARKING BRAKE handle out closes two parking
brake valves. This traps brake pressure within the system to
hold the parking brakes. Before releasing the parking brakes,
depress the pilot brake pedals and then release the PARKING
BRAKE handle.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
Landing Gear and Brake Systems

Electro-Mechanical Landing Gear Systems
Power Source No. 2 Duel-Fed bus

Landing gear control relay
Right Generator bus
28V DC split-field 1 1/2 HP motor
Control LDG GEAR CONTROL handle

EMERGENCY ENGAGE handle
Monitor Gear handle light

Gear warning horn
Gear DOWN position lights
Protection Landing gear relay (5A)

Circuit breaker (80A)
Right main gear squat switch
Emergency engage handle
Limit switches
Dynamic brake relay
Solenoid-operated down lock hook
(landing gear handle)

October 1998
Hydraulic Landing Gear System
Power Source Right Generator bus

No. 2 Dual-Fed bus
Landing gear control power relay
Electric Motor-Driven
Hydraulic Pump (Power Pack)
Distribution Landing gear
Control LDG GEAR CONTROL handle

Pressure Switch
Down-lock switches (3)
Time delay module
Monitor HYD FLUID LOW annunciator

Accumulator precharge direct reading gage

LANDING GEAR RELAY (5A)
Landing gear powerpack (60A)
Pressure switch
Thermal relief valve
Down-lock switches (3)
Internal nose gear mechanical lock
Squat switches (L/R)
Low fluid level sensor
Time delay module
Solenoid-operated down-lock hook
(landing gear handle)

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
Brake System
Power Source Hydraulic pressure
Distribution Master cylinders

Parking brake valves
Control Brake pedals

PARKING BRAKE handle
Emergency braking: reverse propeller for
taxiing or slowing (-3° blade angle, zero
thrust-top of red and white strips on throttle
quadrant)
Shuttle valves
S/N prior to BB-666: valve adjacent to
each set of pedals permit changing
braking action from one to the other
S/N BB-666 and subsequent: dual brakes
plumbed in series to allow either set of
pedals to perform

June 2000
B2CRH OX 9/16/02 1:37 PM Page 1
Oxygen System
Oxygen System
King Air 200; B200
NO. 1 DUAL-FED BUS

FORWARD PRESSURE BULKHEAD
COCKPIT
OXYGEN MASK OXYGEN
GAGE
PASSENGER OXYGEN
MANUAL 5A
CONTROL
OVERRIDE
PULL ON
SYSTEM READY
1
OXYGEN IN
OUTLET
OUT
1
OUTLETS BAROMETERIC PASSENGER

PRESSURE MANUAL
SWITCH OVERRIDE
SHUTOFF
VALVE
PASS OXYGEN ON
OXYGEN PRESSURE
SENSE SWITCH
FIRST AID MASK STOWED IN

CONTROL MANUALLY OPERATED BOX
CABLE
AFT
PRESSURE
BULKHEAD OXYGEN
RECHARGE
OXYGEN
CYLINDER
FILL VALVE
HIGH PRESSURE
OVERBOARD
RELIEF HIGH PRESSURE
2
PRESSURE REGULATOR FILL GAGE LOW PRESSURE
AND SHUTOFF VALVE
King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 4I-1

October 1998
B2CRH OX 9/16/02 1:37 PM Page 2
CAE SimuFlite
Oxygen System
King Air 200C (With Cargo Door)
NO. 1 DUAL-FED BUS

FORWARD PRESSURE BULKHEAD
COCKPIT
OXYGEN OXYGEN
GAGE 5A
CONTROL
ANNUNCIATOR PASSENGER
"PASS OXYGEN" MANUAL
OVERRIDE
PULL ON
SYSTEM READY 1
OXYGEN
OUTLETS IN
OUT
OUTLETS
BAROMETERIC PASSENGER
PRESSURE MANUAL
SWITCH OVERRIDE
SHUTOFF
VALVE
PASS OXYGEN ON
CONTROL OXYGEN PRESSURE
CABLE SENSE SWITCH
FIRST AID MASK 2

STOWED IN MANUALY
OPERATED BOX
OXYGEN
RECHARGE
OXYGEN
CYLINDER
HIGH PRESSURE
OVERBOARD FILL VALVE
RELIEF
2 HIGH PRESSURE
PRESSURE REGULATOR FILL GAGE
AND SHUTOFF VALVE 70 PSI
4I-2 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

October 1998
Oxygen System
Oxygen System
The oxygen bottle supplies both the passenger and crew oxy-
gen systems through an integral pressure regulator. The bottle
has high pressure ports for the fill line and bottle pressure gage.
If it overpressurizes, a relief disc bursts to vent the oxygen
overboard to the atmosphere.
Bottle size depends on aircraft model and options. On aircraft
BB-44 to 309, 311 to 328; earlier aircraft with kits 101-5006
and 101-5007 or with the autodeployment system installed,
the 22 ft3 bottle is standard; 49, 64, or 76 ft3 bottles are options.
On aircraft BB-310, 239 to 1438, 1440 to 1443; BL-1 to 139,
the 22 ft3 steel bottle is standard; 49, 64, 76, or 115 ft3 bottles
are options. On aircraft BB-1439, 1444 and subsequent; BL-
139 and subsequent, the 22 ft3 bottle is standard; 50, 77, or
115 ft3 bottles are options.
Crew System
Oxygen first flows through the bottle regulator where normal
bottle pressure is reduced to 70 mechanically operated by the
PULL ON SYS READY knob. With the knob pulled out, the
shutoff valve opens and oxygen flow is available to crew masks
and the first aid mask.
The crew oxygen masks are diluter-demand types that provide
oxygen as the wearer inhales. Each mask has a NORMAL
(N)/100% lever to control oxygen dilution. With the lever in
NORMAL, the mask dilutes the oxygen with ambient air for use
up to an altitude of 20,000 ft. Placing the lever in the 100% posi-
tion provides undiluted oxygen.
King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 4I-3

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
Passenger System
For the passenger oxygen system, oxygen continues its flow
from the mechanically operated crew system shutoff valve to
a second shutoff valve controlled by a barometric pressure
switch. When cabin altitude reaches 12,500 ft, the barometric
pressure switch opens the passenger shutoff valve and oxygen
flows into the passenger mask autodeployment boxes. The
pressure deploys the passenger masks and pulling the lanyard
pin on the mask starts oxygen flow to the mask. Pressure in
supply lines of the passenger system illuminates the green
PASS OXY ON annunciator.
Override System
If the barometric switch fails, pull the PASSENGER OXYGEN
O’RIDE knob to mechanically open the passenger system shut-
off valve. When passenger oxygen is no longer required, push
the O’RIDE knob in and pull the OXYGEN CONTROL CB to
stop oxygen flow to the passenger system.
4I-4 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

October 1998
B2CRH LFO 9/16/02 10:33 AM Page 17
Powerplant
PT6A Engine ACCESSORY SECTION
HIGH PRESSURE FUEL PUMP
POWER INTERSTAGE CENTRIFUGAL HIGH PRESSURE BOOST PUMP
TURBINES TURBINE COMPRESSOR BLEED VALVE OIL PRESS PUMP
TEMPERATURE N 1 GOVERNOR
FUEL PROBE
A/C COMPRESSOR (RIGHT ENG)
NOZZLE OIL SCAVENGE PUMPS
AIR INLET STARTER GENERATOR
IGNITOR COMPRESSOR
REDUCTION TURBINE SCREEN
GEARS
PROP
GOVERNOR
PAD
PROP
FLANGE
COMPRESSOR
INLET OIL RESEVOIR
CHIP DETECTOR EXHAUST OUTLET P3 BLEED AIR TAPOFF FOR:
IGNITOR ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEM
FUEL PRESSURIZATION
NOZZLE TRANSFER PNEUMATICS 3 STAGE
VALVE AXIAL
ANULAR COMPRESSOR
LOW PRESSURE
COMBUSTION BLEED VALVE
CHAMBER
King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 4J-1

October 1998
B2CRH LFO 9/16/02 10:33 AM Page 18
CAE SimuFlite
Fuel Control System
N
O
1
TORQUE
LIMITER O
R
PRIMARY 2
GOVERNOR
L OR R ENGINE
TORQUE METER FUEL CONT HEAT D
PRESSURE U
A
5A L
CONDITION LEVER
MICROSWITCH F
E
D
TO B
NACELLE U
Nf PURGE TANK S
VALVE
FUEL
CUT-OFF
VALVE
MINIMUM
FLOW
STOP
P3 AIR MINIMUM
PRESSURIZING
VALVE
DUMP TRANSFER
ENGINE DRIVEN VALVE VALVE
FUEL PUMP
OIL TO
FUEL HEAT
EXCHANGER
CONDITION
POWER LEVERS
LEVERS
ENGINE DRIVEN
FUEL BOOST PUMP
N
1
4J-2 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

September 2002
Powerplant
Lubrication System
OIL COOLER
REDUCTION BYPASS VALVE
GEARS
TORQUEMETER OIL POWER COMPRESSOR OIL FILTER AND
CONTROL VALVE TURBINE SHAFT CHECK VALVE OIL FILLER
SHAFT ASSEMBLY AND DIPSTICK
PROPELLER SHAFT
OIL TRANSFER TUBE CENTRIFUGAL
PROPELLER BREATHER THERMOSTATIC
GOVERNOR DIVERTER VALVE
AND BETA (IF FITTED)
CONTROL
FILTER
COMPRESSOR BYPASS OIL-TO-FUEL
VALVE HEATER
PROP
EXTERNAL
SCAVENGE
PUMP
PRESSURE (DUAL ELEMENT)
REGULATING
AND RELIEF
VALVE
THRUST
BEARING CHIP
DETECTOR
TO OIL PRESSURE
BEARING INDICATOR OIL PRESS INTERNAL
TORQUE LIMITER PUMP SCAVENGE
AND TORQUEMETER PUMP
PRESSURE INDICATOR ACCESSORY
GEARBOX DRAIN (DUAL ELEMENT)
OIL TANK DRAIN
TO OIL TEMPERATURE PRESSURE OIL (105 TO .135 PSIG)

INDICATOR
SCAVENGE OIL
RESERVOIR

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
Ignition System
IGNITION
EXCITER
IGNITION ON
PURGE
VALVE
N
O
IGN
POWER 3
O
5A R
N
IGNITION O
START
SWITCH 4
D
ON START U
AUTO CONTROL A
IGNITION L
SWITCH OFF
5A F
E
STARTER D
ARM ONLY
B
U
S
400 FT-LB OFF
TORQUE
SWITCH
OIL

October 1998
Powerplant
Propeller Systems
NO. 4 DUAL-FED BUS

PROP
GOVERNOR
SPEED TEST SWITCH
SETTING PROP
TEST PROP GOV LEVER
SCREW
5A
OFF POWER P3
PROP GOVERNOR LEVER FROM
SPEEDER TEST VALVE N.C.
SPRING FCU
FROM ENGINE
OIL SYSTEM
PRIMARY
GOVERNOR
OVERSPEED
GOVERNOR
PILOT
BETA RETURN VALVE
VALVE LINE
AUTO
FLYWEIGHT FEATHER
DUMP
VALVE N.C.
TO
CASE
FEATHER
RETURN
SPRING
FOLLOW UP
PISTON COLLAR
SERVO
PISTON SEAL COUNTER
WEIGHT TRANSFER
GLAND
RETURN
GOV PUMP
STATIC
LOW PITCH SPRING
STOP NUT

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Autofeather System
TORQUE
SWITCH
200 FT-LBS
L AUTOFEATHER R AUTOFEATHER
N.C. DUMP DUMP N.C.

VALVE VALVE
ARMING ARMING
RELAY RELAY
TORQUE TORQUE
SWITCH SWITCH
400 FT-LBS; 400 FT-LBS;
ACTIVATES ACTIVATES
AUTO AUTO
IGNITION IGNITION
POWER LEVER POWER LEVER

(MICROSWITCH (MICROSWITCH
CLOSES AT CLOSES AT
90% N1) ARM 90% N1)
OFF
TEST
NO. 2 DUAL FED BUS

5A
AUTO FEATHER MECHANICAL CONNECTION

September 2002
Powerplant
Powerplant
Two Pratt & Whitney Canada (PWC) PT6A-41 or -42 turboprop
engines power the aircraft. The PT6A is a lightweight, reverse-
flow, free-turbine engine that drives a three or four-bladed
constant-speed, full-feathering reversible propeller.
Each engine produces approximately 850 shaft-horsepower,
2,230 foot-pounds of torque, and approximately 135 lbs of jet
thrust. The PT6A-41 and -42 engines are essentially the same
except that the -42 engine’s higher operating temperature pro-
vides better performance at high ambient temperatures.
Operation
The free-turbine turboprop engine compresses air, mixes it with
fuel, and ignites the mixture to produce a high-temperature,
high-speed gas.
The combustion cycle begins as air passes through an annular
(ring- shaped) plenum chamber formed by the compressor inlet
case. The air flows through the compressor where each suc-
cessive compressor stage (stator and rotor pair) converts air
velocity into increasing air pressure. After exiting the compres-
sor section, vanes straighten the airflow before it reaches the
combustion section.
As the high pressure air enters the annular combustion cham-
ber, it changes direction 180° before mixing with fuel. A circular
arrangement of 14 simplex atomizers spray fuel into the com-
bustion chamber where air and fuel mix. Two igniters protrud-
ing into the combustion chamber spark to ignite the mixture.
Once combustion is started, the igniters are no longer required
because the combustion process is self-sustaining.
The rapidly expanding, high-temperature gases then reverse
direction to travel through the exit zone. Inlet guide vanes
straighten the gas flow before it reaches the single-stage com-
pressor turbine. The turbine, in turn, drives the compressor
through a shaft at the rear of the engine.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
After passing through the compressor turbine, the gas flow dri-
ves the two-stage power turbine connected to the gearbox. The
gearbox drives the propeller shaft. The exhaust gases exit the
engine through the exhaust duct and stacks.
Powerplant Systems
Powerplant systems include:
■ lubrication
■ fuel and fuel control
■ ignition
■ engine air.
Lubrication
The engine’s integral lubrication system provides filtered oil
under pressure to lubricate, cool, and clean engine bearings
and gearboxes. This system includes:
■ oil tank
■ centrifugal breather
■ chip detector
■ pressure pump
■ pressure relief/pressurizing valve
■ filter
■ oil cooler
■ fuel heater
■ scavenge pumps.

October 1998
Powerplant
The accessory gearbox powers the oil pump as it draws oil from
the tank and provides it under pressure to the oil filter. An exter-
nal pressure regulating and relief valve maintains oil pump
delivery pressure within a set operating range. If oil pressure
exceeds a set value (i.e., cold viscous oil), the relief valve
opens to prevent excess system pressure by directing oil back
to the tank.
The oil filter removes contaminants from the oil supply before it
reaches the engine’s bearings and gearboxes. If sufficient con-
tamination accumulates on the filter element to restrict oil flow,
a bypass valve bypasses oil around the filter element.
Oil lubricates the No. 1 bearing first. This bearing, like Nos. 2
and 3 bearings, has a fine strainer that prevents extraneous
matter from reaching the bearings. Nozzles direct oil to all of
the bearing faces to ensure efficient lubrication.
A common oil supply line from the oil filter outlet supplies the
rest of the engine bearings through a boss on the engine case.
From this boss, the oil supply splits into three lines to supply the
Nos. 2, 3, and 4 bearings and gearbox, front accessories, and
propeller, respectively.
After lubricating the bearings and gearboxes, oil drains by gravity
into sumps. The centrifugal breather removes entrapped air from
the bearing and gearbox sumps and vents it to atmosphere. Oil is
then directed back to the tank by one of the scavenge pump ele-
ments. When oil is above a set temperature, a thermostatic
bypass/check valve directs oil moved by the external scavenge
pump through an oil cooler. Oil then flows from the cooler to the
oil tank.
A pressure sensor and temperature bulb in the common sup-
ply line downstream of the filter drive the oil pressure and
temperature gages.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
Fuel and Fuel Control

The fuel and control system regulates fuel flow from the aircraft
fuel system to the engine using:
■ engine-driven boost pump
■ oil-to-fuel heater
■ engine-driven fuel pump
■ fuel control unit (FCU)
■ torque limiter
■ flow divider and dump valve
■ fuel manifold and nozzles.
The engine’s boost pump draws fuel from its nacelle tank and
provides it under pressure to the oil-to-fuel heater where it is
heated by warm engine oil. As fuel temperature increases
toward 70°F (21°C), the heater’s bypass valve admits less oil
into the heater. Once fuel temperature reaches 90°F (32°C),
the bypass valve closes completely.
Fuel flows from the heater to the engine-driven fuel pump.
Before entering the pump, fuel flows through a strainer. If the
strainer clogs, a bypass valve routes fuel around the strainer.
The pump pressurizes the fuel to approximately 800 PSI before
it flows through a filter. Like the strainer, the filter also has a
bypass valve. A transmitter between the boost pump and
engine-drive pump measures fuel flow to the engine and drives
the fuel flow indicator in the cockpit.

October 1998
Powerplant
The pressurized fuel then enters the fuel control unit (FCU).
Based on throttle lever position, ambient air pressure, engine
torque, and other inputs, the FCU regulates necessary fuel flow
for engine starting, acceleration, constant speed operation,
deceleration, and shut-down.
A torque limiter monitors torquemeter oil pressure to provide
engine protection. If the engine produces excessive torque, the
limiter bleeds off governing air pressure within the FCU to
reduce fuel flow.
From the FCU, metered fuel flows to the fuel divider and dump
valve. A minimum pressurizing valve in the output line to the
fuel divider maintains sufficient pressure to maintain correct
fuel metering. The divider controls fuel supplied to the primary
and secondary fuel manifolds. In turn, the manifolds supply
their primary and secondary fuel nozzles.
During engine start, the flow divider supplies the primary
manifolds. As the engine accelerates and fuel pressure propor-
tionately increases, the divider begins supplying the secondary
manifolds.
During engine shutdown, the divider dumps fuel. Once the
dump valve opens, fuel flows into an EPA collector tank (BB-2
to 665), or pressure in a purge tank (BB-665 and subsequent)
forces fuel from the manifolds into the combustion chamber. In
this chamber fuel manifolds distribute the fuel to primary and
secondary fuel nozzles. Each nozzle provides a finely atomized
mist of fuel into the combustion section.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
Ignition System
An engine’s ignition system consists of an ignition exciter,
leads, two igniters, ignition switch, and auto-ignition system.
Place the IGNITION AND ENGINE START switch in ON to
close the associated ignition power relay and power the ignition
exciter; the IGNITION ON annunciator illuminates.
The exciter converts the relatively low voltage DC input into a
high voltage output. The exciter’s capacitor continues to charge
until the stored energy is sufficient to jump a spark gap. The
exciter then discharges to supply the igniters.
Place the switch in STARTER ONLY to supply power to the
engine’s starter only; the ignition system is unpowered.
An automatic ignition system monitors engine torque to provide
automatic system operation if torque drops below 400 ft-lbs.
With the ENG AUTO IGNITION switch in ARM. If torque drops
below approximately 400 ft-lbs, the pressure switch energizes
the ignition power relay to power the ignition exciter. Once
torque exceeds 400 ft-lbs, the system de-activates.
Engine Air
Compressor interstage (P2.5) air provides bearing compartment
sealing and turbine disk cooling. Compressor discharge (P3) air
supplies airframe services such as air conditioning and pres-
surization, discussed in the environmental section.
The relationship between P2.5 and P3 air control compressor
bleed valves that discharge P2.5 air to atmosphere to prevent
engine stalling at low engine RPM settings. As engine power
increases and airflow smooths, the valves slowly close until at
high power settings (>90% N1 ), they are completely closed.

October 1998
Powerplant
Propellers
The aircraft’s three or four-bladed constant speed, full-feathering,
reversible propellers are manufactured by Hartzell or McCauley.
The propeller blades are attached to a hub, which has a servo
piston, low pitch stop rod(s), low pitch stop collar, feathering
spring, and beta yoke. The servo piston moves the blades to
change pitch in response to oil pressure supplied by a primary
governor. Counterweights on each propeller blade assisted by
the feathering spring move the blades to the feathered position
with loss of controlling oil pressure.
In response to propeller lever setting, the constant-speed pri-
mary governor hydraulically controls propeller (N2) RPM by
changing the propeller’s pitch. The primary governor range is
from 2,000 to 1,600 RPM.
The primary governor maintains selected propeller speed by
decreasing or increasing blade angle respectively. Decreasing
blade angle speeds the propeller while increasing the angle
slows it.
If the primary governor fails to limit propeller speed, the over-
speed governor acts at approximately 2,080 RPM to reduce oil
pressure to the servo piston. Reduced oil pressure reduces
propeller speed by moving the blades to a higher blade angle.
A mechanically monitored hydraulic stop sets the propeller’s
low pitch stop to prevent inadvertent propeller reversing.
Raising the power lever aft past the normal idle stop allows
the propellers to move toward the reverse thrust setting. Oil pres-
sure to the servo piston then drives the propellers through the
zero thrust angle (beta range) to the full reverse blade angle.
Pulling the power levers further aft increases engine power to the
maximum reverse thrust range. The primary governor’s fuel top-
ping mode reduces engine thrust to limit propeller RPM to 95%

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
of selected RPM (1,900 RPM when selected RPM is 2,000).

Fuel restriction by the fuel topping function prevents propeller
overspeed.
Place the AUTO FEATHER switch in ARM position with both
power levers above approximately 85 to 90% N1 setting arms
the autofeathering system.
As engine torque increases, that engine’s high pressure switch
energizes the opposite engine’s arming-light-out relay and illu-
minate its AUTOFEATHER light. This interlock between the two
engines prevents system arming until both engines are above
the mentioned power setting as well as both engines autofeath-
ering if a malfunction occurs. If an engine fails and torque drops,
the respective high pressure switch at 400 ft-lbs de-energizes
the opposite engine’s arming-light-out relay, de-activates its aut-
ofeather system, and extinguish its AUTOFEATHER light.
As torque continues to fall, the low pressure switch energizes
its autofeather control relay at 200 ft-lbs to route power to the
respective overspeed governor’s solenoid dump valve. Oil
pressure is dumped back to the gearbox case and the feather-
ing spring and centrifugal weights rapidly move the propeller to
the feathered position.
Holding the AUTO FEATHER switch in the TEST position with N1
RPM below 90% bypasses the power lever switches to verify
operation of the pressure switches, control relays, and solenoid
dump valves.

October 1998
Powerplant
Aircraft BB-2 to 934 and 991; BL-1 to 41 have a Type I pro-

peller synchrophaser that adjusts right propeller RPM to match
the left.
Aircraft BB-935 and 990, BB-992 and subsequent; BL-42
and subsequent have a Type II synchrophaser that adjusts the
slower propeller to the faster propeller’s RPM.
A propeller synchroscope provides a visual indication of the
synchronization.
The Type I synchrophaser receives propeller RPM from a mag-
netic pickup on the propeller overspeed governor and a phase
pickup on the propeller bulkhead. The system then compares
right propeller RPM (slave) to the left’s (master). Within system
authority range of approximately s propeller governor to match
the left propeller’s RPM.
On the Type II system, magnetic pickups generate an AC cur-
rent proportional to propeller RPM. The control box compares
waveforms of the AC inputs from each propeller’s pickups and
attempts to superimpose the waveforms (match propeller RPM)
by varying propeller RPM. With propeller RPM within the 25 ±2
RPM authority range, the control box sends correction signals
to increase the slower prop.
An electrically powered single or dual-element deice boot
warms each propeller blade to prevent ice formation (see Ice
and Rain Protection). Slip rings and brush assemblies deliver
DC power to the deice boots.

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite
Powerplant System
Power Source Reverse flow, free turbine engines
Pratt and Whitney PT6A-41 (200)
Pratt and Whitney PT6A-42 (B200)
Distribution Air from inlet screen to:

Axial-flow compressor
Centrifugal-flow compressor section
Annular combustion chamber
Hot, high-pressure gas from combustion
chamber to:
Single-stage, axial-flow turbine
(to drive compressor and accesory section)
Two-stage, axial-flow turbine
(to drive power turbine shaft)
Power turbine shaft drives
Propeller
Reduction gearbox
Control Levers
Power
Propeller
Condition (fuel control unit)
Switches
IGNITION AND ENGINE START
(ON/OFF/STARTER ONLY) (L/R)
ENG AUTO IGNITION (ARM/OFF) (L/R)
ICE VANE (EXTEND/RETRACT) (L/R)
PROP GOV (TEST/OFF)

June 2000
Systems
Monitor Engine operation

ITT
Torque
Prop RPM
N1 RPM
Indicators
FUEL FLOW
OIL TEMP
OIL PRESS
Warning annunciators
ENG FIRE L/R
FUEL PRESS L/R
OIL PRESS L/R
CHIP DETECT L/R
Caution/advisory/annunciators
ICE VANE L/R (amber)
ICE VANE EXT L/R (green)
AUTOFEATHER L/R
IGNITION ON L/R
Protection Engine operating parameters (overspeed,

overtemperature, overtorque)
N1 governor (overspeed)
Torque limiter (overtorque)
Magnetic chip detector (oil contamination
warning
Oil-to-fuel heat exchanger (fuel warming-
see Ice and Rain Protection)
Fuel shutoff valves

October 1998
CAE SimuFlite

October 1998
Flight Planning
Table of Contents
Frequent or Planned Destinations Record . . . . . . . 5-3
Flight Planning – General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Takeoff Weight Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Minimum Climb/Obstacle Clearance
(One Engine Inoperative) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Maximum Allowable Landing
Gross Weight Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Weight and Balance Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
International Flight Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Frequently Used International Terms . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
International Operations Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
ICAO Flight Plan Form Completion – Items 7-19 . . . . 5-21
FAA Flight Plan Form Completion Instructions . . . . . . 5-31
METAR/TAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite

October 1996
Flight Planning
Frequent or Planned Destinations Record

Airport Ident.
FBO Freq. Tel: ( )
Fax: ( )
Hotel Tel: ( )
Fax: ( )
Catering Tel: ( )
Airport Ident.
FBO Freq. Tel: ( )
Fax: ( )
Hotel Tel: ( )
Fax: ( )
Catering Tel: ( )
Airport Ident.
FBO Freq. Tel: ( )
Fax: ( )
Hotel Tel: ( )
Fax: ( )
Catering Tel: ( )
Notes

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Airport Ident.
FBO Freq. Tel: ( )
Fax: ( )
Hotel Tel: ( )
Fax: ( )
Catering Tel: ( )
Airport Ident.
FBO Freq. Tel: ( )
Fax: ( )
Hotel Tel: ( )
Fax: ( )
Catering Tel: ( )
Airport Ident.
FBO Freq. Tel: ( )
Fax: ( )
Hotel Tel: ( )
Fax: ( )
Catering Tel: ( )
Notes

October 1996
Flight Planning
Flight Planning – General

Takeoff Weight Determination
Charts in the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM), Section V, facilitate
determination of takeoff, climb, landing performance, as well as
flight planning at various parameters of weight, power, altitude,
and temperature.
Maximum takeoff weight is 12,500 lbs, unless restricted by the
following graphs:
■ Maximum Takeoff Weight Permitted by Enroute Climb
Requirements
■ Takeoff Weight to Achieve Positive One Engine Inoperative
Climb at Liftoff
■ Maximum Enroute Weight (FAR 135 operations)
■ Takeoff Weight to Meet FAR 25 Takeoff Climb Requirements
(Optional)
FAR 23 Climb Requirements are:
■ Surface to 400 ft AGL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POSITIVE
■ At 1,500 ft AGL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.75%
■ Balked Landing Climb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5%

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Takeoff Weight to Meet FAR 25 Takeoff

and Climb Requirements
The following information has been presented to provide the
option of limiting weight to obtain the performance specifications
of FAR 25 during critical takeoff and initial climb flight segments.
NOTE: Their use is not mandatory and full compliance

with other regulations applicable for FAR 25 is not implied.
The criteria for limiting weight involves the selection from the
Takeoff Weight graphs of the most adverse conditions of:
■ One Engine Inoperative Climb
■ Field Length to Acclerate-Stop
■ Field Length to Accelerate-Go
■ The takeoff flight path required to clear known obstacles
beyond the runway
Performance graphs associated with the above conditions are:
■ Takeoff Weight to Meet FAR 25 Takeoff Climb Requirements
graphs
■ Accelerate-Stop graphs
■ Accelerate-Go graphs
■ Net Gradient of Climb graphs
(Reference FAR 25.109, 25.111, 25.115, and 25.121)
The performance presented using this criteria is predicated on
the autofeather system being armed and operable.
The Ground Minimum Control Speed (VMCG) has been deter-
mined to be 84 knots. At this speed, control within 25 feet of the
runway centerline is possible.
The flowchart on the following page illustrates the steps neces-
sary to determine the maximum allowable takeoff weight.

September 2002
Flight Planning
Takeoff Weight Determination Procedure
AIRCRAFT AND
AMBIENT
CONDITIONS
STRUCTURAL
LIMITS
FAR 135 MAX

ENROUTE CLIMB LIFTOFF ENROUTE FAR 25 CLIMB
REQUIREMENTS CLIMB WEIGHT REQUIREMENTS
FLAPS UP
VS.
FLAPS 40%
USE LOWER
WEIGHT
FLAPS FLAPS
UP 40%
NO NO
YES YES
DETERMINE
FLAP SETTING
SET V SPEEDS
FINISHED
5-1

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Flaps UP vs. Flaps 40%

One Engine Inoperative
Example:
Associated Conditions:
■ Runway Length (Paved, Level, Dry) . . . . . . 4,700 FEET
■ Pressure Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6,000 FEET MSL
■ Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20°C
■ Takeoff Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,OOO LBS
■ Zero Wind
■ No Obstacle
■ Standard Gear
Distances
Flaps Flaps
UP 40%
Ground Roll 2820 2700
Accelerate- 4600 4600
Stop
Accelerate- 9800 7400
Go1
Climb 3.2% 2.1%
Gradient
V2 119 105
In this example, the most significant effect of using flaps 40% for
takeoff is a reduced Accelerate-Go figure which will result in
achieving a larger margin of safety on this particular runway.
Should an engine suddenly fail at V1, the airplane would not lift
off until passing the end of the runway if flaps were not used for
takeoff. By selecting Flaps Approach for takeoff, Accelerate-Stop
becomes limiting and remains within the available runway length.
1Air distance is 50% of Takeoff Field Length

September 2002
Flight Planning
Minimum Climb/Obstacle Clearance

One Engine Inoperative
TOTAL TAKE OFF PATH HORIZONTAL DISTANCE

THIRD FINAL
SEGMENT SEGMENT
SECOND TRANSITION
ACCELERATE GO (ACCELERATION)
SEGMENT
V2
VLOF REMAINDER
OF CLIMB
GEAR UP 400 FT
V1NR MINIMUM
BRAKE RELEASE
35 FT
ENGINES BOTH ONE INOPERATIVE
POWER TAKEOFF MAX CONTINUOUS POWER
ACCELERATING
AIRSPEED ACCELERATING V2 VYSE
RETRACTING
DOWN RETRACTED
LANDING
GEAR
FLAPS 0° OR 40% RETRACTION RETRACTED
(IF REQUIRED)
MIN. T.O. FLIGHT
PATH CLIMB POSITIVE 0.75% 1.2%
GRADIENT
5-2

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Landing Gross Weight Determination

Charts in the AFM, Section V, facilitate determination of
approach and landing performance, landing field requirements,
and approach speed values.
When using the charts in Section V, remember the following
important issues:
Climb – Balked Landing Chart
■ Balked landing climb speed is 100 kts.
(21 kts below VYSE at gross weight)
■ Flaps and gear are left in the landing configuration until
obstacles are cleared. Flap and gear retraction occurs while
transitioning to a normal climb attitude, airspeed, and power
configuration.
■ There is a 10°C penalty for operations with ice vanes extended
Normal Landing Distance without Propeller
Reversing
■ Power is retarded to maintain an 800 foot-per-minute (fpm)
rate of descent. 900 fpm needed with flaps UP.
■ Landing distances assume using maximum braking without
sliding the tires.
Normal Landing Distance with Propeller Reversing
■ Power is retarded to maintain 1,000 fpm rate of descent.
■ Landing distances assume using maximum braking without
sliding the tires.
■ Maximum propeller reverse is applied until reaching a
complete stop.

September 2002
Flight Planning
Landing Path Profile
LANDING CLIMB
(ALL ENGINE
2.5% MIN. GRADIENT)
APPROACH-CLIMB
(ENGINE-OUT
2.1% MIN. GRADIENT)
REF SO
50'
LANDING DISTANCE
THRESHOLD
5-3

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Sample Weight and Balance

Loading Form
SERIAL: REGISTRATION DATE:
NO:
WEIGHT ARM MOM/100
REF ITEM *( ) (IN) *( )
1. BASIC EMPTY WEIGHT
2. CREW
3. PASSENGERS OR CARGO
4. BAGGAGE
5. CABINET CONTENTS
7. FUEL LOADING
9. LESS FUEL FOR START,

TAXI, AND TAKEOFF 90 177
11. FUEL LOADING

(FROM LINE 7)
12. MINUS TOTAL FUEL
USED TO DESIGNATION
INCLUDING START,
TAXI, AND TAKEOFF
13. FUEL REMAINING
(MOM/100 FROM USABLE
FUEL TABLE)
14. PLUS ZERO FUEL WEIGHT
(FROM LINE 6)
15. LANDING CONDITION
* ENTER UNITS USED IN LB & LB-IN OR KG & KG-IN.

September 2002
Flight Planning
Weight and Balance Determination

To determine than an aircraft is (and remains) within the gross
weight and center of gravity limitations, use the checklist below
to complete a loading schedule (sample on opposite page).
1. Record the basic empty weight and moment from the Basic
Empty Weight and Balance form (or from the latest superced-
ing forms). The moment must be divided by 100 to correspond
to Useful Load Moment tables presented in the AFM.
2. Record the weight and corresponding moment of each item to
be carried. These values are found on the Useful Load Weight
and Moment tables.
3. Total the weight column and moment column. The total weight,
without usable fuel, must not exceed the Maximum Zero Fuel
Weight for the aircraft.
All weight in excess of this limitation must be fuel.
4. Enter the desired fuel loading weight and moment from the
Useful Load Weights and Moments – Usable Fuel table.
The auxiliary tanks may be used only when the main
tanks are completely filled.
5. Subtract 90 lbs of fuel at an average moment of 177 to allow
for fuel consumption for Start, Taxi, and Takeoff to arrive at the
Takeoff Condition. The total takeoff weight must not exceed
the maximum allowable takeoff weight and the total moment
must be within the minimum and maximum moments shown
on the Moment Limits vs. Weight table or graph.
6. Using the data supplied in the Performance Section of the
AFM, calculate the fuel remaining at the landing destination by
subtracting the total weight of fuel consumed (including Start,
Taxi, and Takeoff fuel) from the original fuel loading.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
7. For Landing condition weight and balance, add the Landing

Fuel weight and moment to the Zero Fuel weight and moment
values. The landing moment must be within the minimum and
maximum moments shown on the Moment Limits vs. Weight
table for that weight.
If the total moment is less than the minimum moment allowed,
useful load items must be shifted aft or forward load items
reduced. If the quantity or location of load items is changed,
the calculations must be revised and the moments rechecked.
Weight – Shift Calculations

Should either the takeoff or landing weight and balance fall out-
side specified limitations, use the following methods to bring the
aircraft load back into allowable limits.
1. Determine the necessary distance the CG must be moved to
bring the airplane back into limits by subtracting the maximum
moment from the calculated moment (or for forward CG prob-
lems; calculated moment from the minimum moment).
2. Divide the moment difference by the calculated takeoff weight
and multiply that value by 100. The result is the distance the
CG must be shifted.
3. Determine the required distance to move a specific weight by
multiplying Takeoff Weight and the desired shift in CG. Divide
this product by the weight to be moved.
Weight to be Shifted Desired Change in CG
=
Takeoff Weight Weight Arm Distance
4. The result is the minimum distance required for a specific
weight to be moved in order to shift the center of gravity by the
required amount.

September 2002
Flight Planning
International Flight Planning

Frequently Used International Terms
International Term Explanation
ACC Area Control Center
ADCUS Advise Customs
AFIL Air-Filed ICAO Flight Plan
ARINC Aeronautical Radio Inc.
ATS Air Traffic Services
BERNA Swiss Radio Service
DEC General Declaration (customs)
ETP Equal Time Point (navigation)
FIC Flight Information Center
FIR Flight Information Region
GCA Ground Controlled Approach
GEOMETER A clear plastic attachment to a globe that

aids in making surface measurements and
determining points on the globe
IATA International Air Traffic Association

ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
MET See METAR
METAR Routine Aviation Weather Reports
MNPS Minimum Navigation Performance
Specifications
NAT North Atlantic

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
International Term Explanation
NOPAC North Pacific

OAG Official Airline Guide
OKTA Measure of cloud cover in eighths (five
OKTAs constitute a ceiling)
OTS Organized Track Structure
PPO Prior Permission Only
PSR Point of Safe Return (navigation)
QFE Used in some nations; an altimeter setting

that causes the altimeter to read zero feet
when on the ground
QNE Altimeter setting used at or above

transition altitude (FL 180 in U.S.); this
setting is always 29.92
QNH Altimeter setting that causes altimeter to

read field elevation on the ground
SITA Societe Internationale de
Telecommunications Aeronautiques;
international organization provides global
telecommunications network information to
the air transport industry
SPECI Aviation selected special WX reports
SSR Secondary Surveillance Radar
TAF Terminal Airdrome Forecast
UIR Upper Information Region
UTA Upper Control Area
WWV/WWVH Time and frequency standard broadcast
stations

September 2002
Flight Planning
International Operations Checklist

Aircrews are required to carry all appropriate FAA licenses and
at least an FCC Restricted Radio Telephone Operations license.
In addition, passport, visas, and an International Certificate of
Vaccination are often required. The International Flight
Information Manual (IFIM) specifies passport, inoculation and
visa requirements for entry to each country.
The IFIM is a collection of data from Aeronautical Information
Publications (AIP) published by the civil aviation authorities
(CAA) of various countries.
The following detailed checklist should be helpful in establishing
international operations requirements and procedures. You may
want to use it to prepare your own customized checklist for your
organization’s planned destinations.
I. DOCUMENTATION
PERSONNEL, CREW
❒ Airman’s certificates
❒ Physical
❒ Passport
❒ Extra photos
❒ Visa
❒ Tourist card
❒ Proof of citizenship (not driver’s license)
❒ Immunization records
❒ Traveler’s checks
❒ Credit cards
❒ Cash
❒ Passenger manifest (full name, passport no.)
❒ Trip itinerary
❒ International driver’s license

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
AIRCRAFT
❒ Airworthiness certificate
❒ Registration
❒ Radio licenses
❒ MNPS certification
❒ Aircraft flight manual
❒ Maintenance records
❒ Certificates of insurance (U.S. military and foreign)
❒ Import papers (for aircraft of foreign manufacture)
II. OPERATIONS
PERMITS
❒ Flight authorization letter
❒ Overflights
❒ Landing
❒ Advance notice
❒ Export licenses (navigation equipment)
❒ Military
❒ Customs overflight
❒ Customs landing rights
SERVICES
Inspection
❒ Customs forms
❒ Immigrations
❒ Agricultural (disinfectant)
Ground
❒ Handling agents
❒ FBOs

September 2002
Flight Planning
❒ Fuel (credit cards, carnets)

❒ Prist
❒ Methanol
❒ Anti-ice/De-ice
❒ Maintenance
❒ Flyaway kit (spares)
❒ Fuel contamination check
Financial
❒ Credit cards
❒ Carnets
❒ Letters of credit
❒ Banks
❒ Servicing air carriers
❒ Handling
❒ Fuelers
❒ Traveler’s checks
❒ Cash
COMMUNICATIONS
Equipment
❒ VHF
❒ UHF
❒ HF SSB
❒ Headphones
❒ Portables (ELTs, etc.)
❒ Spares
Agreements
❒ ARINC
❒ BERNA (Switzerland)
❒ SITA
❒ Stockholm

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
NAVIGATION
Equipment
❒ VOR
❒ DME
❒ ADF
❒ Inertial
❒ VLF/OMEGA
❒ LORAN
❒ GPS
Publications
❒ Onboard computer (update)
❒ En route charts (VFR, IFR)
❒ Plotting charts
❒ Approach charts (area, terminal)
❒ NAT message (current)
❒ Flight plans
❒ Blank flight plans
III. OTHER PUBLICATIONS

❒ Operations manual
❒ International Flight Information Manual
❒ Maintenance manuals
❒ Manufacturer’s sources
❒ World Aviation Directory
❒ Interavia ABC
❒ Airports International Directory
❒ MNPS/NOPAC
❒ Customs Guide

September 2002
Flight Planning
IV. SURVIVAL EQUIPMENT

❒ Area survival kit (with text)
❒ Medical kit (with text)
❒ Emergency locator transmitter
❒ Floatation equipment
❒ Raft
❒ Life Jackets
V. FACILITATION AIDS
❒ U.S. Department of State
❒ U.S. Department of Commerce
❒ U.S. Customs Service
❒ National Flight Data Center (FAA) Notams
❒ FAA Office of International Aviation
❒ FAA Aviation Security
VI. OTHER CONSIDERATIONS
❒ Pre-flight planner
❒ Aircraft locks
❒ Spare keys
❒ Security devices
❒ Commissary supplies
❒ Electrical adapters (razors, etc.)
❒ Ground transportation
❒ Hotel reservations
❒ NBAA International Feedback cards
❒ Catering
❒ WX service
❒ Reservations
❒ Slot times

September 2002
AIR TRAFFIC SERVICES SERVICES DE LA CIRCULATION AERIENNE
ICAO FLIGHT PLAN OACI PLAN DE VOL
PRIORITY / PRIORITE ADRESSEE(S) / DESTINATAIRE(S)
FF
FILING TIME / HEURE DE DEPOT ORIGINATOR / EXPEDITEUR
SPECIFIC IDENTIFICATION OF ADDRESSEE(S) AND/OR ORIGINATOR / IDENTIFICATION PRECISE DU9DES0 DESTINATAIRE(S) ET/OU DE L'EXPEDITEUR
MESSAGE / TYPE DE MESSAGE AIRCRAFT IDENTIFICATION / IDENTIFICATION DE L'AERONEF FLIGHT RULES / REGLES DE VOL TYPE OF FLIGHT / TYPE DE VOL
7 8
WAKE TURBULENCE CAT
NUMBER / NOMBRE TYPE OF AIRCRAFT / TYPE D'AERONEF CAT. DE TURBULENCE DE SILLAGE EQUIPMENT / EQUIPMENENT
9
10
DEPARTURE AERODROME / AERODROME DE DEPART TIME / HEURE
13
CRUSING SPEED
VITESSE CROISIERE LEVEL / NIVEAU ROUTE / ROUTE
15
TOTAL EFT / DUREE TOTALE ESTIMEE

DESTINATION AERODROME ALTN AERODROME 2ND ALTN AERODROME
16 AERODROME DE DESTINATION HR. MIN. AERODROME DE DEGAGEMENT 2EME AERODROME DE DEGAGEMENT
18 OTHER INFORMATION / RESEIGNEMENTS DIVERS
5-22
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION (NOT TO BE TRANSMITTED IN FPL MESSAGES)
RENSEIGMNEMENTS COMPLEMENTAIRES (A NE PAS TRANSMETTRE DANS LES MESSAGES SE PLAN DE VOL DEPOSE)
19 ENEURANCE / AUTONOMIE EMERGENCY RADIO / RADIO DE SECOURS
HR. MIN. PERSONS ON BOARD / PERSONNES A BORD UHF VHF ELBA
E P R U V E
SURVIVAL EQUIPMENT / EQUIPEMENT DE SURVIE JACKETS / GILETS DE SAUVETAGE
POLAR DESERT MARITIME JUNGLE LIGHT FLUORES
MARITIME UHF VHF
CAE SimuFlite
POLAIRE DESERT JUNGLE LAMPE FLUORES
S P D M J J L F U V
DINGHIES / CANOTS
NUMBER CAPACITY COVER COLOR
NUMBRE CAPACITE COUVERTURE COULEUR
D C
AIRCRAFT COLOUR AND MARKINGS / COUEUR ET MARQUES DE L'AERONEF
A
REMARKS / REMARQUES
N
PILOT-IN-COMMAND / PILOTE COMMANDANT DE BORD
Developed for Training Purposes
C )
FILED BY / DEPOSE PAR SPACE RESERVED FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS / ESPACE RESERVE A DES FINS SUPPLEMENTAIRES
ICAO International Flight Plan Form
September 2002
King Air 200
Flight Planning
ICAO Flight Plan Form Completion –

Items 7-19
Complete all ICAO flight plans prior to departure. Although the
ICAO flight plan form is printed in numerous languages, the for-
mat is always the same.
Always enter cruising speed and cruising level as a group. In the
body of the flight plan form, if one item changes, the other item
must be re-entered to keep speed and level a matched pair.
Always enter latitude and longitude as 7 or 11 characters. If
entering minutes of one, enter minutes of the other as well, even
if zeros.
Significant points should not be more than one hour apart.
Consider entering overflight/landing permissions after RMK/ in
Item 18.
Item 7: Aircraft Identification

(7 characters maximum)
Insert (A) the aircraft registration marking or (B) aircraft operating
agency ICAO designator followed by the flight identification.
A. Insert only the aircraft registration marking (e.g., EIAKO,
4XBCD, N2567GA) if one of the following is true:
■ the aircraft’s radiotelephony call sign consists of the aircraft
registration marking alone (e.g., OOTEK)
■ the registration marking is preceded by the ICAO telephone
designator for the aircraft operating agency (e.g., SABENA
OOTEK
■ the aircraft is not equipped with radio.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
B. Insert the ICAO designator for the aircraft operating agency

followed by the flight identification (e.g., KL511, WT214,
K7123, JH25) if the aircraft’s radiotelephony call sign consists
of the ICAO telephony designator for the operating agency fol-
lowed by the flight identification (e.g. KLM 511, NIGERIA 213,
KILO UNIFORM 123, JULIETT HOTEL 25).
Item 8: Flight Rules and Type of Flight

(1 or 2 characters)
Flight Rules: Insert one of the following letters to denote the
intended flight rules category:
I if IFR
V if VFR
Y if IFR first*
Z if VFR first*
*Note: Specify in Item 15 (Route) the point(s) where a
flight rules change is planned.
Type of Flight: Insert one of the following letters to denote the
type of flight when so required by the appropriate ATS authority:
S if scheduled air service
N if non-scheduled air transport operation
G if general aviation
M if military
X if other than the above
Item 9: Number (1 or 2 characters) and Type of

Aircraft (2 to 4 characters) and Wake Turbulence
Category (1 character)
Number of Aircraft: Insert number of aircraft if more than one.
Type of Aircraft: Insert the appropriate designator as specified
in ICAO Doc 8643, Aircraft Type Designators. If no such desig-
nator has been assigned, or in case of formation flight compris-
ing more than one aircraft type, insert ZZZZ, then specify in Item
18 the number(s) and type(s) of aircraft, preceded by TYP/.

September 2002
Flight Planning
Wake Turbulence Category: Insert / + H, M, or L:

/H Heavy – maximum certificated T/O mass of 136,000 kg
(300,000 lbs) or more
/M Medium – maximum certificated T/O mass of less than
136,000 kg but more than 7,000 kg (between 15,500
and 300,000 lbs)
/L Light – maximum certificated T/O mass of 7,000 kg or
less (15,500 lbs)
Item 10: Equipment

Radio Communication, Navigation, and Approach Aid
Equipment: Insert one of the following letters:
N if COM/NAV/approach aid equipment is not carried or
is inoperative.
S if standard COM/NAV/approach aid equipment
(VHF RTF, ADF, VOR, ILS, or equipment prescribed by
ATS authority) is on board and operative;
and/or insert one of the following letters to indicate corresponding
COMM/NAV/approach aid equipment is available and operative:
A not allocated O VOR
B not allocated P not allocated
C LORAN C Q not allocated
D DME R RNP type certification
E not allocated
F ADF T TACAN
G (GNSS) U UHF RTF
H HF RTF V VHF RTF
I Inertial Navig. W when prescribed by ATS
J (Data Link) X when prescribed by ATS
K (MLS) Y when prescribed by ATS
L ILS Z Other (specify in Item 18)
M Omega

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
SSR Equipment: Insert one of the following letters to describe

the operative SSR equipment on board:
N None
A Transponder Mode A (4 digits- 4 096 codes)
C Transponder Mode A and Mode C
X Transponder Mode S without aircraft ID or pressure-
altitude transmission
P Transponder Mode S with pressure altitude transmis-
sion, but without aircraft ID transmission
I Transponder Mode S with aircraft ID transmission, but
without pressure-altitude transmission
S Transponder Mode S with both pressure altitude and
aircraft ID transmission
Item 13: Departure Aerodrome (4 characters) and

Time (4 characters)
Departure Aerodrome: Insert one of the following:
■ ICAO four-letter location indicator of the departure aerodrome.
■ If no location indicator assigned, insert ZZZZ, then specify in
Item 18 the name of the aerodrome, preceded by DEP/.
■ If flight plan submitted while in flight, insert AFIL, then specify
in Item 18 the four-letter location indicator of the ATS unit from
which supplementary flight plan data can be obtained, pre-
ceded by DEP/.
Time: Insert one of the following:
■ for a flight plan submitted before departure: the estimated off-
block time
■ for a flight plan submitted while in flight: the actual or esti-
mated time over the first point of the route to which the flight
plan applies.

September 2002
Flight Planning
Item 15: Cruising Speed (5 characters), Cruising

Level (5 characters), and Route
Cruising Speed: Insert the true air speed for the first or whole
cruising portion of the flight in one of the following forms:
■ Kilometers per hour: K + 4 figures (e.g., K0830)
■ Knots: N + 4 figures (e.g., N0485)
■ Mach number: M + 3 figures (e.g., M082) if prescribed by ATS.
Cruising Level: Insert the planned cruising level for the first or
whole portion of the planned route using one of the following
forms:
■ Flight level: F + 3 figures (e.g., F085; F330)
■ Standard metric level in tens of metres: S + 4 figures (e.g.,
S1130) if prescribed by ATS.
■ Altitude in hundreds of feet: A + 3 figures (e.g., A045; A100)
■ Altitude in tens of metres: M + 4 figures (e.g., M0840)
■ For uncontrolled VFR flights: VFR
Route: Include changes of speed, level, and/or flight rules.
For flights along designated ATS routes:
■ If the departure aerodrome is on or connected to the ATS
route, insert the designator of the first ATS route.
■ If the departure aerodrome is not on or connected to the ATS
route, insert the letters DCT followed by the point of joining the
first ATS route, followed by the designator of the ATS route.
■ Insert each point at which a change of speed, change of level,
change of ATS route, and/or a change of flight rules is
planned. For a transition between lower and upper ATS
routes oriented in the same direction, do not insert the point
of transition.
■ In each case, follow with the designator of the next ATS route
segment even if it is the same as the previous one (or with
DCT if the flight to the next point is outside a designated route),
unless both points are defined by geographical coordinates.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Flights outside designated ATS routes:

■ Insert points not normally more than 30 minutes flying time or
200 nautical miles apart, including each point at which a

change of speed or level, a change of track, or a change of
flight rules is planned.
■ When required by ATS, define the track of flights operating
predominantly in an east-west direction between 70°N and

70°S by reference to significant points formed by the inter-
sections of half or whole degrees of latitude with meridians
spaced at intervals of 10 degrees of longitude. For flights
operating in areas outside those latitudes, define the tracks
by significant points formed by the intersection of parallels of
latitude with meridians normally spaced not to exceed one
hour’s flight time. Establish additional significant points as
deemed necessary.
For flights operating predominantly in a north-south direction,
define tracks by reference to significant points formed by the
intersection of whole degrees of longitude with specified par-
allels of latitude that are spaced at 5 degrees.
■ Insert DCT between successive points unless both points are
defined by geographical coordinates or bearing and distance.

Examples of Route Sub-entries
Enter a space between each sub-entry.
1. ATS route (2 to 7 characters): BCN1, B1, R14, KODAP2A
2. Significant point (2 to 11 characters): LN, MAY, HADDY
■ degrees only (7 characters – insert zeros, if necessary):
46N078W
■ degrees and minutes (11 characters – insert zeros if
necessary): 4620N07805W
■ bearing and distance from navigation aid (NAV aid ID [2 to
3 characters] + bearing and distance from the NAV aid

[6 characters – insert zeros if necessary]): a point 180
magnetic at a distance of 40 nautical miles from
VOR “DUB” = DUB180040

September 2002
Flight Planning
3. Change of speed or level (max 21 characters):

insert point of change/cruising speed and level –
LN/N0284A045, MAY/N0305F180, HADDY/N0420F330,
DUB180040/M084F350
4. Change of flight rules (max 3 characters):
insert point of change (space) change to IFR or VFR –
LN VFR, LN/N0284A050 IFR
5. Cruise climb (max 28 characters)
insert C/point to start climb/climb speed / levels –
C/48N050W / M082F290F350
C/48N050W / M082F290PLUS
C/52N050W / M220F580F620
Item 16: Destination Aerodrome (4 characters),

Total Estimated Elapsed Time (EET, 4 characters),
Alternate Aerodrome(s) (4 characters)
Destination aerodrome: insert ICAO four-letter location indicator.
If no indicator assigned, insert ZZZZ.
Total EET: insert accumulated estimated elapsed time. If no loca-
tion indicator assigned, specify in Item 18 the name of the aero-
drome, preceded by DEST/.
Alternate aerodrome(s): insert ICAO four-letter location indica-
tor. If no indicator assigned to alternate, insert ZZZZ and spec-
ify in Item 18 the name of the alternate aerodrome, preceded
by ALTN/.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Item 18: Other Information

This section may be used to record specific information as
required by appropriate ATS authority or per regional air naviga-
tion agreements. Insert the appropriate indicator followed by an
oblique stroke (/) and the necessary information. See examples
below.
■ Estimated elapsed time/significant points or FIR boundary
designators: EET/CAP0745, XYZ0830.
■ Revised destination aerodrome route details/ICAO aerodrome
location indicator: RIF/DTA HEC KLAX. (Revised route sub-
ject to reclearance in flight.)
■ Aircraft registration markings, if different from aircraft I.D. in
Item 7: REG/N1234.
■ SELCAL code: SEL/ .
■ Operator’s name, if not obvious from the aircraft I.D. in Item
7: OPR/ .
■ Reason for special handling by ATS (e.g., hospital aircraft,
one-engine inoperative): STS/HOSP, STS/ONE ENG INOP.
■ As explained in Item 9: TYP/ .
■ Aircraft performance data: PER/ .
■ Communication equipment significant data: COM/UHF Only.
■ Navigation equipment significant data: NAV/INS.
■ As explained in Item 13: DEP/ .
■ As explained in Item 16: DEST/ , or ALTN/ .
■ Other remarks as required by ATS or deemed necessary:
RMK/ .

September 2002
Flight Planning
Item 19: Supplementary Information

Endurance: insert fuel endurance in hours and minutes.
Persons on Board: insert total persons on board, including pas-
sengers and crew. If unknown at time of filing, insert TBN (to be
notified).
Emergency Radio, Survival Equipment, Jackets, Dinghies: cross
out letter indicators of all items not available; complete blanks as
required for items available. (jackets: L = life jackets with lights,
J = life jackets with fluorescein).
ICAO Position Reporting Format

Outside the U.S., position reports are required unless specifical-
ly waived by the controlling agency.
Initial Contact (Frequency Change)
1. Call sign
2. Flight level (if not level, report climbing to or descending to
cleared altitude)
3. Estimating (next position) at (time) GMT
Position Report
1. Call sign
2. Position (if position in doubt, use phonetic identifier. For
oceanic reports, first report the latitude, then the longitude
(e.g., 50N 60W)
3. Time (GMT) or (UST)
4. Altitude or flight level (if not level, report climbing to or
descending to altitude)
5. Next position
6. Estimated elapsed time (EET)

September 2002
US DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION TIME STARTED SPECIALIST
5-32
FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA USE ONLY) PILOT BRIEFING VNR INITIALS
FLIGHT PLAN STOPOVER

1. TYPE 2. AIRCRAFT 3. AIRCRAFT TYPE/ 4. TRUE 5. DEPARTURE POINT 6. DEPARTURE TIME 7. CRUSING
IDENTIFICATION SPECIAL EQUIPMENT AIRSPEED ALTITUDE
VFR PROPOSED (Z) ACTUAL (Z)
IFR
DVFR
8. ROUTE OF FLIGHT
CAE SimuFlite
9. DESTINATION (Name of airport 10. EST TIME ENROUTE 11. REMARKS

FAA Flight Plan Form
and city)
HOURS MINUTES
12. FUEL ON BOARD 13. ALTERNATE AIRPORT(S) 14. PILOTS NAME, ADDRESS & TELEPHONE NUMBER & AIRCRAFT HOME BASE 15. NUMBER
ABOARD
HOURS MINUTES

17. DESTINATION CONTACT / TELEPHONE (OPTIONAL)
18. COLOR OF AIRCRAFT CIVIL AIRCRAFT PILOTS. FAR Part 91 requires you to file an IFR flight plan to operate under instrument flight rules in
controlled airspace. Failure to file could result in civil penality not to exceed $1,000 for each violation (Section 901 of the
Federal Aviation Act of 1956, as amended). Filing of a VFR flight plan is recomended as a good operating practice. See also
Part 99 for requirements concerning DVFR flight plans.
FAA Form 7233-1 (8-82) CLOSE VFR FLIGHT PLAN WITH_________________FSS ON ARRIVAL
September 2002
King Air 200
Flight Planning
FAA Flight Plan Form

Completion Instructions
Block 1 Check the type flight plan. Check both the VFR
and IFR blocks if composite VFR/IFR.
Block 2 Enter your complete aircraft identification, including
the prefix “N,” if applicable.
Block 3 Enter the designator for the aircraft, or if unknown,
the aircraft manufacturer’s name.
When filing an IFR flight plan for a TCAS equipped
aircraft, add the prefix T for TCAS.
Example: T/G4/R.
When filing an IFR flight plan for flight in an aircraft
equipped with a radar beacon transponder, DME
equipment, TACAN-only equipment or a combina-
tion of both, identify equipment capability by adding
a suffix to the AIRCRAFT TYPE, preceded by a
slant (/) as follows:
/X no transponder
/T transponder with no Mode C
/U transponder with Mode C
/D DME, but no transponder
/B DME and transponder, but no Mode C
/A DME and transponder with Mode C
/M TACAN only, but no transponder
/N TACAN only and transponder, but with no
Mode C
/P TACAN only and transponder with Mode C
/Y LORAN, VOR/DME, or INS only, but with no
transponder
/C LORAN, VOR/DME, INS, and transponder, but
with no Mode C
/I LORAN, VOR/DME, INS, and transponder with
Mode C

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
ADVANCED RNAV WITH TRANSPONDER AND

MODE C (if an aircraft is unable to operate with a
transponder and/or Mode C, it will revert to the
appropriate code listed above under Area
Navigation
/E Flight Management System (FMS) with enroute,
terminal, and approach capability.
Equipment requirements are:
(a) Dual FMS which meets the specifications of
AC25-15, Approval of Flight Management
Systems in Transport Category Airplanes;
AC20-129, Airworthiness Approval of Vertical
Navigation (VNAV) Systems for use in the
US National Airspace System (NAS) and
Alaska’ AC20-130, Airworthiness Approval of
Multi-Sensor Navigation Systems for use in
the US National Airspace System (NAS) and
Alaska; or equivalent criteria as approved by
Flight Standards.
(b) A flight director and autopilot control system
capable of following the lateral and vertical
FMS flight plan.
(c) At least dual inertail reference units (IRUs).
(d) A database containing the waypoints and
speed/altitude constraints for the route and/or
procedure to be flown that is automatically
loaded into the FMS flight plan.
(e) An electronic map.
/F A single FMS with enroute, terminal, and
approach capability that meets the equipment
requirements of /E, (a) through (d), above.
(U.S. and U.S. territories only unless otherwise
authorized).
/G Global Positioning System (GPS)/Global
Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) equipped
aircraft with enroute and terminal capability.
September 2002
Flight Planning
/R Required Navigational Performance (Denotes

capability to operate in RNP designated air-
space and routes).
/W Reduced Vertical Separation Minima (RVSM).
/Q Required Navigation Performance (RNP) and
Reduced Vertical Separation Minima (RVSM)
(Indicate approval for application of RNP and
RVSM separation standards). It should be
noted that /Q is for automation purposes only
and will not be filed by system users. FAA
processors will convert the combination of /R +
/W to = /Q.
Block 4 Enter your true airspeed (TAS).
Block 5 Enter the departure airport identifier code, or if
code is unknown, the name of the airport.
Block 6 Enter the proposed departure time in Coordinated
Universal Time (UTC). If airborne, specify the actu-
al or proposed departure time as appropriate.
Block 7 Enter the appropriate IFR altitude (to assist the
briefer in providing weather and wind information).
Block 8 Define the route of flight by using NAVAID identifier
codes, airways, jet routes, and waypoints.
Block 9 Enter the destination airport identifier code, or if
unknown, the airport name. Include the city name
(or even the state name) if needed for clarity.
Block 10 Enter estimated time enroute in hours and minutes.
Block 11 Enter only those remarks pertinent to ATC or to the
clarification of other flight plan information, such as
the appropriate call sign associated with the desig-
nator filed in Block 2 or ADCUS.
Block 12 Specify the fuel on board in hours and minutes.
Block 13 Specify an alternate airport, if desired or required.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Block 14 Enter the complete name, address, and telephone

number of the pilot in command. Enter sufficient
information to identify home base, airport, or oper-
ator. This information is essential for search and
rescue operations.
Block 15 Enter total number of persons on board (POB),
including crew.
Block 16 Enter the aircraft’s predominant colors.
Block 17 Record the FSS name for closing the flight plan. If
the flight plan is closed with a different FSS or
facility, state the recorded FSS name that would
normally have closed your flight plan. Information
transmitted to the destination FSS consists only of
that in Blocks 3, 9, and 10. Estimated time enroute
(ETE) will be converted to the correct estimated
time of arrival (ETA).
Optional Record a destination telephone number to assist
search and rescue contact should you fail to report
or cancel your flight plan within 1/2 hour after your
estimated time of arrival (ETA).

September 2002
Flight Planning
ICAO Weather Format

Sample METAR
A routine aviation weather report on observed weather, or
METAR, is issued at hourly or half-hourly intervals. A special
weather report on observed weather, or SPECI, is issued when
certain criteria are met. Both METAR and SPECI use the same
codes.
A forecast highly likely to occur, or TREND, covers a period of
two hours from the time of the observation. A TREND forecast
indicates significant changes in respect to one or more of the fol-
lowing elements: surface wind, visibility, weather, or clouds.
TREND forecasts use many of the same codes as TAFs.
Most foreign countries may append a TREND to a METAR or
SPECI. In the U.S., however, a TREND is not included in a
METAR or SPECI.
The following example indicates how to read a METAR.
KHPN 201955Z 22015G25KT 2SM

R22L/1000FT TSRA OVC010CB 18/16 A2990
RERAB25 BECMG 2200 24035G55
KHPN. ICAO location indicator.

201955Z. Date and time of issuance. METARs are issued hourly.
22015G25KT. Surface wind (same as TAF). If the first three dig-
its are VAR, the wind is variable with wind speed following. If
direction varies 60° or more during the ten minutes immediately
preceding the observation, the two extreme directions are indi-
cated with the letter V inserted between them (e.g., 280V350).
NOTE: G must vary 10 kts or greater to report gust.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
2SM. Prevailing horizontal visibility in statute miles. In the U.S.,

issued in statute miles with the appropriate suffix (SM) append-
ed. When a marked directional variation exists, the reported min-
imum visibility is followed by one of the eight compass points to
indicate the direction (e.g., 2SMNE).
R22L/1000FT. The runway visual range group. The letter R
begins the group and is followed by the runway description
(22L). The range in feet follows the slant bar (1000FT). In other
countries range is in meters and no suffix is used.
TSRA OVC010CB. Thunderstorms (TS) and rain (RA) with an
overcast layer at 1,000 ft and cumulonimbus clouds.
NOTE: More than one cloud layer may be reported.
18/16. Temperatures in degrees Celsius. The first two digits (18)

are observed air temperature; the last two digits (16) are dew
point temperature. A temperature below zero is reported with a
minus (M) prefix code (e.g., M06).
A2990. Altimeter setting. In the U.S., A is followed by inches and
hundredths; in most other countries, Q is followed by hectopas-
cals (i.e., millibars).
RERAB25. Recent operationally significant condition. A two let-
ter code for recent (RE) is followed by a two letter code for the
condition (e.g., RA for rain). A code for beginning or ending (B or
E) and a two-digit time in minutes during the previous hour.
When local circumstances also warrant, wind shear may also be
indicated (e.g., WS LDG RWY 22).
NOTE: A remark (RMK) code is used in the U.S. to

precede supplementary data of recent operationally signifi-
cant weather.
NOTE: RMK [SLP 013] breaks down SEA LVL press to

nearest tenth (e.g., 1001.3 reported as SLP 013).

September 2002
Flight Planning
BECMG AT 2200 24035G55. A TREND forecast. The becoming

code (BECMG) is followed by a when sequence (AT 2200) and
the expected change (e.g., surface winds at 240° true at 35 kts
with gusts up to 55 kts).
NOTE: For more information on METAR/TAF, consult the

FAA brochure “New Aviation Weather Format METAR/TAF.”
Copies may be obtained by writing to: FAA/ASY-20, 400 7th
Street, S.W. Washington, DC 20590.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

September 2002
Flight Planning
Aeronautical Lighting and Visual

Aids
Approach Light Systems (ALS)
ALS provide the basic means to transition from instrument flight
to visual flight for landing. Operational requirements dictate the
sophistication and configuration of the approach light system for
a particular runway.
ALS are configurations of signal lights starting at the landing thres-
hold and extending into the approach area to a distance of 2,400-
3,000 feet for precision instrument runways and 1,400-1,500 feet
for non-precision instrument runways. Some systems include
sequenced flashing lights which appear to the pilot as a ball of
light traveling towards the runway at high speed (twice a second).
SSALR
ALSF-2 ALSF-1 MALSR
Flashing Flashing FLASHING

Light Light LIGHT
Steady Steady STEADY
Burning Burning BURNING
Light Light LIGHT
NOTE:˚Civil ALSF-2 may be

operated as SSALR during
favorable weather conditions.
MALSF ODALS
REIL
Flashing Omnidirectional
Light Flashing
LANDING Steady Light
APPROACH Burning
Light

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
In-Runway Lighting
Runway Centerline Lighting System (RCLS). Runway cen-
terline lights are installed on some precision approach runways
to facilitate landing under adverse visibility conditions. They are
located along the runway centerline and are spaced at 50-foot
intervals. When viewed from the landing threshold, the runway
centerline lights are white until the last 3,000 feet of the runway.
The white lights begin to alternate with red for the next 2,000
feet, and for the last 1,000 feet of the runway, all centerline
lights are red.
Touchdown Zone Lights (TDZL). Touchdown zone lights are
installed on some precision approach runways to indicate the
touchdown zone when landing under adverse visibility condi-
tions. They consist of two rows of transverse light bars dis-
posed symmetrically about the runway centerline. The system
consists of steady-burning white lights which start 100 feet
beyond the landing threshold and extend to 3,000 feet beyond
the landing threshold or to the midpoint of the runway, whichev-
er is less.
Taxiway Lead-Off Lights. Taxiway lead-off lights extend from
the runway centerline to a point on an exit taxiway to expedite
movement of aircraft from the runway. These lights alternate
green and yellow from the runway centerline to the runway
holding position or the ILS/MLS critical area, as appropriate.
Land and Hold Short Lights. Land and hold short lights are
used to indicate the hold short point on certain runways which
are approved for Land and Hold Short Operations (LAHSO).
Land and hold short lights consist of a row of pulsing white
lights installed across the runway at the hold short point. Where
installed, the lights will be on anytime that LAHSO is in effect.
These lights will be off when LAHSO is not in effect.

September 2002
Flight Planning
Taxiway Lights
Taxiway Edge Lights. Taxiway edge lights are used to outline
the edges of taxiways during periods of darkness or restricted
visibility conditions. These fixtures emit blue light.
NOTE: At most major airports these lights have variable

intensity settings and may be adjusted at pilot request or
when deemed necessary by the controller.
Taxiway Centerline Lights. Taxiway centerline lights are used

to facilitate ground traffic under low visibility conditions. They
are located along the taxiway centerline in a straight line on
straight portions, on the centerline of curved portions, and
along designated taxiing paths in portions of runways, ramp,
and apron areas. Taxiway centerline lights are steady burning
and emit green light.
Clearance Bar Lights. Clearance bar lights are installed at
holding positions on taxiways in order to increase the conspic-
uousness of the holding position in low visibility conditions.
They may also be installed to indicate the location of an inter-
secting taxiway during periods of darkness. Clearance bars
consist of three in-pavement steady-burning yellow lights.
Runway Guard Lights. Runway guard lights are installed at
taxiway/runway intersections. They are primarily used to
enhance the conspicuousness of taxiway/runway intersections
during low visibility conditions, but may be used in all weather
conditions. Runway guard lights consist of either a pair of ele-
vated flashing yellow lights installed on either side of the taxi-
way or a row of in-pavement yellow lights installed across the
entire taxiway, at the runway holding position marking.
NOTE: Some airports may have a row of three or five in-

pavement yellow lights installed at taxiway/runway intersec-
tions. They should not be confused with clearance bar lights
described in paragraph ìRunway Guard Lightsî.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Stop Bar Lights. Stop bar lights, when installed, are used to
confirm the ATC clearance to enter or cross the active runway
in low visibility conditions (below 1,200 feet Runway Visual
Range). A stop bar consists of a row of red, unidirectional,
steady-burning in-pavement lights installed across the entire
taxiway at the runway holding position, and elevated steady-
burning red lights on each side. A controlled stop bar is operat-
ed in conjunction with the taxiway centerline lead-on lights
which extend from the stop bar toward the runway. Following
the ATC clearance to proceed, the stop bar is turned off and the
lead-on lights are turned on. The stop bar and lead-on lights are
automatically reset by a sensor or backup timer.
CAUTION: Pilots should never cross a red illuminated

stop bar, even if an ATC clearance has been given to pro-
ceed onto or across the runway.
NOTE: If, after crossing a stop bar, the taxiway centerline

lead-on lights inadvertently extinguish, pilots should hold
their position and contact ATC for further instructions.

September 2002
Servicing
Table of Contents
Servicing Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Fire Extinguishing Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Approved Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Use of Jet B, JP-4, and Aviation Gasoline . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Fuel Imbalance (Lateral) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Refueling/Defueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Fuel Draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Blending Anti-Icing Additive to Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Adding Biocide to Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Ground Power Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Connecting GPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Disconnecting GPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Oil – Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Approved Engine Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Oil Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Oil Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Approved Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Oxygen Cylinder Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Landing Gear and Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Strut Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Deicing/Anti-Icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Approved Airplane Deicing/Anti-Icing Fluids . . . . . . . 6-23
Deicing and Anti-Icing Fluid Application . . . . . . . . . 6-23

September 2002
Servicing
Servicing Record
DATE QTY DATE QTY
Engine Oil
Brake Fluid
Oxygen

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Servicing Record (continued)

DATE QTY DATE QTY
Other
Other
Other

October 1996
Servicing
The following procedures are for reference purposes only.

Always refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual, aircraft Maintenance
Manual, and engine Maintenance Manual for current proce-
dures, precautions, and approved servicing materials.
Fire Extinguisher Cylinder

During the exterior preflight inspection, check that the engine
fire extinguisher cylinders are properly serviced. A cylinder is in
each main gear wheel well aft of the main gear. An under-
charged or fully discharged cylinder requires removal and
servicing by an approved agency with a proper charge of 2.5
lbs of bromotrifluoromethane (CbrF3) and pressurized with dry
nitrogen to 450 PSI at 70°F (21.1°C). The bottle cannot be
serviced in the aircraft. Refer to Table 6-A for cylinder pressures
at corresponding temperatures.
Temperature
Indicated Pressure (PSI)
*F *C
-40 -40 190-240
-20 -29 220-275
0 -18 250-315
20 -7 290-365
40 4 340-420
60 16 390-480
80 27 455-550
100 38 525-635
120 49 605-730
140 60 700-840
Table 6-A; Pressure Versus Temperature

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
CAUTION: If the engine ingests fire extinguishing

compound, it must be cleaned, removed, and disassem-
bled for a thorough internal cleaning. If the engine fire
extinguisher is discharged, the engine baffling will prevent
entry of the compound into the engine; thus, only an exter-
nal engine washing is required. Most incidences of fire
extinguisher compound ingestion are the result of ground
personnel using an external fire extinguisher during
engine operation.

October 1996
Servicing
Fuel
Approved Fuels
Commercial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JET A, A-1, B
Emergency Fuels . . . . . . 80 RED; 91/98, 100LL BLUE;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 GREEN; 115/145 PURPLE
In some countries 100LL blue is designated 100L and
colored green.
Military . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JP-4, 5, 8
JP-4 contains factory-blended anti-icing additive.
Emergency Fuels . . . . . . 80/87 RED; 100/130 GREEN;
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115/145 PURPLE
Use the lowest octane emergency fuel available.
CAUTION: JP-4 fuel per MIL-T-5624 contains factory-

blended anti-icing additive; no further treatment is
necessary. Some fuel suppliers blend anti-icing additive
in their storage tanks. To ensure proper concentration
by volume of fuel on board, blend only enough additive
for the unblended fuel.
Fuel Capacities
System Lbs.* U.S. Gals Kg Liters
Main 2586 386 1173 1461
Auxiliary 1058 158 480 598
Total 3645 544 1653 2059
Table 6-A; Usable Fuel Quantities

*6.7 lbs/gallon

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Use of Jet B, JP-4, and Aviation Gasoline

When using Jet B, JP-4, or aviation gasoline, the fuel quantity
indicators will not show correct fuel quantity. When using these
fuels, an approximate fuel quantity can be determined by:
■ multiplying indicated fuel quantity by 0.96 when using Jet B
or JP-4
■ multiplying indicated fuel quantity by 0.94 when using avia-
tion gasoline.
Fuel Imbalance (Lateral)

Maximum Allowable Between Wing Systems . . . 1,000 LBS
Refueling/Defueling
Filling the Tanks
Aircraft/Refueling Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GROUNDED
Ensure the aircraft is grounded, refueling unit is grounded,
and that the refueling unit is grounded to the aircraft.
Main Tanks (Outboard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REFUEL
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the filler neck, do not let

fueling nozzle rest against side of filler. To prevent damage
to the fuel tank bladder, do not insert fueling nozzle more
than three inches.
Auxiliary Tanks (Inboard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REFUEL

Do not put any fuel into the auxiliary tanks unless the main
tanks are full.
Fuel Drain Points . . . . . . CHECK FOR CONTAMINATION
Allow a three-hour settle period if possible.
NOTE: Clean any spilled fuel/additive off of tires to

prevent tire deterioration.

September 2002
Servicing
Fuel Draining
Draining the Main Fuel System
Filler Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVE
Cover on Bottom of Nacelle . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVE
Adapter Plug Behind Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVE
AN832-12 Union . . . . . . . . . . SCREW INTO ADAPTER
Defuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACCOMPLISH
Defuel using one of three methods:
■ gravity feed
■ aircraft defueling unit
■ mechanical pump.
Draining the Main Fuel System

(S/Ns Prior to BB-85 without SI 0725-295)
Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVE
Right Side Cowling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN
Flexible Fuel Line at Oil-to-Fuel Heater . . . . DISCONNECT
Standby Fuel Pump (if operative) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
If standby fuel pump is inoperative, connect another pump to
flexible line or accomplish the following.
Filler Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVE
Drain Plug at Nacelle Sump Strainer . . . . . . . . REMOVE
Gravity Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACCOMPLISH

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Draining the Auxiliary Fuel System

The auxiliary fuel tank can be drained:
■ by transferring fuel to the associated main tank with a stand-
by fuel pump
■ through the wing center section filler cap with an external
pump and hose
■ by removing the auxiliary tank sump drain plug and allowing
fuel to drain into a suitable container.
NOTE: The fuel crossfeed will not transfer fuel

between the left and right fuel systems.
Blending Anti-Icing Additive to Fuel

The following procedure must be used when blending anti-icing
additive with fuel during refueling. Use only anti-icing additives
that conform to specification MIL-I-27686.
Use a HI-FLO PRIST blender Model PHF-204.
Additive Container . . . . . . . REMOVE CAP CONTAINING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TUBE AND CLIP ASSEMBLY
Pistol Grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATTACH
Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS INTO BUTTON
Tube End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLIP TO FUEL NOZZLE
Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . PULL FIRMLY/LOCK IN PLACE
Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BEGIN

September 2002
Servicing
Additive Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BEGIN
CAUTION: Ensure the additive is directed into the flow-

ing fuel stream. Start additive flow after fuel flow starts;
stop before fuel flow stops. Do not allow concentrated
additive to contact coated interior of fuel cells or aircraft
painted surfaces. Use not less than 20 fluid ounces of
additive per 260 gallons of fuel or more than 20 fluid
ounces per 104 gallons of fuel.
Fueling Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 TO 60 GPM

A rate of less than 30 GPM may be used when topping off
tanks.
Adding Biocide to Fuel

Biobor JF is a fuel biocide and not an anti-icing agent. Biobor
JF can be used periodically at concentrations up to 135 parts-
per-million (PPM) when the aircraft is operated in environments
conducive to fungal or microbial growth or there is evidence of
fuel contamination (i.e., dirty sump drains, clogged filters,
unusual odor, or growth seen in fuel tanks).
As a single-dose shock treatment, Biobor JF can be used in
concentrations up to 270 PPM to clean out and sterilize a
contaminated fuel system. After all fungal or microbial growths
are killed, Biobor JF can be used at a 135 PPM concentration
to prevent new growth.
When used to sterilize the fuel system, the additive blended fuel
should remain in contact with all fuel tank surfaces for at least
72 hours. If the airplane is flown, Biobor JF should be added
during refueling to ensure a 72 hour biocide treatment.
Refer to aircraft Maintenance Manual and Tables 6-B and
6-C for blending charts for 135 and 270 PPM Biobor JF
concentrations.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
CAUTION: Ensure that the additive is directed into the

flowing fuel stream; start additive flow after fuel flow starts
and stop before fuel flow stops. Do not allow concentrated
additive to contact coated interior of fuel cells or
airplane surfaces. Use not less than 20 fl oz of additive per
260 gallons of fuel or more than 20 fl oz of additive per 104
gallons of fuel.
Turbine Fuel Biobor JF @ 270 PPM Biobor JF @ 135 PPM

LBS GALS LBS GALS FL OZ LBS GALS FL OZ
670 100 0.18 0.02 2.63 0.09 0.01 1.32
1340 200 0.36 0.04 5.26 0.18 0.02 2.63
2010 300 0.54 0.06 7.89 0.27 0.03 3.95
2680 400 0.72 0.08 10.53 0.36 0.04 5.26
3350 500 0.90 0.10 13.16 0.45 0.05 6.58
6700 1000 1.81 0.21 24.46 0.90 0.10 13.16
13400 2000 3.62 0.41 52.92 1.81 0.21 24.46
16750 2500 4.52 0.52 66.08 2.26 0.26 33.04
33500 5000 9.04 10.3 132.16 4.52 0.52 66.08
67000 10000 18.09 2.07 264.47 9.05 1.03 132.31

Table 6-B; Biobor JF Blending Ratios
Fuel Density at 15°C Oz per 1000 Gallons of

Fuel fuel treated
G/ML LBS/GAL gallons fuel per quart
JP-4 0.7601 6.343 25.37 1261
Kerosene 0.8045 6.714 26.86 1191
Table 6-C; Biobor JF Addition Levels for Various Fuels –
Biobor JF Rates at 270 PPM

October 1996
Servicing
Ground Power Unit

The ground power unit (GPU) should be capable of providing a
continuous load of 300A at 24 to 30V DC and 1,000A for 0.1
seconds during engine start. Use of an inadequate GPU will
cause a voltage drop below the start relay’s drop-out voltage.
This may result in relay chatter and welded contacts. Similarly,
a GPU that provides more than 350A continuous load will dam-
age the external power relay and airplane power cables.
CAUTION: The output setting must not exceed 1,000A on

external power sources with a higher current-carrying
capability. Any current in excess of 1,000A may overtorque
the starter-generator driveshaft or produce heat sufficient
to shorten starter-generator life.
When using an external power source:

■ use only a negatively grounded unit. If polarity unknown,
check with a voltmeter before connecting to the airplane
■ before connecting the GPU, turn off all radio equipment and
generator switches but leave the battery on to absorb tran-
sient voltage spikes
■ if battery voltage indicates less than 20V, the battery must be
removed and serviced before using external power
■ the generators must be OFF and the battery switch ON when
starting engines with external power
■ if the GPU does not have a standard AN plug, check plug
polarity. The positive lead must connect to the external power
receptacle’s center post, negative lead to the front post, and
positive voltage of 24 to 28V DC to the external power recep-
tacle’s polarizing pin.

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
CAUTION: Voltage is required to energize the avionics

master power relays to remove power from the avionics
equipment. Therefore, never apply external power to the
airplane without first applying battery power. If the battery
is removed from the airplane or the battery switch is in the
OFF position, connect an external battery parallel to the
GPU before energizing the GPU.
CAUTION: The battery may be damaged if exposed to

voltages higher than 30V for extended periods of time.
Connecting GPU
Avionics MASTER PWR Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
GEN Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Volt/Loadmeter (Battery Voltage) . . . . . . . 20V MINIMUM
Ground Power Voltage . SET 28.25 ± 0.25V (King Air 200) or
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28.0 to 28.4V (King Air B200)
Ground Power Unit . . . . . OFF/CONNECT TO AIRCRAFT
Ground Power Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Volt/Loadmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MONITOR
Monitor to ensure voltage reading remains greater than
battery voltage (28.25 ± 0.25 volts).

October 1996
Servicing
Disconnecting GPU
Right Propeller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATHER
Ground Power Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF/DISCONNECT
External Power Access Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE
GEN Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESET/ON
Right Propeller Control . . . . . . . . . . . FULL FORWARD

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Oil – Engine
NOTE: If the engine is cold-soaked, oil level is full when
the dipstick reads one quart low. Overfilling may cause an
oil discharge through the breather.
Approved Engine Oils

The following oils comply with Pratt & Whitney Canada (P&WC)
specification PWA521, Type II oil (5 centistoke). These oils are
fully approved for use in P&WC commercially operated PT6A-
41 and -42 engines. Refer to the latest revision of P&WC SB
3001 for a current list of approved oils.
■ Aeroshell Turbine Oil 500
■ Aeroshell Turbine Oil 560
■ Castrol 205
■ Exxon Turbo Oil 2380
■ Mobil Jet Oil 254
■ Mobil Jet Oil II
■ Royal Turbine Oil 560
■ Roy Turbine Oil 500
■ Turbonycoil 525-2A.
NOTE: When switching to another approved brand,

drain and flush complete oil system and refill in accor-
dance with engine Maintenance Manual instructions.

September 2002
Servicing
CAUTION: When changing from an existing lubricant

formulation to a “third generation” lubricant formulation,
P&WC strongly recommends that such a change should
only be made when an engine is new or freshly overhauled.
CAUTION: Do not mix different brands of oil when adding

or changing oil. Different brands of oil may be incompati-
ble because of the difference in their chemical structures.
Should oils of different brands become intermixed in the
engine, drain and flush the entire engine oil system and
refill with an approved lubricant.
Engine Oil Capacity

Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2 QTS/13.4 LTRS
Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 QTS/12.0 LTRS
Undrainable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 QTS/1.4 LTRS
Operating Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full to 4 QTS Low
Oil Consumption
Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 QT/10 HRS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.95 LTRS/10 HRS
Oil Servicing
Check the oil level after the oil has been changed or the engine
has remained stationary for more than 12 hours.
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . RUN AT IDLE FOR 2 MINUTES
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHUT DOWN

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Oil Access Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN

The oil access door is on the upper aft cowling.
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVE
The dipstick is behind an access door on the aft engine cowl
and is marked for the last five quarts. Minimum oil quantity
operating range is four quarts low. Replenish oil through the
dipstick opening; do not fill past the full mark.
Oil Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
Oil . . . . . . . ADD TO ONE QUART MARK ON DIPSTICK
Add only oil of the same brand as that already in the engine.
Normal oil level is to the one quart mark on the dipstick.
Overfilling the engine may cause oil discharge through the
breather until satisfactory oil level is reached.
CAUTION: Remove any spilled oil immediately to

prevent tire deterioration.
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPLACE/VERIFY SECURE

Access Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSE AND SECURE

October 1996
Servicing
Oxygen
Approved Oxygen
Use only MIL-O-27210 aviator's breathing oxygen.
WARNING: Do not use medical or industrial oxygen.

These types of oxygen may contain moisture which could
freeze the system valves and lines.
Oxygen Cylinder Servicing

Observe the following precautions during oxygen servicing.
WARNING: Avoid making sparks and keep all burning

cigarettes or fire away from the vicinity of the airplane.
Make sure that the oxygen shutoff valve in the flight
compartment is in the closed position. Inspect the filler
connection for cleanliness before attaching it to the filler
valve. Make sure that your hands, tools, and clothing are
clean, particularly of grease or oil, for these contaminants
may ignite upon contact with pure oxygen under pressure.
As a further precaution against fire, open and close all
oxygen valves slowly. Observe all precautions when
servicing the oxygen system.
■ always ground the system to be serviced and the servicing

equipment before connecting the filler adapter
■ close the oxygen cylinder manual shutoff valve
■ ensure that airplane electrical power is off. Do not operate
electrical switches or connect/disconnect ground power unit
(GPU) during oxygen servicing

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
■ do not service the oxygen system if fueling or other flamma-

ble fluid servicing is in progress
■ do not service the system too fast. Rapid charging can cre-
ate a dangerous overheat condition. Fill the system slowly by
adjusting the charging rate with the oxygen servicing cart
pressure regulator valve.
Fill the oxygen cylinder slowly to prevent overheating. Fill the
following cylinder sizes to corresponding maximum pressures
(at 70°F/21.1°C).
22 Cubic-Foot Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,800 PSI
For each 1°F increase in temperature, increase maximum pres-
sure 3.5 PSI. For each 1°F decrease in temperature, decrease
maximum pressure 3.5 PSI. If oxygen pressure drops below 50
PSI, a system purge is required.

October 1996
Servicing

Brake System
The brake system reservoir is on the upper left forward side of
the avionics compartment. Service the reservoir with MIL-H-
5606 hydraulic fluid.
Reservoir Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVE
Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK
With the reservoir fully serviced, fluid level should read full on
the dipstick.
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPLENISH IF NECESSARY
Reservoir Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPLACE
Remove and replace the reservoir cap by hand. Using tools
may damage the cap and reservoir resulting in a fluid leak.
Tires
CAUTION: Tires that have picked up a fuel, hydraulic fluid,

or oil film should be washed down as soon as
possible with a detergent solution to prevent deterioration
of the rubber.
Inflation
Check tire inflation daily when they are cool. Wait at least
2 hours (3 hours in hot weather) after a flight before checking
tire pressure.
Nose Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 TO 60 PSI
Standard Main Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 ±2 PSI
High Flotation Main Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 ±2 PSI

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Strut Extension
The following minimum/maximum strut extensions apply to an
empty aircraft with full fuel and oil tanks.
Nose Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.00 TO 3.50 INCHES
Standard Main Gear . . . . . . . . . . 3.93 TO 4.19 INCHES
High Flotation Main Gear (S/Ns BB-74
to 105 except BB-76) . . . . . . . . . 4.70 TO 4.95 INCHES
High Flotation Main Gear
(all other S/Ns) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.56 TO 5.93 INCHES

September 2002
Servicing
Deicing/Anti-Icing
Approved Airplane Deicing/Anti-Icing Fluids
■ SAE AMS 1424 Type I
■ ISO 11075 Type I
■ SAE AMS 1428 Type II
■ ISO 11078 Type II
■ SAE AMS 1428 Type IV.
Only the following Type IV fluids are approved:
– Clariant Safewing MP IV 1957
– Clariant Safewing MP IV 2001
– UCAR ULTRA+ (Approved for use down to -15°C)
– Octagon Max Flight Type IV
Deicing and Anti-Icing Fluid Application

Airplane deicing fluids may be used diluted or undiluted accord-
ing to manufacturer’s recommendations for deicing. For anti-
icing purposes, the fluids should always be used undiluted.
Deicing fluids may be applied either heated or unheated.
NOTE: Type II and Type IV deicing fluids should only be

applied at low pressure by trained personnel with proper
equipment.
If a sprayer is not available, deicing fluid may be brushed or

painted onto the airplane’s surface.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite

September 2002
Emergency Information
Table of Contents
Emergency Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Pilot Responsibility and Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Emergency Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Transponder Emergency Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Intercept and Escort Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Search and Rescue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
National Search and Rescue Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Coastguard Rescue Coordination Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Air Force Rescue Coordination Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Emergency and Overdue Aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Survival Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Ground-Air Visual Code for Use by Survivors. . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Ground-Air Visual Code for Use by
Ground Search Parties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Observance of Downed Aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Obtaining Emergency Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Two-way Radio Communications Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Aircraft Rescue and Fire Fighting Communications . . 7-17
Discrete Emergency Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Radio Call Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
ARFF Emergency Hand Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Air Traffic Control Tower Light Gun Signals . . . . . . . . . 7-19

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Emergency First Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

The ABCs of Emergency CPR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Heart Attack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Actions for Survival . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Choking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Emergency Equipment Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Credits: The content of this section is reprinted from the Aero-

nautical Information Manual, Change 2, Effective: January 25,
2001 (www.faa.gov/ATpubs/AIM/index.htm).

September 2002
Pilot Responsibility and Authority
The pilot in command of an aircraft is directly responsible for
and is the final authority as to the operation of that aircraft. In
an emergency requiring immediate action, the pilot in com-
mand may deviate from any rule in 14 CFR Part 91, Subpart A,
General, and Subpart B, Flight Rules, to the extent required to
meet that emergency.
• REFERENCE-14 CFR Section 91.3(b).
If the emergency authority of 14 CFR Section 91.3(b) is used to
deviate from the provisions of an ATC clearance, the pilot in
command must notify ATC as soon as possible and obtain an
amended clearance.
Unless deviation is necessary under the emergency authority
of 14 CFR Section 91.3, pilots of IFR flights experiencing two-
way radio communications failure are expected to adhere to
the procedures prescribed under “IFR operations, two-way
radio communications failure”.
• REFERENCE-14 CFR Section 91.185.
Emergency Conditions
An emergency can be either a distress or urgency condition as
defined in the Pilot/Controller Glossary. Pilots do not hesitate to
declare an emergency when they are faced with distress condi-
tions such as fire, mechanical failure, or structural damage.
However, some are reluctant to report an urgency condition
when they encounter situations which may not be immediately
perilous, but are potentially catastrophic. An aircraft is in at
least an urgency condition the moment the pilot becomes
doubtful about position, fuel endurance, weather, or any other
condition that could adversely affect flight safety. This is the
time to ask for help, not after the situation has developed into a
distress condition.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Pilots who become apprehensive for their safety for any reason
should request assistance immediately. Ready and willing help
is available in the form of radio, radar, direction finding stations,
and other aircraft. Delay has caused accidents and cost lives.
Safety is not a luxury! Take action!
Transponder Emergency Operation

When a distress or urgency condition is encountered, the pilot
of an aircraft with a coded radar beacon transponder, who
desires to alert a ground radar facility, should squawk MODE 3/
A, Code7700/Emergency and MODE C altitude reporting and
then immediately establish communications with the ATC
facility.
Radar facilities are equipped so that Code 7700 normally trig-
gers an alarm or special indicator at all control positions. Pilots
should understand that they might not be within a radar cover-
age area. Therefore, they should continue squawking Code
7700 and establish radio communications as soon as possible.
Intercept and Escort Procedures

The concept of airborne intercept and escort is based on the
Search and Rescue (SAR) aircraft establishing visual and/or
electronic contact with an aircraft in difficulty, providing in-flight
assistance, and escorting it to a safe landing. If bailout, crash
landing or ditching becomes necessary, SAR operations can be
conducted without delay. For most incidents, particularly those
occurring at night and/or during instrument flight conditions, the
availability of intercept and escort services will depend on the
proximity of SAR units with suitable aircraft on alert for immedi-
ate dispatch. In limited circumstances, other aircraft flying in the
vicinity of an aircraft in difficulty can provide these services.
If specifically requested by a pilot in difficulty or if a distress
condition is declared, SAR coordinators will take steps to inter-
cept and escort an aircraft. Steps may be initiated for intercept
and escort if an urgency condition is declared and unusual cir-
cumstances make such action advisable.

September 2002
It is the pilot's prerogative to refuse intercept and escort ser-

vices. Escort services will normally be provided to the nearest
adequate airport. Should the pilot receiving escort services
continue on to another location after reaching a safe airport, or
decide not to divert to the nearest safe airport, the escort air-
craft is not obligated to continue and further escort is discretion-
ary. The decision will depend on the circumstances of the
individual incident.
Search and Rescue

General
SAR is a lifesaving service provided through the combined
efforts of the federal agencies signatory to the National SAR
Plan, and the agencies responsible for SAR within each state.
Operational resources are provided by the U.S. Coast Guard,
DOD components, the Civil Air Patrol, the Coast Guard Auxil-
iary, state, county and local law enforcement and other public
safety agencies, and private volunteer organizations. Services
include search for missing aircraft, survival aid, rescue, and
emergency medical help for the occupants after an accident
site is located.
National Search and Rescue Plan
By federal interagency agreement, the National Search and
Rescue Plan provides for the effective use of all available facili-
ties in all types of SAR missions. These facilities include air-
craft, vessels, pararescue and ground rescue teams, and
emergency radio fixing. Under the Plan, the U.S. Coast Guard
is responsible for the coordination of SAR in the Maritime
Region, and the USAF is responsible in the Inland Region. To
carry out these responsibilities, the Coast Guard and the Air
Force have established Rescue Coordination Centers (RCCs)
to direct SAR activities within their regions. For aircraft emer-
gencies, distress, and urgency, information normally will be
passed to the appropriate RCC through an ARTCC or FSS.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Coastguard Rescue Coordination Centers

Alameda, CA Miami, FL
510-437-3701 305-415-6800
Boston, MA New York, NY
617-223-8555 212-668-7055
Cleveland, OH New Orleans, LA
216-902-6117 504-589-6225
Honolulu, HI Portsmouth, VA
808-541-2500 757-398-6390
Juneau, AK Seattle, WA
907-463-2000 206-220-7001
San Juan, PR
809-729-6770
Air Force Rescue Coordination Centers

Air Force Rescue Coordination Center – 48 Contiguous States
Langley AFB, Virginia
Telephone Numbers
Commercial 804-764-8112
WATS 800-851-3051
DSN 574-8112
Air Command Rescue Coordination Center – Alaska

Elmendorf AFB, Alaska
Telephone Numbers
DSN 317-552-2426
Joint Rescue Coordination Center – Hawaii

HQ 14th CG District
Honolulu
Telephone Numbers
DSN 448-0301

September 2002
Emergency and Overdue Aircraft

ARTCCs and FSSs will alert the SAR system when information
is received from any source indicating that an aircraft is in diffi-
culty, overdue, or missing.
Radar facilities that provide radar flight following or adviso-
ries consider the loss of radar and radios, without service
termination notice, to be a possible emergency. Pilots
receiving VFR services from radar facilities should be aware
that SAR may be initiated under these circumstances.
A filed flight plan is the most timely and effective indicator
that an aircraft is overdue. Flight plan information is invalu-
able to SAR forces for planning a search and executing
search efforts.
Prior to departure on every flight, local or otherwise, someone
at the departure point should be advised of your destination
and route of flight if other than direct. Search efforts are often
wasted and rescues delayed because of pilots who thought-
lessly take off without telling anyone where they are going. File
a flight plan for your safety.
According to the National Search and Rescue Plan, “The life
expectancy of an injured survivor decreases as much as 80
percent during the first 24 hours, while the chances of survival
of uninjured survivors rapidly diminishes after the first 3 days.”
An Air Force Review of 325 SAR missions conducted during a
23-month period revealed that “Time works against people who
experience a distress but are not on a flight plan, since 36
hours normally pass before family concern initiates an (alert)”.
Survival Equipment
For flight over uninhabited land areas, it is wise to take and know
how to use survival equipment for the type of climate and terrain.
If a forced landing occurs at sea, chances of survival are gov-
erned by the degree of crew proficiency in emergency proce-
dures and by the availability and effectiveness of water survival
equipment.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Ground-Air Visual Code for Use by Survivors
NO. MESSAGE CODE SYMBOL

1 Require assistance V
2 Require medical assistance X
3 No or Negative N
4 Yes or Affirmative Y
5 Proceeding in this direction ↑
IF IN DOUBT, USE INTERNATIONAL
SYMBOL SOS
INSTRUCTIONS
1. Lay out symbols by using strips of fabric or parachutes,
pieces of wood, stones, or any available material.
2. Provide as much color contrast as possible between mate-
rial used for symbols and background against which sym-
bols are exposed.
3. Symbols should be at least 10 feet high or larger. Take care
to lay out symbols exactly as shown.
4. In addition to using symbols, make every effort to attract
attention by means of radio, flares, smoke, or other avail-
able means.
5. On snow covered ground, signals can be made by drag-
ging, shoveling or tramping. Depressed areas forming sym-
bols will appear black from the air.
6. Pilot should acknowledge message by rocking wings from
side to side.

September 2002
Ground-Air Visual Code for Use by Ground Search

Parties
NO. MESSAGE CODE SYMBOL
1 Operation completed. LLL

2 We have found all personnel. LL
3 We have found only some personnel. ++
4 We are not able to confirm. XX
Returning to base.
5 We have divided into two groups.

Each proceeding in direction indicated.
6 Information received that aircraft is in →→

this direction.
7 Nothing found. NN
Will continue search.
NOTE: These visual signals have been accepted for inter-

national use and appear in Annex 12 to the Convention on
International Civil Aviation.
Observance of Downed Aircraft

Determine if crash is marked with a yellow cross; if so, the
crash has already been reported and identified.
If possible, determine type and number of aircraft and whether
there is evidence of survivors.
Fix the position of the crash as accurately as possible with ref-
erence to a navigational aid. If possible, provide a geographic
or physical description of the area to aid ground search parties.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Transmit the information to the nearest FAA or other appropri-

ate radio facility.
If circumstances permit, orbit the scene to guide in other assist-
ing units until their arrival or until you are relieved by another
aircraft.
Immediately after landing, make a complete report to the near-
est FAA facility, or Air Force or Coast Guard Rescue Coordina-
tion Center. The report can be made by a long distance collect
telephone call.
Obtaining Emergency Assistance

A pilot in any distress or urgency condition should immediately
take the following action, not necessarily in the order listed, to
obtain assistance:
1. Climb, if possible, for improved communications, and bet-
ter radar and direction finding detection. However, it must
be understood that unauthorized climb or descent under
IFR conditions within controlled airspace is prohibited,
except as permitted by 14 CFR Section 91.3(b).
2. If equipped with a radar beacon transponder (civil) or IFF/
SIF (military):
• Continue squawking assigned MODE A/3 discrete
code/VFR code and MODE C altitude encoding when
in radio contact with an air traffic facility or other
agency providing air traffic services, unless instructed
to do otherwise.
• If unable to immediately establish communications
with an air traffic facility/agency, squawk MODE A/3,
Code 7700/Emergency and MODE C.
3. Transmit a distress or urgency message consisting of as
many as necessary of the following elements, preferably
in the order listed:
a. If distress, MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY; if urgency,
PAN-PAN, PAN-PAN, PAN-PAN.

September 2002
b. Name of station addressed.

c. Aircraft identification and type.
d. Nature of distress or urgency.
e. Weather.
f. Pilot’s intentions and request.
g. Present position, and heading; or if lost, last known
position, time, and heading since that position.
h. Altitude or flight level.
i. Fuel remaining in minutes.
j. Number of people on board.
k. Any other useful information.
After establishing radio contact, comply with advice and
instructions received. Cooperate. Do not hesitate to ask ques-
tions or clarify instructions when you do not understand or if
you cannot comply with clearance. Assist the ground station to
control communications on the frequency in use. Silence inter-
fering radio stations. Do not change frequency or change to
another ground station unless absolutely necessary. If you do,
advise the ground station of the new frequency and station
name prior to the change, transmitting in the blind if necessary.
If two-way communications cannot be established on the new
frequency, return immediately to the frequency or station where
two-way communications last existed.
When in a distress condition with bailout, crash landing or
ditching imminent, take the following additional actions to assist
search and rescue units:
Time and circumstances permitting, transmit as many as
necessary of the message elements in page 7-11 subpara-
graph 3. above, and any of the following that you think might
be helpful:
• ELT status.
• Visible landmarks.
• Aircraft color.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
• Number of persons on board.

• Emergency equipment on board.
Actuate your ELT if the installation permits.
For bailout, and for crash landing or ditching if risk of fire is not
a consideration, set your radio for continuous transmission.
If it becomes necessary to ditch, make every effort to ditch
near a surface vessel. If time permits, an FAA facility should
be able to get the position of the nearest commercial or
Coast Guard vessel from a Coast Guard Rescue Coordina-
tion Center.
After a crash landing, unless you have good reason to
believe that you will not be located by search aircraft or
ground teams, it is best to remain with your aircraft and pre-
pare means of signaling search aircraft.
Two-way Radio Communications Failure

It is virtually impossible to provide regulations and procedures
applicable to all possible situations associated with two-way
radio communications failure. During two-way radio communi-
cations failure, when confronted by a situation not covered in
the regulation, pilots are expected to exercise good judgment in
whatever action they elect to take. Should the situation so dic-
tate, they should not be reluctant to use the emergency action
contained in 14 CFR Section 91.3(b).
Whether or not two-way communications failure constitutes an
emergency depends on the circumstances; in any event, it is a
determination made by the pilot. 14 CFR Section 91.3(b)
authorizes a pilot to deviate from any rule in Subparts A and B
to the extent required to meet an emergency.
In the event of two-way radio communications failure, ATC ser-
vice will be provided on the assumption that the pilot is operat-
ing in accordance with 14 CFR Section 91.185. A pilot
experiencing two-way communications failure should (unless
emergency authority is exercised) comply with 14 CFR Section
91.185 quoted below:

September 2002
General. Unless otherwise authorized by ATC, each pilot

who has two-way radio communications failure when oper-
ating under IFR shall comply with the rules of this section.
VFR Conditions. If the failure occurs in VFR conditions, or
if VFR conditions are encountered after the failure, each
pilot shall continue the flight under VFR and land as soon as
practicable.
NOTE: This procedure also applies when two-way radio

failure occurs while operating in Class A airspace. The
primary objective of this provision in 14 CFR Section
91.185 is to preclude extended IFR operation by these
aircraft within the ATC system. Pilots should recognize
that operation under these conditions may unnecessarily
as well as adversely affect other users of the airspace,
since ATC may be required to reroute or delay other
users in order to protect the failure aircraft. However, it is
not intended that the requirement to “land as soon as
practicable” be construed to mean “as soon as possible”.
Pilots retain the prerogative of exercising their best judg-
ment and are not required to land at an unauthorized air-
port, at an airport unsuitable for the type of aircraft flown,
or to land only minutes short of their intended destination.
IFR Conditions. If the failure occurs in IFR conditions, or if

“VFR conditions” above cannot be complied with, each pilot
shall continue the flight according to the following:
Route.
By the route assigned in the last ATC clearance received;
If being radar vectored, by the direct route from the
point of radio failure to the fix, route, or airway speci-
fied in the vector clearance;
In the absence of an assigned route, by the route that
ATC has advised may be expected in a further clear-
ance; or

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
In the absence of an assigned route or a route that

ATC has advised may be expected in a further clear-
ance, by the route filed in the flight plan.
Altitude. At the HIGHEST of the following altitudes or flight
levels FOR THE ROUTE SEGMENT BEING FLOWN:
The altitude or flight level assigned in the last ATC
clearance received;
The minimum altitude (converted, if appropriate, to
minimum flight level as prescribed in 14 CFR Section
91.121(c)) for IFR operations; or
The altitude or flight level that ATC has advised may
be expected in a further clearance.
NOTE: The intent of the rule is that a pilot who has

experienced two-way radio failure should select the
appropriate altitude for the particular route segment
being flown and make the necessary altitude
adjustments for subsequent route segments. If the
pilot received an “expect further clearance" con-
taining a higher altitude to expect at a specified
time or fix, maintain the highest of the following alti-
tudes until that time/fix:
(1) the last assigned altitude; or
(2) the minimum altitude/flight level for IFR
operations.
Upon reaching the time/fix specified, the pilot

should commence climbing to the altitude advised
to expect. If the radio failure occurs after the time/
fix specified, the altitude to be expected is not
applicable and the pilot should maintain an altitude
consistent with l or 2 above. If the pilot receives an
"expect further clearance" containing a lower alti-
tude, the pilot should maintain the highest of l or 2
above until that time/fix specified in subparagraph
“Leave clearance limit”, below.

September 2002
Leave Clearance Limit.

When the clearance limit is a fix from which an
approach begins, commence descent or descent and
approach as close as possible to the expect further
clearance time if one has been received, or if one has
not been received, as close as possible to the Esti-
mated Time of Arrival (ETA) as calculated from the
filed or amended (with ATC) Estimated Time en Route
(ETE).
If the clearance limit is not a fix from which an
approach begins, leave the clearance limit at the
expect further clearance time if one has been
received, or if none has been received, upon arrival
over the clearance limit, and proceed to a fix from
which an approach begins and commence descent or
descent and approach as close as possible to the
Estimated Time of Arrival as calculated from the filed
or amended (with ATC) Estimated Time en Route.
Transponder Operation During Two-way
Communications Failure.
If an aircraft with a coded radar beacon transponder
experiences a loss of two-way radio capability, the pilot
should adjust the transponder to reply on MODE A/3,
Code 7600.
The pilot should understand that the aircraft may not be
in an area of radar coverage.
Reestablishing Radio Contact.
In addition to monitoring the NAVAID voice feature, the
pilot should attempt to reestablish communications by
attempting contact:
On the previously assigned frequency, or
With an FSS or ARINC1.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
If communications are established with an FSS or

ARINC, the pilot should advise that radio communica-
tions on the previously assigned frequency have been
lost giving the aircraft's position, altitude, and last
assigned frequency and then request further clearance
from the controlling facility. The preceding does not pre-
clude the use of 121.5 MHz. There is no priority on which
action should be attempted first. If the capability exists,
do all at the same time.

September 2002
Aircraft Rescue and Fire Fighting

Communications
Discrete Emergency Frequency
Direct contact between an emergency aircraft flight crew, Air-
craft Rescue and Fire Fighting Incident Commander (ARFF IC),
and the Airport Traffic Control Tower (ATCT) is possible on an
aeronautical radio frequency (Discrete Emergency Frequency
[DEF]) designated by Air Traffic Control (ATC) from the opera-
tional frequencies assigned to that facility.
Emergency aircraft at airports without an ATCT (or when the
ATCT is closed) may contact the ARFF IC (if ARFF service is
provided), on the Common Traffic Advisory Frequency (CTAF)
published for the airport or the civil emergency frequency 121.5
MHz.
Radio Call Signs

Preferred radio call sign for the ARFF IC is “(location/facility)
Command” when communicating with the flight crew and the
FAA ATCT.
EXAMPLE:
LAX Command.
Washington Command.

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
ARFF Emergency Hand Signals

September 2002
Air Traffic Control Tower Light Gun

Signals
Color Movement of Aircraft Aircraft
and Type of Vehicles, on the Ground in
Signal Equipment and Flight
Personnel
Steady green Cleared to Cleared for Cleared to land
cross, proceed takeoff
or go
Flashing green Not applicable Cleared for taxi Return for
landing (to be
followed by
steady green at
the proper time)
Steady red STOP STOP Give way to
other aircraft
and continue
circling
Flashing red Clear the Taxi clear of the Airport unsafe,
taxiway/runway runway in use do not land
Flashing white Return to Return to Not applicable
starting point on starting point on
airport airport
Alternating red Exercise Exercise Exercise
and green extreme caution extreme caution extreme caution

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Emergency First Aid

The ABCs of Emergency CPR
Establish victim’s unresponsiveness.
Gently shake victim and shout, “Are you all right?”
Airway
• Open airway: lift chin, tilt head. (With neck injury, lift chin but
do not tilt head.)
• Look for chest movement.
• Listen for sound of breathing.
• Feel for breath on your cheek.
Breathing
• Head tilt position – pinch victim’s nose shut while lifting chin
with your other hand.
• Give two full breaths while maintaining airtight seal with your
mouth over the victim’s mouth.
NOTE: A pocket mask can be used instead, but proper

head position and airtight seal must be maintained.
Circulation
Locate carotid artery pulse; hold 10 seconds. If no pulse:
• Begin external chest compressions by locating hand posi-
tion two fingers above notch and placing heel of hand on
breastbone.
• Perform 15 compressions of 1½ to 2 inches at a rate of 80 to
100 compressions per minute. (Count, “One and two and
three and...,” etc.) Come up smoothly, keeping hand contact
with victim’s chest at all times.
• Repeat the cycle of two breaths, 15 compressions, until victim’s
pulse and breathing return. If only the pulse is present, con-
tinue rescue breathing until medical assistance is available.
Reproduced with permission. © MedAire, Inc.

September 2002
Airway
Breathing
Circulation B3CRH-EM001i

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Heart Attack
Signals
• Pressure, squeezing, fullness, or pain in center of chest
behind breastbone.
• Sweating.
• Nausea.
• Shortness of breath.
• Feeling of weakness.
Actions for Survival
• Recognize signals.
• Stop activity and lie or sit down.
• Provide oxygen if available.
• If signals persist longer than two minutes, get victim to
medical assistance.

September 2002
Choking
If victim can cough or speak:
• Encourage continued coughing.
• Provide oxygen if available.
If victim cannot cough or speak:
• Perform Heimlich maneuver (abdominal thrusts):
1. Stand behind victim; wrap arms around victim’s waist.
2. Place fist of one hand (knuckles up) in upper abdomen*.
3. Grasp fist with opposite hand.
4. Press fist into upper abdomen* with quick, inward and
upward thrusts.
5. Perform maneuver until foreign body is expelled.
• Provide supplemental oxygen if available.
* If victim is pregnant or obese, perform chest thrusts
instead of abdominal thrusts.
B3CRH-EM002i

September 2002
CAE SimuFlite
Emergency Equipment Record

Emergency Date Last
Location
Equipment Serviced
First Aid Kit
Fire Extinguisher(s)
Fire Axe
Life Raft
Life Vests
Therapeutic
Oxygen
Overwater
Survival Kit
Other
7- 24 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

September 2002
Conversion Tables
Table of Contents
Distance Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Meters/Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Statute Miles/Kilometers/Nautical Miles . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Kilometers/Nautical Miles/Statute Miles . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Weight Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Fuel Weight to Volume Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Volume Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Temperature Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) . . . . . . . 8-10
Altimeter Setting Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Cabin Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite

October 1996
Conversion Tables
Distance Conversion
Meters/Feet
Meters Feet Meters Feet
.3048 1 3.2908
.61 2 6.58
.91 3 9.87
1.22 4 13.16
1.52 5 16.45
1.83 6 19.74
2.13 7 23.04
2.44 8 26.33
2.74 9 29.62
3.1 10 32.9
6.1 20 65.8
9.1 30 98.7
12.2 40 131.6
15.2 50 165.5
18.3 60 197.4
21.3 70 230.4
24.4 80 263.3
27.4 90 296.2
31 100 329
61 200 658
91 300 987
122 400 1316
152 500 1645
183 600 1974
213 700 2304
244 800 2633
274 900 2962
305 1000 3291

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Statute Miles/Kilometers/Nautical Miles

Statute Miles Kilometers Nautical Miles
.62137 1 .53996
1.24 2 1.08
1.86 3 1.62
2.49 4 2.16
3.11 5 2.70
3.73 6 3.24
4.35 7 3.78
4.97 8 4.32
5.59 9 4.86
6.21 10 5.40
12.43 20 10.80
18.64 30 16.20
24.85 40 21.60
31.07 50 27.00
37.28 60 32.40
43.50 70 37.80
49.71 80 43.20
55.92 90 48.60
62.14 100 54.00
124.27 200 107.99
186.41 300 161.99
248.55 400 215.98
310.69 500 269.98
372.82 600 323.98
434.96 700 377.97
497.10 800 431.97
559.23 900 485.96
621.37 1000 539.96

October 1996
Conversion Tables
Kilometers/Nautical Miles/Statute Miles

Kilometers Nautical Miles Statute Miles
1.8520 1 1.1508
3.70 2 2.30
5.56 3 3.45
7.41 4 4.60
9.26 5 5.75
11.11 6 6.90
12.96 7 8.06
14.82 8 9.21
16.67 9 10.36
18.52 10 11.51
37.04 20 23.02
55.56 30 34.52
74.08 40 46.03
92.60 50 57.54
111.12 60 69.05
129.64 70 80.56
148.16 80 92.06
166.68 90 103.57
185.20 100 115.08
370.40 200 230.16
555.60 300 345.24
740.80 400 460.32
926.00 500 575.40
1111.20 600 690.48
1296.40 700 805.56
1481.60 800 920.64
1666.80 900 1035.72
1852.00 1000 1150.80

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Weight Conversion
Lbs/Kilograms
Lbs Kgs Lbs Kgs
2.2046 1 .4536
4.40 2 .91
6.61 3 1.36
8.82 4 1.81
11.02 5 2.27
13.23 6 2.72
15.43 7 3.18
17.64 8 3.63
19.84 9 4.08
22.0 10 4.5
44.1 20 9.1
66.1 30 13.6
88.2 40 18.1
110.2 50 22.7
132.3 60 27.2
154.3 70 31.8
176.4 80 36.3
198.4 90 40.8
220 100 45
441 200 91
661 300 136
882 400 181
1102 500 227
1323 600 272
1543 700 318
1764 800 363
1984 900 408
2205 1000 454

October 1996
Conversion Tables
Fuel Weight to Volume Conversion

U.S. Gal/Lbs; Liter/Lbs; Liter/Kg
TURBINE FUEL Volume/Weight
(up to 5 lbs variation per 100 gallons due to fuel grade and temperature)
U.S. U.S.
Gal Lbs Gal Lbs Ltr Lbs Ltr Lbs Ltr Kg Ltr Kg
.15 1 6.7 .57 1 1.8 1.25 1 .8
.30 2 13.4 1.14 2 3.6 2.50 2 1.6
.45 3 20.1 1.71 3 5.4 3.75 3 2.4
.60 4 26.8 2.28 4 7.2 5.00 4 3.2
.75 5 33.5 2.85 5 9.0 6.25 5 4.0
.90 6 40.2 3.42 6 10.8 7.50 6 4.8
1.05 7 46.9 3.99 7 12.6 8.75 7 5.6
1.20 8 53.6 4.56 8 14.4 10.00 8 6.4
1.35 9 60.3 5.13 9 16.2 11.25 9 7.2
1.5 10 67 5.7 10 18 12.5 10 8
3.0 20 134 11.4 20 36 25.0 20 16
4.5 30 201 17.1 30 54 37.5 30 24
6.0 40 268 22.8 40 72 50.0 40 32
7.5 50 335 28.5 50 90 62.5 50 40
9.0 60 402 34.2 60 108 75.0 60 48
10.5 70 469 39.9 70 126 87.5 70 56
12.0 80 536 45.6 80 144 100.0 80 64
13.5 90 603 51.3 90 162 113.5 90 72
15 100 670 57 100 180 125 100 80
30 200 1340 114 200 360 250 200 160
45 300 2010 171 300 540 375 300 240
60 400 2680 228 400 720 500 400 320
75 500 3350 285 500 900 625 500 400
90 600 4020 342 600 1080 750 600 480
105 700 4690 399 700 1260 875 700 560
120 800 5360 456 800 1440 1000 800 640
135 900 6030 513 900 1620 1125 900 720
150 1000 6700 570 1000 1800 1250 1000 800

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
Volume Conversion
Imp Gal/U.S. Gal; U.S. Gal/Ltr; Imp Gal/Ltr
Imp U.S. Imp U.S. U.S. U.S. Imp Imp
Gal Gal Gal Gal Gal Ltr Gal Ltr Gal Ltr Gal Ltr
.83267 1 1.2010 .26418 1 3.7853 .21997 1 4.5460
1.67 2 2.40 .52 2 7.57 0.44 2 9.09
2.49 3 3.60 .79 3 11.35 0.66 3 13.64

3.33 4 4.80 1.06 4 15.14 0.88 4 18.18
4.16 5 6.01 1.32 5 18.92 1.10 5 23.73
5.00 6 7.21 1.59 6 22.71 1.32 6 27.28
5.83 7 8.41 1.85 7 26.50 1.54 7 31.82
6.66 8 9.61 2.11 8 30.28 1.76 8 36.37
7.49 9 10.81 2.38 9 34.07 1.98 9 40.91
8.3 10 12.0 2.6 10 37.9 2.2 10 45.6
16.7 20 24.0 5.3 20 75.7 4.4 20 91.0
24.9 30 36.0 7.9 30 113.5 6.6 30 136.4
33.3 40 48.0 10.6 40 151.4 8.8 40 181.8
41.6 50 60.1 13.2 50 189.2 11.0 50 227.3
50.0 60 72.1 15.9 60 227.1 13.2 60 272.8
58.3 70 84.1 18.5 70 265.0 15.4 70 318.2
66.6 80 96.1 21.1 80 302.8 17.6 80 363.7
74.9 90 108.1 23.8 90 340.7 19.8 90 409.1
83 100 120 26.4 100 379 22 100 455
167 200 240 53 200 757 44 200 909
249 300 360 79 300 1136 66 300 1364
333 400 480 106 400 1514 88 400 1818
416 500 601 132 500 1893 110 500 2273
500 600 721 159 600 2271 132 600 2728
583 700 841 185 700 2650 154 700 3182
666 800 961 211 800 3028 176 800 3637
749 900 1081 238 900 3407 198 900 4091
833 1000 1201 264 1000 3785 220 1000 4546

October 1996
Conversion Tables
Temperature Conversion
Celsius/Fahrenheit
˚C ˚F ˚C ˚F ˚C ˚F ˚C ˚F ˚C ˚F
-54 -65 -32 -26 -10 14 12 54 34 93
-53 -63 -31 -24 - 9 16 13 55 35 95
-52 -62 -30 -22 - 8 18 14 57 36 97
-51 -60 -29 -20 - 7 19 15 59 37 99
-50 -58 -28 -18 - 6 21 16 61 38 100
-49 -56 -27 -17 - 5 23 17 63 39 102
-48 -54 -26 -15 - 4 25 18 64 40 104
-47 -53 -25 -13 - 3 27 19 66 41 106
-46 -51 -24 -11 - 2 28 20 68 42 108
-45 -49 -23 - 9 - 1 30 21 70 43 109
-44 -47 -22 - 8 0 32 22 72 44 111
-43 -45 -21 - 6 1 34 23 73 45 113
-42 -44 -20 - 4 2 36 24 75 46 115
-41 -42 -19 - 2 3 37 25 77 47 117
-40 -40 -18 0 4 39 26 79 48 118
-39 -38 -17 1 5 41 27 81 49 120
-38 -36 -16 - 3 6 43 28 82 50 122
-37 -35 -15 - 5 7 45 29 84 51 124
-36 -33 -14 - 7 8 46 30 86 52 126
-35 -31 -13 - 9 9 48 31 88 53 127
-34 -29 -12 -10 10 50 32 90 54 129
-33 -27 -11 -12 11 52 33 91 55 131

October 1996
CAE SimuFlite
International Standard
Atmosphere (ISA)
Altitude/Temperature
Altitude ISA Altitude ISA Altitude ISA Altitude ISA

(ft) (˚C) (ft) (˚C) (ft) (˚C) (ft) (˚C)
S.L. 15.0 11,000 -6.8 22,000 -28.5 33,000 -50.3
1,000 13.0 12,000 -8.8 23,000 -30.5 34,000 -52.3
2,000 11.0 13,000 -10.7 24,000 -32.5 35,000 -54.2
3,000 9.1 14,000 -12.7 25,000 -34.5 36,000 -56.2
4,000 7.1 15,000 -14.7 26,000 -36.5 37,000 -56.5
5,000 5.1 16,000 -16.7 27,000 -38.4 38,000 -56.5
6,000 3.1 17,000 -18.7 28,000 -40.4 39,000 -56.5
7,000 1.1 18,000 -20.6 29,000 -42.4 40,000 -56.5
8,000 -0.8 19,000 -22.6 30,000 -44.4 41,000 -56.5
9,000 -2.8 20,000 -24.6 31,000 -46.3 42,000 -56.5
10,000 -4.8 21,000 -26.6 32,000 -48.3 43,000 -56.5

October 1996
Conversion Tables
Altimeter Setting Conversion

Hectopascals or Millibars/Inches of Mercury
1 hectopascal = 1 millibar = 0.02953 inch of mercury
Hectopascals 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
or Millibars Inches of Mercury
880 25.99 26.02 26.05 26.07 26.10 26.13 26.16 26.19 26.22 26.25
890 26.28 26.31 26.34 26.37 26.40 26.43 26.46 26.49 26.52 26.55
900 26.58 26.61 26.64 26.67 26.70 26.72 26.75 26.78 26.81 26.84
910 26.87 26.90 26.93 26.96 26.99 27.02 27.05 27.08 27.11 27.14
920 27.17 27.20 27.23 27.26 27.29 27.32 27.34 27.37 27.40 27.43
930 27.46 27.49 27.52 27.55 27.58 27.61 27.64 27.67 27.70 27.73
940 27.76 27.79 27.82 27.85 27.88 27.91 27.94 27.96 27.99 28.02
950 28.05 28.08 28.11 28.14 28.17 28.20 28.23 28.26 28.29 28.32
960 28.35 28.38 28.41 28.44 28.47 28.50 28.53 28.56 28.58 28.61
970 28.64 28.67 28.70 28.73 28.76 28.79 28.82 28.85 28.88 28.91
980 28.94 28.97 29.00 29.03 29.06 29.09 29.12 29.15 29.18 29.21
990 29.23 29.26 29.29 29.32 29.35 29.38 29.41 29.44 29.47 29.50
1000 29.53 29.56 29.59 29.62 29.65 29.68 29.71 29.74 29.77 29.80
1010 29.83 29.85 29.88 29.91 29.94 29.97 30.00 30.03 30.06 30.09
1020 30.12 30.15 30.18 30.21 30.24 30.27 30.30 30.33 30.36 30.39
1030 30.42 30.45 30.47 30.50 30.53 30.56 30.59 30.62 30.65 30.68
1040 30.71 30.74 30.77 30.80 30.83 30.86 30.89 30.92 30.95 30.98
1050 31.01 31.04 31.07 31.10 31.12 31.15 31.18 31.21 31.24 31.27

October 1996
CABIN ALTITUDE 1000 FT
8-12
0
1
2
4
5
7
8
3
6
DELTA
PRESS
URE =
0.0 PSI
DELTA
PRES
SURE
= 2.0 P
SI
10
DELT
A PR
ESSU
RE =
4 .0 PS
I
CAE SimuFlite
Cabin Altitude
DEL
TA P
R ESS
20
URE
= 6.0
PSI
DEL
DE TA
LTA PRE
PR SSU
ESS RE
UR =8
30
DE E= .0 P
LTA 8.5 SI
PR 5 PSI
ES
SU
RE
CABIN ALTITUDE = 6500 FT
AIRCRAFT ALTITUDE 1000 FT
=9
.45
PS
I
40
50
October 1996
King Air 200

BE20 Cockpit Reference PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BE20 Cockpit Reference PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BE20 Cockpit Reference PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

King Air 200

Cockpit Reference Handbook

Copyright © 2010, CAE, Inc.

Raytheon aircraft materials used in this publication

Printed in the United States of America.

Welcome to CAE SimuFlite!

Our goal is a basic one: to enhance your safety, proficiency

We urge you to participate actively in all training activities.

Thank you for choosing CAE SimuFlite. We recognize that

The Staff of CAE SimuFlite

King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 1-1

1-2 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

The Procedures chapter contains four elements: Preflight

The Limitations chapter contains general, operational, and air-

The alphabetically arranged Systems chapter includes text for

The Flight Planning chapter includes maximum allowable

The Servicing chapter contains servicing specifications and

The Emergency Information chapter provides basic first aid

Information in the Conversion Tables chapter may facilitate

King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 1-3

1-4 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 2-1

2-2 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 2A-1

2A-2 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

CAUTION: The elevator trim system must not be manually,

Fuel Control Panel CBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN

WARNING: Beards and mustaches should be carefully

King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 2A-3

Oxygen Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DETERMINE

NOTE: A bottle of 1,850 PSIG at 15°C is fully charged

Fig. 2A-1; Oxygen Duration Chart

2A-4 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

Stated ‡ Number of People Using

Stated ‡ Number of People Using

King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 2A-5

Hot Battery Bus Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERFORMED

NOTE: On BB-1096, 1098 and subsequent and BL-58

2A-6 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

Noisy Ramp Procedure

King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 2A-7

Preflight Inspection Walkaround Path External Inspection

NOTE: All wicks must be installed and in good condition

Wingtip Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURE/UNDAMAGED

2A-8 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

Tie-Down and Chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVED

King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 2A-9

NOTE: To avoid overservicing the tank and high oil con-

NOTE: Service the oil system in accordance with Consum-

Left Cowling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSPECTED

2A-10 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

Engine Air Intake Throat . . . . . . . . CLEAR/UNDAMAGED

King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 2A-11

2A-12 Developed for Training Purposes King Air 200

NOTE: To avoid overservicing the tank and high oil con-

NOTE: Service the oil system in accordance with Consum-

Left Cowling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSPECTED

King Air 200 Developed for Training Purposes 2A-13

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK CONDITION